Home

Lighting Control Console Operations Manual

1. 63 Patching a Dimmer 64 Patching Moving Lights 66 Display Pages in Patch 68 Using the Scroller Wheel Picker and Editor 74 Calibrating a Scroller 78 Changing the Patch View 61 KoywOoRIS 22 1 aber sage PEG AA tete o peer bb C Upper es 80 Deleting Channels 80 Fixture Creator ccce sess e LA ewe yy x xd 81 Update Library ccelis ius 85 59 About Patch lon treats fixtures and channels as one and the same meaning each fixture is assigned a single control channel number Individual parameters of that fixture such as intensity pan tilt zoom or iris are also associated with that same channel number but as additional lines of channel information You are required to enter only the simplest data to patch a device and begin programming your show such as the channel number the device type if needed and address When you provide more information in the patch you will have more detailed control and improved function during operation One or more devices may be patched to a single channel For example you may want to patch a group of dimmers to the same channel In addition you may patch multiple devices to the same channel for building a compound or accessorized fixtures For example a Source Four with
2. moaganmaoaag E Ethernet FA ER og LI Ei 69 lon Console Ll Two Remote r a Processing Units Client Software RPU for backup EF I mi i Il ciii il SEE e Eos Console 2 System Installation Net3 Remote Video Interface RVI cam Radio Focus Remote RFR Receiver Radio Focus Remote RFR Transmitter BE Contact In Contact Out RS232 Ex MIDI SMPTE amp K gt DMX RDM 1G Net3 Gateways Sensor Dimmers 19 20 lon Operations Manual Chapter 3 system Basics This chapter explains the base level procedures for setting up navigating and understanding how to operate lon This chapter contains the following sections Setting Up the Hardware 22 s POWOF cd ae eae ee Dan aide den fiae eed gd 23 The Central Information Area CIA 27 Using the Browser 29 Display Control and Navigation 33 e Graphical User Interface GUI Display Conventions 35 gt Using SFOFMAN a pA NAG cere teme meth ad 43 e Using Flexichannel 40 ENOJOS AA 46 Using SoflkeyS a 46
3. 144 Entering Blind Palette from Live 144 Editing in Blind 144 Editing Palettes in Spreadsheet View 145 Editing Palettes in List View 146 Deleting Palettes 147 Removing Channels from a Palette 147 Chapter 11 Working with a Single Cue List 149 Basic CUCING Gesso styr hate eh aan dte same d epe ala ae 150 Cue Numbering 150 Recording Cues in Live 151 USING RECOM sat nt wate T E PE Pied NE EY E 151 Using Record Only 2 0 06 c cece ee e e ne 152 Using Selective Store 153 Using Cue Only Track 154 RIMMING 2 2 tate ee baa qt ete ate re He Ma eee ae te kee 155 Setting Cue Level Timing 155 Non intensity Parameter Category Timing 156 Delay Time serez Pe id ee en PI DR d 157 Discrete Channel or Parameter Timing 158 Assigning Cue Attributes 159 Clearing Cue Attributes 161 Flags anG BAGS eee ad tag be haa ae ied KGG 162 BlOCK CA AA 162 ASSOM coc petam AA EA DRE D TM LP DATAE RE 163 AIF ANC ie cosbelsvzesem dat ON ws aided ewe dole e eee 163 Mania aire eave ep nN ape ek Rig abe inte ds de ane 163 P
4. 98 show control about 278 analog inputs 283 configure ports 305 OVN Sie 24e eda sd ea 278 MIDI Show Control 283 real time clock 282 relay outputs 283 serial RS 232 286 settings aa 98 using time code 280 281 show file Create 2 Lei sat che 48 deleting 57 exporting 4 56 importing 56 loading parts of 49 merging 52 name bold cxi eg 48 normal 48 ROW PEUT Be aa a 48 open existing 48 AA et Ae Ens 53 quick save 55 SAVE aS Sines ae he be 55 saving existing 55 show setup 94 show settings 95 shutter control from encoders 117 slider module opening 30 with playbacks 214 SMPTE CUS UT ORNE ER REL ANAN 98 sneak description 126 softkeys about xs is kana 46 changing pages 46 context sensitive 46 solo mode softkey in cue list index 194 spreadsheet view 45 editing palettesin 145 editing presetsin 136 modifying cues from 172 modifying using move to 173 modifying using replace with 173 status pateh iio x du san Baw pues 63 s
5. 8 open direct selects 30 displays 4s ge sped oy edd 33 from the browser 33 from the hardkeys 33 from the softkeys 33 fixture creator 81 partial show 49 slider module 30 virtual encoders 115 ordered channels 88 ordered view groups evo nina une ne 90 out go to clle ee Ne EE 191 out of sequence cues 212 using go to cue 213 output address in patch 63 output DMX 15 FOMNON a ar dus hat mes 305 P paging encoders 46 lon Operations Manual faders uc a Re eed a 214 softkeys 46 palettes about AA 137 as absolute data 144 beam 138 COI 2222 ole A eho 138 deleting 147 editing in blind 144 spreadsheet view 145 editing inlive 143 filters 141 POCUS cx Done sn ares 138 intensity 138 list view 146 recalling XX a 44444442 142 rerecording 143 selective storing using Record 140 storing 139 using Record only 140 using Record 139 types of us en eoim pars 138 updating 143 using about 253 parameter category timing CO AA 156 para
6. 88 lon Operations Manual multipart cues 204 attributes 205 new cue list 188 using Record Only 188 using Record 188 palettes 139 with selective store 140 partial filters with 185 presets cesta ovo RH 130 submasters 256 record defaults setting 100 record filters storing data with 186 referenced marks 177 setting flags 177 MING ec dtt 181 register your lon 3 relative effects 239 relay outputs 283 release sonos uh ERREUR 219 Release See Sneak rem dim See remainder dim remainder dim 123 highlight 125 Remote Device Management See RDM Remote Processor Unit RPU 315 button configuration 317 hardware setup front panel 316 rear panel 315 in System Overview 10 in System Riser BASIC eso ss dune 18 large d mo ne tsatats 19 Startups o maman eme ed 316 Remote Video Interface RVI 319 button configuration 322 hardware setup front panel 321 rear panel 320 in System Overview 10 in System Riser large esos aed oe ET 19 start Up sss Li 321 remove channels from presets 136 147 referenced
7. 174 editingin blind 171 execute list 164 flags ape ne M dame 162 allfade 163 assert a es Sena 163 block 162 mark 163 preheat 163 JO LOCUS daa ee ed vy gens 213 manual control during playback 216 modifying from spreadsheet view 172 from summary view 172 from table view 172 using At Enter 165 using move to inblind 173 inlive 166 using Record Only 166 using Record 165 using Replace With 173 using Update 167 modifying in live 165 multipart about 203 changing to 207 changing to a standard cue 207 deleting a part 207 setting part attributes 205 numbering 150 out of sequence 212 using go to cue 213 part See cues multipart recording using Record Only 152 using Record 151 recording in blind 171 recording in live 151 recording multiparts in live 204 settings in Setup 95 storing selective 153 using Cue Only Track in Cue Only mode 154 in Track mode 154 storing multiparts in blind 207 timing xim meet n LM 155 delay 159 discrete 158 manual
8. 315 OVEIVIQW set anni santa ue nn la etai 315 Hardware Setup 315 Start Up s asad nes dee tes aie tabs nn Nes buts 316 Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F xii Software Configuration 317 Basic Use Guidelines anaa 318 Net3 ServiGeS c sure de eats Eie IER Ae MET 318 Remote Video Interface RVI 319 OverVieW ss ea ex Rm Spa Rin ih eee rates 319 Hardware Setup 320 Start UD sen ae aaa man eee oe ORs RE ROS ah Se 321 Basic Use Guidelines 322 Remote Control 323 Remotes Overview 323 Remote Focus Remote RFR 324 Console Section Mode cece eee eee eee 325 Basic Use Guidelines 327 LCD General Layout 327 RFR Operation Modes 329 Technical Specifications 333 Universal Fader Wings 335 ONE VIEW 3 Kan desse dea e DE PERS let HD 335 1 x 20 Setup curet ete Redes TI ee ate ne 335 2 x 10 and 2 x 20 Setup 335 User Guidelines for Fader Wings 338 lon Operations Manual Introduction Welcome to the lon Operations Manual This manual is a comprehensive resource
9. 98 Show Control 283 move to inipatchzs osuere ilu 65 move to softkey abouts eus nails es 128 in cue list index 194 with cues in blind 173 with cues inlive 166 moving lights display conventions 35 patching 66 multiconsole 307 310 features of 310 multipart cues 203 ABOUT 5 2 4 daca mad Me RS 203 attributes setting 205 changing into standard cues 207 changing standard cues into 207 recording in live 204 storing in blind 207 updating in live 206 multiple intensity channels 120 multiple users 287 N navigating encoders 4 44 46 navigation keys data eate ed 39 times caedes 39 next key 109 nodes 15 non intensity parameters NPs controlling 111 setting SO Nas ase antec ER M teh 122 T6 Manahan dap aae 122 setting with encoders 112 NPs See non intensity parameters numbering CUCS 1 2 xe NBA es 150 numeric view groups zoe ped dr Sees 90 O off key using with faders 219 offline console definition 307 OffSel 2 Brun Sete uer na pinana el 109 channels in groups 89 in patch 72 online forums register for
10. Als pes rs sd aha RE Bi isisdiceiagandsdaes PP PP EX System Basics 7 I7 N I7 A Apr Show Channels 8 9 15 FL a 28 56 Pr Q 107 5 CP2 MK to text indicators as well Therefore red indicates a manual to text indicators as well Therefore red indicates a manual Underlined value white indicates a system applied block also called an auto block Indicates the channel or parameter is asserted Indicates the channel or parameter is manually blocked This block must be stored Captured Channel Channel is controlled by an inhibitive submaster or grandmaster When displayed in the Block flag I indicates a cue level intensity block 37 38 IP CP FP BP Indicates that the value is referenced to a palette Intensity Color Focus or Beam This text is followed by a number indicating which palette is being referenced This can be substituted with the palette label if the Show Reference Label setting is activated see Show Reference Labels page 103 Holding down Label will toggle between the palette label and palette number Indicates the channel is marked for a later cue The cue number is indicated in the other categories see Q below Indicates the value is null from either Make Null or a filter Indicates the channel is parked Indicates the channel is at a preheat level Indicates that the value is referenced to a preset
11. FrameRate 2 5 Enter Specify the timing for the event e Event 4 Time 2 1 4 5 1 6 Enter Now create the events that the list will trigger e Event 1 Cue 2 Enter Event 2 Cue 3 Enter Event 3 Sub 5 Enter You can also add or remove frames from events Event 1 Thru 5 Time 5 Enter Depending on your time settings lon will look for an input time or start its own internal clock and events will play back at their specified times Learn Mode If you specify an event list in the command line you can press the Learn hardkey to activate learn mode for that list When in learn mode an event is created with the current list time whenever a cue is activated a submaster bump is pressed or a macro is run If Learn is pressed while viewing any other screen than the show control display an empty event will be placed on all event lists that are in learn mode Multiple time code lists can be in learn mode simultaneously each with their individual times Execution While Editing If the internal or external clock is running events will fire even if you are in the edit screen As soon as an event is created the event list is resorted and the new event is eligible for playback Using Show Control 281 Real Time Clock RTC lon has the ability to run Real Time Clock RTC events RTC events are used to run a cue submaster or macro at a specific time on
12. 108 in patch 63 using about 249 250 CIA See Central Information Area cleaning lon 13 clear cue attributes 161 LS SERRE 185 p tchi ver psa 60 submaster 260 clear functions 32 client console definition 307 close displays 33 color control from encoders 117 color effects 240 color indicators in live blind 36 color palette description 138 color picker description 118 command history 201 command line about tre Eme 27 syntax structure 4 compound channel patching 67 configuration utility 293 303 configure gateways 15 grandmaster 96 lon DMX ports 305 nodes 1 show control ports 305 console capacities 14 cleaning 13 geography 12 playback controls 210 conventional fixtures display conventions 35 patching dimmers 64 copy XL ie 2 ir pnr datas lalaba 85 COPY AO earo ec e de 196 create Clo rah ste qao pat gaan gag 151 cue list 188 CUIVG ane Se ua eh at 273 fixture in patch 81 group ma de d na Kah
13. 132 Editing Presets Live 444i4iiii4uuasss 133 Rerecord 133 Update rars asser RER end Ni nee du Te TS 133 Using the Preset List 134 Opening the Preset List 134 Editing Presets in Blind 135 Editing in Table View 135 Editing in Spreadsheet View anaana 136 Deleting Presets 136 Removing Channels from a Preset 136 Chapter 10 Storing and Using Palettes 137 About Palettes cde dnd edere ed eee ae oped 138 Palette Types 138 Intensity Palettes 138 Focus Palettes 138 Color Palettes 138 Beam Palettes 138 Storing Palettes Live 139 Storing Palettes with Record 139 Storing Palettes with Record Only 140 Using Filters with Palettes 141 Recalling Palettes 142 Editing Palettes Live 143 Rerecord ts anne M As ARR nat RM 143 Update sas inchs saura AG state eX e RR a dard tete 143 Editing Palettes in Blind
14. Group 2 Record Beam Palette Next Enter records the beam parameter data for Group 2 to the next sequential beam palette number 9 Record Focus Palette 5 Enter stores the focus data to focus palette 5 excluding the group or channels specified 1 Thru 9 Iris Zoom Record Beam Palette 5 Enter stores all zoom and iris data for channels 1 9 to beam palette 5 D Note When using a selective store you must specify the channel list to be included or excluded identified by the modifier as part of the Record command Otherwise all channels with appropriate non default data will be stored in the new palette Also selective storing is useful when you are doing a one time selective store action If you are recording a series of palettes with only specific parameters it will save you time to set a record filter see Using Filters with Palettes page 141 Storing Palettes with Record Only Record Only is a selective record process that stores only manual parameter data When used to record palettes only the manual parameter data for channels will be stored in the palette As with record filters can further restrict stored data if they are enabled when using Record Only See Storing Palettes Live on page 139 Note If you use Record Only to record to an existing palette the data will be added to that palette The original palette will not be completely o
15. If you then advance to the next fader page using the steps below the 1x20 wing will assume faders 21 40 and the 2x20 will assume faders 41 80 This represents an overall increment of 20 faders for the entire fader wing configuration To change the fader page of a fader wing Step 1 Press and hold the Fader Controls button on the lon console The LCD on the fader wing will display the available pages beneath the fader bump buttons Step 2 Press the bump button corresponding to the page you wish to display on the fader wing The fader wing will display those faders after your selection is made KET Universal Fader Wings 339 340 Using the Faders When the page is changed the fader wing LCD will display information for any mapped submaster or loaded playback Unmapped faders will display no information Submaster LEDs will illuminate in the color of the new submaster loaded on the page green for additive and red for inhibitive Fader wing submasters are not motorized therefore when you change pages you may have to manually reset the fader to the proper location to reflect its current output level If a submaster setting must be matched to gain control the LED will flash quickly in the appropriate color The LED will stop flashing and illuminate normally once the fader has been moved to the required location When loaded with a playback you may use the fader to interrupt a fade in progress and switch the fade to manual timing
16. Monitor screen resolution must be at least 1280x1024 Step 4 Step 5 Connect the USB mouse and keyboard to the USB connectors If you want to use a PS2 mouse or keyboard not provided you may use the appropriate connectors on the RPU Attach a network ethernet cable to the ethernet port Once all accessories have been connected you may activate the hard power switch on the rear panel EC Remote Processor Unit RPU 315 Front Panel 20 user Backlit Soft power configurable indicators switch buttons default shown PAS USB port The soft power switch activates the RPU check rear panel to ensure power is connected and hard power switch is on Backlit indicators identify the operating status master backup client and so on of the unit USB port is provided for easy show loading to or from a USB storage device 20 buttons are configurable from the Eos Configuration Utility ECU They are set to a default configuration The label strips for these buttons are removable and reversible Any changes to the button configuration can be written on the opposite side in pencil Start Up After connecting power to the unit press the soft power button on the front of the console By default the RPU will boot into the lon environment as a primary If you
17. 1 Preheat 0 3 Enter channel 1 is assigned a patched preheat value of 3 The preheat flag is applied to a cue as an attribute when the cue is recorded Proportion An attribute to set a modifier for the intensity of the device If the patch limit is set at 90 for example the actual output will always be 10 lower than the specified intensity parameter as impacted by the various playbacks or submasters This value is set numerically in a range of 0 to 200 1 Attributes Proportion 1 2 5 Enter applies a 125 proportion to channel 1 1 Attributes Proportion Enter removes the applied proportion from channel 1 e Curve Used to assign a curve to an address in patch In patch curve is applied to intensity parameters only From channel view 1 Curve 4 Enter applies curve 4 to the intensity parameter of channel 1 2 Part 3 Curve 3 Enter applies curve 3 to the intensity assigned to channel 2 part 3 From address view 3 Curve 3 Enter assigns curve 3 to address 3 3 2 Curve 4 Enter assigned curve 4 to universe 3 address 2 Invert A moving light attribute used to invert the output of pan tilt or both Select either the Invert Tilt or the Invert Pan button on the CIA 2 Attributes Invert Pan inverts the output of the pan parameter lon Operations Manual Swap A moving light attribute used to exchang
18. EX System Basics 21 Setting Up the Hardware Follow these steps to prepare your lon for use 22 Step 1 Place your console on a firm level surface Be sure to leave space for access to the rear of the console You will need to connect several items to the ports on the back Step 2 Connect any monitors to the proper ports on the back of the console Note lon supports up to 2 monitors either 2 DVI monitors or 1 DVI and 1 VGA Step 3 Connect the keyboard and mouse Attach to the appropriate connector on the back of the console Step 4 If you will be connecting to an Eos lon network connect the appropriate ethernet CAT 5 or better cable to the ethernet port on the back of the console Step 5 If you plan on using the DMX ports on the back of lon to control your lighting system attach the appropriate DMX connector and cable to the desired port These ports default to output DMX universes one and two Configuration is required to use any other universe For more information see Local DMX page 305 in the ECU appendix Step 6 Attach the appropriate IEC power cable for your location to the IEC connector on the back of the console just above the power switch Your console hardware is now ready to be powered up lon Operations Manual Power Power Up the Console Step 1 Attach the appropriate power cable to the IEC connector on the rear of the console Step 2 Press the I O switch I is on next to t
19. For more information on settings in the ECU please see Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell page 293 lon Operations Manual Appendix E Remote Control Remotes Overview Three different remotes are available for controlling lon the phone remote the radio focus remote RFR and the iRFR Phone Remote The phone remote allows for remote control of the lon console by using a wireless phone The base station for the phone connects directly to the phone remote jack on the rear of your console See Console Geography on page 12 The numeric keypad of the phone is used to control channels and levels Phone Remote Functions The numeric keypad of the phone is mapped as following 1 2 3 3 Thru 4 5 6 Last Macro 7 8 9 Next Address Full Shift 0 Enter Clear CL ba Sneak To use the commands in grey first hit the button followed by the number or symbol above the grey command For example to place a on the command line press 1 Pressing will clear the command Commands entered from the phone remote will appear on the command line for the console LE Remote Control 323 Remote Focus Remote RFR The Net3 Radio Focus Remote RFR provides remote access to frequently used console features such as dimmer D and channel checks as well as update and record functions IT tj The RFR handheld remote and receiver unit features
20. When using reference marks an M will display in the flags field for any cue that will execute a referenced mark An R displays when a cue is the source of a mark See Using Mark on page 175 Preheat Preheat can be used to warm filaments in the cue immediately preceding an intensity upfade from 0 Preheat values can be assigned channels individually in patch see Attribute Display and Settings page 70 Preheat is assigned on a cue or cue part basis and if assigned any channel in that cue with a preheat value assigned in patch will fade to that intensity in the cue immediately preceding the cue with the preheat flag Cues with a preheat flag will display an P in the preheat flag column indicated by a P at the top of the column When a channel is in a preheat state a Ph is displayed in the intensity field of that channel When a preheat is executed the preheat value is established using the upfade time of the associated cue It is possible to hold the Data key to see the actual preheat values ELI Working with a Single Cue List 163 164 Using the Execute List The execute list can be used to trigger actions on other faders and to trigger macros Additionally you can enter instructions that sync the Go of other cue lists When you press Execute a dialog box appears This provides a list of the available analog triggers and MIDI triggers Also fields are available to enter specif
21. 00404 eb RR dus etes AE ae ea 7 HTP vs LIP 424 ccc cov paie ae aad kn so deen ae 7 Other Reference Materials 8 Help System 8 Online Eos lon User Forums 8 Chapter 1 System Overview 9 System Components 10 GCOnSOl s 45 7 ba ae ache kee es PNTA NEA te oad Shale NG 10 Remote Processor Unit RPU 10 Remote Video Interface RVI 10 Radio Focus Remote RFR 10 GateWaySs zen oe foe eae daa OE EES dose 11 Console Geography 12 Terminology 12 Littlites MEE DUE 13 Cleaning lon 13 Console Capacities 14 Output Parameters 14 Channel Counts 14 Cues and Cue Lists 14 Record Targets 2 ce bee cee eee eee eee 14 Faders Na soared aa LR Ed E deal neha a ans 14 Outputting DMX 15 Chapter 2 System Installation 17 Basic System Risers 18 Large System Riser 19 i Chapter 3 System Basics 21 Setting Up the Har
22. 156 parameter category 156 setting 155 updating to references 168 without references 168 updating multiparts in live 206 using About 253 using Allfade 190 curve delete 4 zie pistes 275 in patch 70 curves Elo ANA 272 applying to channels in patch 275 tO CUES 4 275 creating ryssan ces yeu 273 editirig zem nga 274 custom fixture 85 D data navigation key 39 database settings in patch 72 delay timing 159 delete CUCS ldem p m tui 174 CUIVES meaai sat DAN Aag 275 groups siste ay 89 MACTOS oto Hana aa 270 palettes 147 parts from multipart cues 207 343 344 presets 136 show file 57 submasters 260 desk setup 100 device type setting in patch 63 dimmer patching 64 See address dimmer check See Address dimmer doubling IN IPA LGA nan ce ee eR 65 direct selects opening s 30 organizing 30 selecting channels with 31 discrete timing 158 display indicators Market ovg cs Lue 178 display indicators 35 displays attribute inpatch 70 blind channel 144 changing format 43 clo
23. 80 Fixture Creator 81 Creating a New Fixture 82 Copying a Fixture 85 Importing a Custom Fixture 85 Update Library 2 85 Chapter 6 Using Groups ss furore ea Lana 87 Recording Groups Live 88 Ordered Channels 88 ucl I 89 Editing and Updating Groups in Live 89 Selecting and Recalling Groups 89 Deleting Groups aaa E 89 Group hist Lee ex NAA a ea kaa mla Soe eo NG 90 Open the Group List 90 Ordered View and Numeric View 90 Editing Groups from the Group List 90 Using Groups as a Channel Collector 91 Chapter 7 Set cura cribs teta drame arva EA 93 Opening Setup cosas oe xt erac Dale B28 rura Rus dog 94 SNOW a aie Ioab Ba ie Eo ei repa ies 94 Desk ure es LEE Reed et E 100 SOCULILy 1 nda ee Duden rendo aa ig au ded d Po ed 105 Chapter 8 Basic Manual Control 107 Selecting Channels 108 Select Channels From the Keypad 108 ONTST 23 ctu son eio ese ga wet a RE EAE Racemi du Ee 109 Setting Intensity a eee essen dre aan 110 Level Wheel closes ese a kg 110 M
24. Exit lon Menu arrows F iy Power Off Console gt Setup iy Clear Print Opened menu Utilities BY Record Target Lists Cue List Index i Group List 1 Preset List Sub menus Preset 1 scenel gt Palettes gt Submaster List Macro Editor Park Display Yes EE Use the page arrow keys to move the selection bar up and down the list You can also use the level wheel to scroll through the list When the bar highlights the desired menu press Page B to open the menu Continue pressing Page B to open submenus Scroll to the item you wish to open using Page A or Page V and then press Select You may also click the item you wish to open and then press Select You can also use the level wheel to scroll in the browser If you wish to close a submenu scroll to that item and press Page To draw focus to the browser at any time press the Displays key Note The Select key can be used to confirm a choice in the browser Virtual Keyboard It is possible to open a virtual keyboard in the CIA which mimics the hard keys found on the actual lon keypad This virtual keyboard is accessible from the browser The virtual keyboard is found with the other virtual controls in the browser Navigate to Browser gt Virtual Controls gt Virtual Keyboard This will give you click access to the lon hardkeys on the CIA The browser and parameter display will be hidden from view whil
25. If you want to remove a parameter you can use the Page keys and Delete to remove a parameter from the list Define parameter channels Once you have added and specified all of the parameters for the new fixture you can now define the address requirements size and ranges for each of them To define the size 8 bit or 16 bit of any parameter Step 1 Use the Page keys to navigate to any parameter that you wish to alter the size of The system defaults to 8 bit for any new parameter Step 2 When selected click Size This will toggle the parameter from 8 bit to 16 bit If 16 bit is selected the system automatically applies a value in the LDMX column This value can be altered see below To define the DMX address of any parameter You can alter the default DMX address assigned to any parameter in the list This is not the actual address that will be used when patched but rather it is the order of address for the parameter relative to the other parameters in the fixture Step 1 Use the Page keys to navigate to the DMX column of the desired parameter Step 2 Enter the desired address using the keypad CAUTION Be careful not to duplicate any address in the DMX order of parameters in the new fixture lon does not prevent you from duplicating addresses 84 To define the LDMX address of any 16 bit channel LDMX or low DMX is the DMX address for the second half of any 16 bit channel If used
26. M in the flags field If AutoMark is disabled allowing a live move a D is displayed in the flags field of the cue or cue part where the data is stored By using AutoMark with multipart cues it is possible to have some parameters mark and others move live AutoMark and Timing An AutoMark will happen in the time of the cue in which is moving the M cue unless the channel has discrete timing In which case the discrete timing will apply to the moves Discrete timing is applied in the cue where the move instruction is stored lon Operations Manual Referenced Marks Referenced marks are user specified marks that are manually applied to specific channels or parameters When AutoMarks are disabled referenced marks may be used AutoMark and Referenced Marks cannot be used simultaneously Note If you begin programming with AutoMark enabled and then disable the feature all of the AutoMarks in the show are converted to referenced marks There are essentially two parts to a successful referenced mark The first part is the cue with the mark flag set by the user This is the cue in which any non intensity parameters will change This cue is referred to as the marked cue The second part is the cue with intensity value for the channels in question This is referred to as the source cue This is also the cue where the non intensity moves are stored In order to use mark properly you must specify channels to be marke
27. Preset Press Blind amp Preset x opens to the specific preset Press Preset Preset and then Edit when a preset is selected in the list CAUTION When editing presets in Blind changes to presets are automatically stored Therefore no update or record command is required You may change the way you view information in the preset list by pressing the Format button This will cycle the preset list through two different views spreadsheet and table Editing in Table View Table view shows the data for one preset at a time in a table Channels are displayed on the Y axis and parameters are shown along the X axis Viewing presets in the table is useful if you want to see data for numerous channels in one specific preset To change which preset you are viewing you may use the Next or Last keys or you may select the exact preset from the keypad or direct selects You can make changes to the preset by selecting channels and altering parameter values In addition to normal editing functions you may also use the following commands in this view Copy To Make Absolute Make Null Move To and Replace With Here are some examples of the additional preset editing features you have while editing in table view select channels or parameters Make Abs changes the data for any palette references within the preset into absolute data that no longer references another record target select channels or paramet
28. To return to the main print screen press the Advanced button To stop the show file from being saved to a PDF file and return to the browser press the Cancel button If you are ready to save the file press the Ok button You will be prompted to name the file The PDF will have the show name date and time it was created and date and times for when the show file was last saved It also gives the lon software version information If multiple aspects were selected to save to the file there will be hyperlinks at the top of the PDF so you can quickly jump to a section lon Operations Manual Saving the Current Show File To save the current show data navigate within the browser to File gt Save gt and press Select The Show File Archive is the default storage location for show files when they are saved The new time stamp located beneath the show file name on the CIA indicates that the show file has been saved All previous saves are stored in the Show File Archive with the time stamp following the file name Using Quick Save To save the current show data to the hard drive without having to navigate to the browser hold down Update and press Select Using Save As To save an existing lon show file to a different location or with a different name navigate within the browser to File gt Save As gt and press Select Browser File t New Save DAShowArchivelCricket amp Cache Y Save As Y Show File A
29. Unpatched channel number White number Selected channel number Bright White number Channel is parked Gold number Channel is captured Gold outline Selected channel Number with no graphicDeleted channel Channel or parameter levels 36 Red Manual data any data that has been set but not yet stored to an active cue or submaster Blue eos The intensity value is higher than in the previous cue Non intensity parameters NPs are in blue when any move instruction has occurred Unmarked Green The intensity value is lower than in the previous cue Also used in reference marking to indicate a channel has just marked Magenta In amark cue the recorded value is tracked unchanged from a previous cue or in a reference cue that a stored mark is still intact White The value is blocked Gray Default or the value is a null value from either Make Null or a filter When nulled a gray n appears next to the value Yellow Data set from a submaster lon Operations Manual Text Indicators in live blind Please note examples of text indicators in the following graphic B underscore C vus AE Ph R M p gy 1 1 P Color conventions listed above apply value that must be stored Color conventions listed above apply value that must be stored
30. Update Cue 5 Trace Enter updates cue 5 and tracks changes backward until a move instruction is encountered If the system is in track mode the change will track forward in the cue list until the next move instruction or block If in cue only mode this has no impact on subsequent cues Update Trace Cue Only Track Enter updates the selected cue and tracks changes backward until a move instruction is encountered If the system is in track mode the change is prohibited from tracking forward in the list If in cue only mode the change is allowed to track forward Updating the Current Cue The current cue is updated by simply pressing Update Enter When only one cue list is active this update will include any changes to all channels Updating a Source Cue To update the source of a level in the current cue therefore a move instruction in a prior cue you must specify a trace for the desired channel s 5 Update Trace Enter updates any manual changes for channel 5 in the current cue Any tracked values for channel 5 are traced back to the source of the value the original move instruction and changed to the new value The value for traced changes in the current cue will be magenta indicating it is a tracked value Trace Trace If a channel was inactive in the cue either because it had not previously been used in the cue list or it was a tracked zero and is set to a new level by default the ne
31. aw As it is possible to patch by either output address or port offset pressing the Data key will toggle the display to show the alternate output information lon Operations Manual Create and Edit Patch Select Channel Set Device Type and Output Address Each field identified in the patch display is also displayed in the CIA as a button You can select the fields using the page arrow keys with scroll lock engaged and edit them using the control keypad or from the CIA buttons Selecting Channels You may select channels for patching and editing using the keypad or direct selects Keypad Channels may be selected in all of the same methods as defined in Selecting Channels page 108 When channels are selected the patch display will show those channels and highlighted in gold After selecting the channel or group of channels you may set each of the attributes beginning with the device type followed by the starting address See Patch Display and Settings on page 68 Note When patching conventional dimmers it is not necessary to specify the device type Dimmer is assumed Status in the Patch Display The first column in the patch display will advise you when a channel requires your attention e lis displayed next to a channel number to indicate there is a dimmer feedback error Helpful hints At Next Enter finds the next available address range large enough to accomodate the selected d
32. can be quickly accessed by double pressing the record target button for example Preset Preset opens the preset list From the browser Open and navigate the browser as described in Using the Browser page 29 When you open a new display such as the cue list index group list or patch it will open on the primary display If the display does not open to a monitor such as setup or the browser it will open in the CIA Again any time you wish to return to the browser simply press Displays From the hardkeys You can open list views of any record target by double pressing the key for the desired record target From the LCD softkeys To open any displays accessible from the softkeys press Displays The softkeys will repaint to display Effect Status Color Picker Patch e Setup Curves Browser Any of these softkeys will open the associated display with a single press Closing Displays To close any display Press the Displays key again to open a different display Press Escape to close the active display The screen will return to live or blind Press Live or Blind to replace the display with the live blind view To close a display in the CIA press the Displays key and the browser will reappear EX System Basics 33 34 Swap Displays When using two monitors you can swap displays between monitors by pressing the Swap key Press it again to return to the original configuration
33. lon Operations Manual Select the specific show file Navigate within the specified storage location and select the show file you wish to open press Select f the selected show has multiple time stamps navigate to the desired revision and press Select This will open the partial show loading screen in the CIA Color Parked Cues Palette Presets Channels Curves Beam Show Advanced gm Palette SUPmasters Control Intensity Palette Groups Effects Fixtures Cancel Focus Macros System Palette Settings Snapshots From this screen you can select which components of the show file you wish to load The buttons at the center of the CIA represent all of the show components that you can choose to load By default all components are selected gray and will be loaded To withhold any show components from loading simply deselect them in the CIA by clicking the respective button To reselect all show components click the Reset button and all buttons will return to gray selected To stop the show load process click the Cancel button When you have selected or deselected all of the show components you require click OK lon loads the selected show to the console ES Managing Show Files 49 Selective Partial Show Opening If you select the Advanced button in the partial show opening screen you will have the opportunity to load partial components from the show file and be able to specify the desired locatio
34. resume playback 1 Assert 1 assert playback 1 Stop 1 stop playback 1 Stop Cue 1 2 stop cue 2 from list 1 if it is running Stop stops all Resume Cue 1 2 resume cue 2 from list 1 if it is stopped Resume resumes all SubAssert 1 assert submaster 1 SubUnload 1 unload sub 1 SubDown 5 presses sub 5 s bump button down SubUp 5 releases sub 5 s bump button SubMove 1 50 sets sub 1 to 50 PlaybackMove 1 50 sets playback 1 to 50 percent Grandmaster 1 100 set Grandmaster 1 to full there s currently only 1 Grandmaster Macro 1 fires Macro 1 Note Text requires a carriage return to terminate the command line lon Operations Manual Chapter 25 Multiple Users lon can be set to act as a separate user from other consoles on the lon system or it can be set to act as the same user as another console This is done by changing the user ID This chapter contains the following sections About UserID 288 e Assigning User ID 288 E Multiple Users 287 About User ID When multiple users are on the Eos or lon network they can all act as one combined user as all separate users or any of the varying degrees between Any lon console RPU Eos console RVI or client PC can be a separate user on the Eos lon network Certain Eos lon devices work well as independent users while others are intended to share a user ID with another dev
35. sets channel 1 scroller value null in the selected color palette 1 Scroller 4 Enter sets channel 1 scroller value to 40 in the selected color palette In addition to the examples given above here are some examples of the additional palette editing features you have while editing in spreadsheet view palette type 1 thru 5 Move To palette type 9 thru Enter this will move palettes 1 5 to palettes 9 14 respectively You do not have to supply the end value for lon to perform the move Beam Palette 1 Thru 5 Enter Iris 5 0 Replace With Iris 2 5 Enter for palettes 1 5 this command will replace any iris parameter values of 50 with values of 25 This range editing using Replace With can only be done in spreadsheet view ET Storing and Using Palettes 145 146 Editing Palettes in List View When you press the specific Intensity Focus Color or Beam palette button twice a list view for the associated palette type is opened on a new tab or brings the list view into focus if already open You can also open the list view from the browser See Using the Browser on page 29 From the list view you can select a palette for editing which changes focus to blind channel view with the specified palette ready for editing In addition you can add palettes to your listing and edit the labels for each palette in the list For Example In the list view you can select palett
36. 1 Color Time Manual Enter assigns a manual time to channel 1 This must be recorded or updated to a cue Manual timing can also be set at a cue level Record Cue 5 Time Manual Enter Manual timing can also be set at a cue category level Record Cue 6 Color Time Manual Enter lon Operations Manual Manual Intensity Override An intensity transition may be taken over manually and the transition captured by dropping the fader down until it reaches the percentage of cue completion i e if the cue is 50 complete when the fader is manually dropped to 50 the intensity transitions will be captured and the intensity portion of the cue completed by moving the fader manually between 50 and full or anywhere in between If the fader is dropped below 50 the fader will fade all intensity values proportionally from their captured values to their previous values If a fade is captured and the faders are not reset to 100 prior to the next press of the Go button the fader will automatically reset to 100 upon cue execution Alternatively you can set the fader to 0 before executing the next cue to capture the cue for manual intensity control when the Go button is pressed if the fader is set to proportional control Intensity control is released from the fader when the cue is considered complete when the fader is brought back to 100 If the fader is set as an Intensity Master the intensity control is maint
37. 1 Thru 5 Part 2 Enter 6 Thru 1 0 Intensity Part 3 Enter 6 Thru 1 0 Color Part 4 Enter and so on As you create each part that part is now selected It is possible to select the channel parameter you want and press Part Enter to pull that data into the selected part Note When breaking a cue into a multipart cue in blind the Part button is a required instruction Channel selection will not automatically assign a channel into a part Use of the Part key allows you to add only specific channel parameters to the part For example 5 Thru 9 Color Part Enter Changing a Multipart Cue to a Standard Cue To change a multipart cue to a standard cue delete all of the parts of the cue For Example Cue 4 is a 3 part cue that include channels 1 through 20 To change cue 4 back to a standard single cue e Delete Part 1 Thru 3 Enter Deleting a Part from a Multipart Cue When you delete parts of a multipart cue any move instructions in the deleted part are moved to the first available part If you want to delete move instructions out of a cue part you have to select the channels and At Enter or null them Delete Cue 1 Part 1 Enter Enter Delete Cue 6 Part 1 Cue Only Track Enter Enter Delete Part 1 2 Enter Enter Delete Part 1 thru 3 Enter Enter KO Multipart Cues 207 208 lon
38. Cue 1 2 Enter Since no specific mark instruction was given to the channels in cue 12 the channels will mark back to the first M encountered in the preceding cues of the cue list provided that the intensity for those channels is out throughout the duration of the mark When Cue 10 is played back the non intensity parameters of channels 1 10 will fade to the values stored in Cue 12 Then in Cue 12 the intensity will fade up on those channels EE Using Mark 177 Mark Display Indicators In the previous example indications that a mark had been placed are as follows Cue 10 would be shown with a mark flag M in the cue list In addition when cue 10 is played back channels 1 10 will show a green MK in the intensity field while the non intensity parameters would show the source cue number in green Q12 the MK in the intensity field is green if in cue 10 the lights are fading to zero and then the NPs are marking If in cue 10 channels 1 10 were already at zero a magenta MK will be displayed The source cue cue 12 would include a green M next to the intensity level and any non intensity parameter values would be displayed in green Also in the cue list cue 12 would have an R in the mark flags field If a mark has been placed on a cue but that cue is not yet marking any lights the M will be represented as m You will also see an m if the mark is no longer in tact Applying Flags as
39. Editing Palettes in Blind CAUTION When editing palettes in blind changes to palettes are automatic therefore no update or record command is required Palettes can be viewed and edited in blind in the table and spreadsheet views Entering Blind Palette from Live Blind amp Palette pressing this will display the first recorded palette of the selected type Intensity Focus Color or Beam in blind or return to the last palette of this type viewed in blind Blind Palette Select 1 or Blind Palette 1 Enter pressing this will display the specified palette 1 in blind Palette Palette Edit opens the list view of the palette type and then opens blind palette View palettes from blind While in any blind mode when no channels are selected you can enter a palette from the command line or direct selects This will take you into blind channel mode for that palette Color Palette n Enter You may also cycle through the available palettes using Next and Last Editing in Blind The following are representative methods used for editing palettes in blind 2 Iris At Enter removes the current parameter category setting from channel 2 1 Iris 5 0 Enter selects channel 1 and sets iris value to 50 2 Copy To 5 Enter copies the information from channel 2 to channel 5 6 Recall From Focus Palette 1 Enter recalls the values for channel 6 from F
40. Enter returns the CIA to the database page Patching a Compound Channel A compound channel consists of any channel that controls more than one device It can consist of mutliple dimmers patched to the same channel or accessories patched to a channel such as a fixture with a color scroller a fixture with a gobo wheel and so on By default lon will add a part if you are trying to patch to a channel that has already been assigned an address To patch a compound channel in channel format e 9 At 5 4 0 Assuming that channel 9 is already patched to an address this will create a part 2 and address it at output 540 8 Part 2 At 5 1 3 This will create a part 2 for channel 8 and address it at output 513 If you wish to patch by address while in the channel view press e Address 5 1 3 At 8 Enter This will perform the same action as the previous example assuming channel 8 was previously patched to an address To patch a compound channel in address format o 5 1 3 At 8 Enter This will perform the same action as the previous example assuming channel 8 was previously patched to an address CAUTION It is recommended that you do not patch more than one multiple parameter device such as moving lights to the same channel Doing so can cause extreme difficulty in controlling the devices Note If at any point you try to patch an address that is already in use lon will post
41. Fader Configuration page 96 The location of playbacks and submasters can also be mapped live as the contents of those targets are stored Grandmasters must be defined in setup If a fader is an empty playback an empty submaster or is unmapped a cue can be loaded to that location by selecting the cue from the command line and clicking the associated Load key On the fader wings the load function is accessed by pressing both buttons associated with the fader The fader will then be automatically assigned as a playback using the lowest unused playback number Once a cue list is loaded to a fader storing to that cue list automatically plays the cue back on the appropriate fader when auto playback on record is enabled in Setup When a cue list is loaded to a playback all cue attributes of that cue list are in effect When a new cue list is loaded any fader attributes that can be set as direct action from the facepanel such as filters timing disable etc are maintained Loading a new cue does not change the manual fader attributes With Auto Playback Enabled Auto Playback is a record function enabled in setup Setup page 93 that automatically executes cues recorded in live on playback faders When the cue is executed on the playback fader any manual parameters involved in the record operation are automatically released to the cue and all other values stored in the cue are owned by that cue When the first cue is stored on
42. Group x Label name Enter stores a new label 1 Thru 5 Update Group n Enter adds channel 1 5 to existing Group n For record examples please see Recording Groups Live page 88 Selecting and Recalling Groups Groups may be recalled from the control keypad or the direct selects To select a group Group 1 Enter selects all channels in Group 1 Group 1 at 5 0 Enter selects Group 1 and places all channels within at 5096 Group 1 Selects all channels in Group 1 If Next is used after a group selection it accesses the first ordered channel in that group Pressing it again accesses the second ordered channel in that group and so on Next used after the last channel in the group accesses the first channel in the group again Last may be used with group selects similar to Next Press Select Last to reselect the entire group Deleting Groups When you delete a group the group number and all contents from the Group List Index and direct selects are deleted Delete commands require a confirmation by default This can be altered in the default settings If you disable confirmations the second enter is not required in the following examples Group deletion features include Delete Group 5 Enter Enter deletes group 5 Delete Group 3 Group 5 Enter Enter deletes groups 3 and 5 Delete Group 3 Thru 9 Enter Enter deletes group
43. In blind submasters can be created by using the Thru Thru syntax Sub 1 Thru Thru 1 0 Enter will create subs 1 through 10 When set as a submaster the bottom button beneath the potentiometer acts as a bump button or a mark button depending on the submaster type Proportional or Intensity Master The button above the bump can be used to select all of the channels associated with the submaster if the submaster is inactive This is equivalent to the syntax Group Sub x Enter When the submaster is active this button will assert the contents of the submaster when pressed It is possible to program upfade dwell and downfade times in association with the submaster bumps On fader wings when a submaster bump LED is blinking it means that the submaster must be homed due to either changes to its content or to its mode In either case reset the submaster by dropping it to zero and the moving it back to the desired position Inhibitive submasters see below that are blinking must be homed to 100 rather than zero The LED will also blink when the submaster is in a Held state via bump button timing Recording a Submaster You can record current stage contents directly to a submaster To do this set levels in live as needed then record them to the submaster See the following examples Record Sub 5 Enter records all current values to sub 5 Record Only Sub 5 Enter records the manual v
44. In the event that you wish to update the show s fixture data to match a new library you may enter the fixture creator see Fixture Creator page 81 and click Update Lib You will need to confirm this choice by clicking Ok to update or Cancel to return to the previous screen This will update the show file fixture data with any relevant changes from the new fixture library 86 lon Operations Manual Chapter 6 Using Groups Groups are channel selection devices used for fast recall of specific channels A maximum of 1000 groups can be recorded Once recorded they are accessible from the keypad direct selects and through the displays This chapter contains the following sections e Recording Groups Live 88 Selecting and Recalling Groups 89 GYOUD LIST oc ki 44 sue me sue ave age RR Re GES au 90 KI Using Groups 87 Recording Groups Live Record groups of channels that you want to have available for fast recall later Groups can be stored as whole numbers such as Group 5 or as decimals of tenths or hundredths such as Group 2 5 or Group 7 65 Only whole number groups can be stored using the direct selects any decimal designations for groups must be stored using the keypad All groups may be labeled These labels are then displayed on the direct selects as well as in the group list Group numbers will not display in either until the groups have been created The f
45. Record Cue 2 Color Time Enter resets the color time of cue 2 back to the default value Record Cue 2 Time Time Time 7 Enter records cue 2 with a cue level focus time of 7 In this example each press of the Time key steps through each timing value up time down time focus time color time and beam time Record Cue 2 Time 7 Enter records cue 2 and puts a time of 7 on all parameter categories if FCB all had the same times to begin with Note It is not necessary to rerecord a cue to alter stored timing data You can simply redefine the time by specifying the cue and re entering the time value s Cue 5 Time 8 Enter Redefines the all category times to 8 seconds If FCB all had the same timing Cue 2 Color Time 5 Enter Redefines color time to 5 seconds Cue 3 Focus Time 2 Enter Removes 2 seconds from the current time Cue 7 Beam Time 3 Enter Adds 3 seconds to the current time 156 lon Operations Manual Delay Time Delay is used to stage the execution of parameter categories within a cue or cue part The countdown of a delay time begins the moment the cue is executed for example pressing Go Delay times can be added to any cue or to any specific parameter category within the cue which will postpone the parameter transition until the delay time has elapsed Following are some examples of
46. This is applicable to step effects only Negative inverts the on state and off state for the effect This is applicable to step effects only Random Grouping channel distribution or step order depending on the type of effect are applied in a continuously random fashion Random Rate this overrides the cycle time of the effect Random Rate is applied in a range for example 5 thru 150 Play with these behaviors to see how they alter your effect lon Operations Manual Entry Establishes at what time and how channels will enter the effect To change the entry method press Entry and then choose a method from the buttons to the left Entry modes vary by effect type The options are Cascade channels enter the effect according to the trail and cycle time values if applicable Immediate all channels enter the effect instantaneously Fade by Size the effect will achieve its full value as allowed by the pattern or step or absolute values using the In Time Fade by Size and Rate the effect will achieve its full value as allowed by the pattern or step or absolute values and ramp up to full speed using the In Time Exit Establishes at what time and how channels will exit the effect To change the exit method press Exit and then choose a method from the buttons to the left Exit modes vary by effect type and how the effect is stopped The options are Cascade channels leave the effect when th
47. This text is followed by a number indicating which preset is being referenced The preset label may also be shown if this setting is enabled see Show Reference Labels page 103 Holding down Label will toggle between the preset label and preset number Found in the non intensity categories of a marked channel The Q is followed by a number indicating which cue the mark is in preparation for The channel has discrete parameter category specific timing Found in place of parameter data in summary view Indicates that not all parameters in that category are atthe same value This indicator is found only in the summary view or in table views when the parameters are collapsed into a category view Indicates an ACN or RDM error The symbols that appear in the Mark flag include AutoMark is disabled Indicates a manual reference override Manual changes have been made that override a previously stored reference such as to a palette or preset Once recorded the reference will be broken If updated the referenced target will be updated as well unless otherwise instructed Indicates a mark is placed but manual and must be stored Is blue when stored m indicates cue is not marking Indicates a cue is both a marking and reference cue when displayed in the mark flag Indicates a dark move a cue that has any non intensity parameters moving on channels whose intensity is at 0 Indicates that a mark has been placed bu
48. View Channels You may select specific channels to appear in another flexichannel state called View Channels This state does not exist until you select channels to view After view channels is activated it will appear in the rotation of flexichannel states when Flexi is pressed To select channels to view Step 1 Select channels on the command line do not press Enter Step 2 Press and hold Flexi Step 3 Press View Chans The View Channels flexi state will be created and the channels you selected will be visible in it The channels you selected will be visible in this flexi state until you select other channels and press View Chans again At any time you can access the last channels you defined for this state by pressing Flexi until this state is visible To redefine the selected channels in the state simply follow the steps above again lon Operations Manual Indicators in the Playback Status Display Indicates the timing for a If blank default time is category used and there is no move instruction Indicates that timing has been applied but there is no move instruction Cricket amp Cache 1 15 50 PM Attributes MBA P Fw Hg Link Loop Curve Rate Label External Li si Test123 Q2 1 Relay1 1 100 Cricket amp Cache 2009 05 08 09 56 25 p User 1 Primary Master LIVE Cue 11 1 Color indicators Gold as ERE Any item cue list page highlighted in gol
49. amp Load Using Go To Cue Out To reset all parameters to their default state unless they are controlled by a submaster and reset all cue lists that are loaded to faders so that the first cue of each list is pending press Go To Cue Out Enter EZ Working with Multiple Cue Lists 191 Stored cue lists Selected Cues in 192 Using the Cue List Index The cue list index is a blind display list which shows the cue list you are working with the cue status any other stored cue lists and what if any faders the lists are loaded onto All cue attributes can be edited from the list including whether the cue list is set to independent or not and if the intensity values in the cue list will play back as HTP or LTP While cue attributes can be changed in live or blind independent and HTP LTP settings can only be set in the cue list index Open the Cue List Index You can access the cue list index by pressing Cue Cue or you can navigate within the browser to Record Target Lists gt Cue List Index and press Select Cricket amp Cache 3 42 06 PM Timing Flags Int Up Int Down Focus Color Beam M B A Link Rate Label External Links 200 Q6 1 scene scene2 Q6 2 scene3 fun stuff cool stuff blue blinder jets 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Cue List Playb HTP Assert External Links Proportion al LTP Proportion LTP Proportional LTP Proportional LTP Proportional LTP Proportional LTP Proportional LTP Ma
50. color wheel or gobo wheel from standard manufacturers and associate them with fixtures You may also create customized scrolls or wheels using the editor to match custom devices installed in your fixture Using the Picker Default color and pattern media for the selected fixture as determined in the fixture library is displayed in the Attributes page Only the media attribute that is available for the selected fixture will display In the sample image below the selected channel 1 is a Source Four Revolution with a color scroller If the selected channel included a color wheel and two gobo wheels each device would be represented in the display with a button Preheat 4 scroller Proportion Curve D ML Attributes Invert Invert Swap Tilt Pan The picker displays on the left half of the CIA when you select the specific attribute Scroller Color Wheel or Gobo Wheel The picker displayed is specific to the selected attribute the scroll picker will display when Scroller is clicked the color wheel picker will display when Color Wheel is clicked and so on scroller ETC Scroll E ETC Proportion ETC Scroll Wybron Martin Wybron Curve Scroll Scroll ML Attributes Invert Invert Swap Tilt Pan Preheat scroller Clear New Patch Attributes Database Replace Offset Fixtures Select the scroll or wheel type lon Operations Manual The picker displays buttons for the standard scr
51. ia AA 105 93 Opening Setup To enter the setup screen press Displays gt Setup The CIA will repaint to display the setup screen and the softkeys will change to display the various subcategories of setup lon defaults to display show settings however if you have changed the view to another subcategory lon will remember the view you were in when you return to setup The setup subcategory softkeys are Show Desk e Security Show When you select the Show softkey the CIA repaints to display the following screen Cm Num of Channels Settings 5000 A Home Preset Disabled Dim Dbl Offset Encoder 20000 Zonfiguratior Partitioned Control Control Disabled Partitions The buttons on the left are the setting categories within show setup The show setup categories are e Show Settings Cue Settings e Fader Configuration Filter Setup Encoder Configuration e Show Control Partitions lon Operations Manual Show Settings Click Show Settings to enter this category Five fields will be available to you Num of Channels Auto Mark Dim Dbl Offset Partitioned Control and Home Preset To change the setting for any of these fields click the field in the CIA to activate it If the field requires data enter it from the keypad If the field is a toggle state one click of the button will switch the field to its other state Changes from this screen are systemwide and will impact al
52. lon Operations Manual While in the macro editor display the following functions may be performed using the control keypad and softkeys Label when a macro is selected and Label is pressed the alphanumeric keypad will display on the CIA Label the macro and press Enter 1 Label lt name gt Enter labels macro 1 Delete when a macro is selected and Delete Enter is pressed you will be prompted to confirm the deletion of the selected macro To confirm press Enter to abort press Clear 1 Delete Enter Enter deletes macro 1 from the list Copy To when a macro is selected and Copy To is pressed you will be prompted to enter the macro number that you want to copy the contents of the selected macro to You will be prompted to confirm the copy process press Enter to confirm or Clear to abort the copy to process 1 Copy To 6 Enter Enter copies the entire contents of macro 1 to macro 6 Edit when a macro is selected and Edit is pressed you will have entered edit mode for the selected macro Three notable changes to your macro editor display include A blinking cursor in the macro content detail portion top of the display Press Select to save or Escape to cancel changes flashes above the command line The available softkeys change to Loop Begin Loop Num Wait Delete Cancel and Done Move To allows you to move and reorganize your macros any
53. opening a show changing settings viewing record target lists opening displays and many other functions Collapse Expand the CIA It is possible to collapse the CIA from view To do this you can click the double arrow icon centered above the CIA The CIA will collapse from view exposing a larger viewing area of whatever display is visible above the CIA The double arrows will move to the bottom of the screen To expand the CIA into view again click the double arrow at the bottom of the screen The CIA will reopen EX System Basics 27 28 Lock the CIA You can lock the CIA in place to prevent it from being collapsed To lock the CIA click on the lock above the browser The double arrow above the CIA will disappear and the lock will lock To unlock the CIA click the sunken lock again and the double arrows will reappear Locking the Facepanel It is possible to lock out the facepanel which prevents any actions from the command line or CIA To lock out the facepanel press Clear amp Escape To unlock the facepanel press Clear amp Escape again lon Operations Manual Using the Browser To use the browser you must first draw focus to it by clicking anywhere in the browser area of the CIA or by pressing the Displays key When focus is on the browser the window border highlights in gold The scroll lock LED illuminates red and the paging keys will now control selection in the browser Browser File
54. package the right to use and distribute the Package in a more or less customary fashion plus the right to make reasonable modifications Definitions Package refers to the collection of files distributed by the Copyright Holder and derivatives of that collection of files created through textual modification Standard Version refers to such a Package if it has not been modified or has been modified in accordance with the wishes of the Copyright Holder Copyright Holder is whoever is named in the copyright or copyrights for the package You is you if you re thinking about copying or distributing this Package Reasonable copying fee is whatever you can justify on the basis of media cost duplication charges time of people involved and so on You will not be required to justify it to the Copyright Holder but only to the computing community at large as a market that must bear the fee Freely Available means that no fee is charged for the item itself though there may be fees involved in handling the item It also means that recipients of the item may redistribute it under the same conditions they received it 1 You may make and give away verbatim copies of the source form of the Standard Version of this Package without restriction provided that you duplicate all of the original copyright notices and associated disclaimers 2 You may apply bug fixes portability fixes and other modifications derived from the Pub
55. presets 134 opening 134 submaster editing from 262 opening 262 Littlites 13 live Address 127 display indicators 35 editing effects in 242 editing groups in 89 editing palettes in 143 editing presets in 133 modifying cues in 165 Danke cu s eR ELI 223 parking addresses in 224 recording cues in 151 recording multipart cues in 204 storing macros in 264 storing presets in 130 text indicators 37 updating groups in 89 updating multipart cues in 206 load partial show 49 submaster 259 viel d ere ETE 28 locking facepanel 28 LOOP eet hed ak cane AA 160 low See lowlight lowlight 125 EPA aee Rie 7 in cue list index 193 M macro editor display 266 macros abOUt 2a eae ue AASA 263 create new using editor display 268 deleting 270 editing 269 editor display 266 playing 270 stopping 270 storing in live 264 using Learn 264 make manual abouti sr tente eue soe 199 with multiple cue lists 188 make null about pac
56. unless you choose to revert the operating system in the related settings menu see Switch to Congo from Eos Operating Mode in the Net3 Remote Video Interface Setup Guide page 4 A CAUTION If you Exit Eos and enter the ECU do not select the Master or Backup buttons that are displayed in the ECU welcome screen The Net3 RVI will only function as a Client on the Eos network or Offline D Remote Video Interface RVI 321 322 Basic Use Guidelines Displays The RVI can be used with either one or two DVI monitors You can collapse or expand the CIA on the displays by engaging the scroll lock and pressing F5 If you are using one monitor you may find this feature useful in increasing the efficiency of your available display area Button Configuration Settings for the RVI can be altered in the Eos Configuration Utility ECU The 20 buttons on the front panel of the RVI are configurable from the RPU section of the ECU To configure the RVI buttons Step 1 In the Eos browser select File gt Exit Eos and confirm the selection Eos will close and you will enter the Eos welcome screen Step 2 Click on the Settings button This will open the ECU Step 3 On the right side of the screen click on the RPU button to enter the RVI button setup A virtual display of the RVI buttons is displayed with the current button settings labeled on each button Step 4 Click on a button you
57. useful for viewing overall trends in channel and parameter data Editing cue ranges is possible in spreadsheet view Move To is only available from this view To select an entire cue range you can press Cue enter the first cue Thru Enter lon Operations Manual Replace With Replace With is used to select channels that have certain specified values and then provide new instructions for those values For Example Select a range of cues e Cue 1 Thru 9 Enter Select a range of channels that are used throughout these cues and enter a change instruction e 1 Thru 7 At Color Palette 5 Replace With Color Palette 3 Enter This instruction finds all instances of channels 1 7 in cues 1 9 that are in color palette 5 and replace CP5 with CP3 Be aware of the track cue only settings when using this command The range of possibilities of potential Replace With commands is virtually endless and can be applied to single cues or channels ranges of cues or channels parameters of any type or timing data Move To Move To is used to move cues from one location in a cue list to another location in the same or a different cue list When cues are moved values that were tracks or move instructions and now match the previous cue will be auto blocked by the system The impact on subsequent cues is based on track cue only settings as described above Below is an example of Move To Cue 2 Move T
58. 5 The default is Tracking Record Confirm This setting allows you to enable or disable the confirm action when storing over a previously recorded target The default is Enabled Delete Confirm This field allows you to enable or disable a required confirmation before any delete command is executed The default is Enabled lon Operations Manual Manual Control This desk setting button gives you access to lon manual control settings Record Ke Defaults Settings Manual Time Manual Control Default Times Control Preserve Blind Cue Highlight Preset Sneak Manual Fader Wing Disabled Config Level Lowlight Preset Back Time RFR Face Panel 100 5 Settings Plus 9 High Low Rem Dim Go To Cue Time Face Panel Disabled Keypad p Minus Yo Rem Dim Level i Assert Time Displays PDF File Settings Manual Time In this section you may change the default times for manual changes to occur in live Times can be set for each parameter category Intensity Up Intensity Down Focus Color and Beam You may use the Thru key to enter a value for all categories Int Up Thru 9 Enter The default for each of these is 0 seconds Manual Control This section allows you to specify the values for certain buttons and settings used in manual control To change any value click the appropriate button in the CIA and use the keypad to enter a new value Preserve Blind Cue This enables the console to recall the last selected
59. 5 recall the preset Preset 5 Enter Adjust parameters as needed You may also adjust the parameters of previously excluded channels in order to add them to the preset When you are done rerecord the preset e Record Preset 5 Enter Enter Update Update is used to record parameter modifications back to a preset When updating you must specify the preset to be updated You may do this using the keypad or the direct selects For the purposes of the following descriptions assume that there are no active cues on stage Updating referenced values while cues are active is covered in Modifying Cues Live page 165 For Example To update a preset first recall the preset for any channels you wish to edit e 1 Thru 5 Preset 1 Enter Make required changes to the desired parameters using the keypad or encoders Once you have achieved the desired look update the preset e Update Preset 1 Enter or e Update amp Preset 1 When updating a preset only channels that are already in the preset will be updated You need to select channels or parameters to force new data into a preset when using Update KI Storing and Using Presets 133 134 Using the Preset List The preset list displays all recorded presets List views only allow you to change attributes no editing can be done directly in list view Pressing the Edit softkey takes you to the blind view of the selected preset in the last format y
60. At and enter the address using the control keypad The address may be entered in standard format 1 0 2 5 or by using port and offset 3 1 lon Operations Manual Step 6 To select a device interface optional click Interface This displays up to six buttons labeled ACN EDMX ArtNet Avab UDP DMX and Default Select an interface for the selected device Once your selection is made the command line will populate with the selected interfaces and terminate If left blank the Default is used as selected in the Network section of the ECU Step 7 Select the Attributes softkey to set detailed moving light attributes The following buttons may be available on this page Invert Pan and Invert Tilt Swap Scroller Gobo Wheel Color Wheel Preheat Proportion and Curve e If your moving light includes parameters such as a color scroller or gobo wheel and you have custom gels or non standard patterns installed use the Scroller Wheel Picker and the Editor to modify the device patched See Using the Scroller Wheel Picker and Editor page 74 The more specific your patch data including accurate colors and patterns the more detailed programming and operating will be Step 8 Select the Database softkey to specify notes and keyword text related to your selected channel for reference and future queries Clicking the Notes or Text button opens the virtual PC keyboard on the CIA Clicking
61. Channels are Marked You may also apply a mark flag to a previous cue by doing the following select channels Mark Cue 5 Enter Record Cue 8 Enter This would mark cue 5 to perform any non intensity moves stored in cue 8 The display indicators for this mark would be the same as shown in the previous example As long as intensity is at zero within the cue range if there are any non intensity move instructions for these channels between these two cues they will be removed It is also possible to mark only certain parameters for marked moves while allowing live moves for other parameters For Example If you wanted to mark only focus and allow all other parameters to transition while the light is fading up you can press 1 thru 10 Focus Mark Enter Removing Referenced Marks Mark is a toggle state Therefore the first mark command sets a mark The second removes it To remove a mark flag from a cue press Cue n Mark Enter To remove a mark from a channel select channel Mark Enter Note If a mark is removed from a channel in live the corresponding cue must be updated 178 lon Operations Manual It is also possible to mark to a cue that doesn t exist and when the mark is stored lon will automatically create the cue to mark to For Example If cue 2 does not exist yet e select channels Mark 2 Enter The command line will display Create Mark Cue
62. Color and Beam These are the parameters in each category e Intensity Intensity Focus Pan and Tilt Color All color parameters such as color wheel CMY scrollers and so on Beam Any parameter not covered in the other categories Tracking vs Cue Only lon is by default a tracking console This means two things First tracking relates to how cue lists are created Once data is in a cue list it will remain a part of that cue list at its original setting and track forward through subsequent cues until a new instruction is provided or until it is removed from the cue list using filters or null commands Secondly tracking relates to how changes to cue data are handled Unless otherwise instructed by a Cue Only command changes to a parameter in a cue will track forward through the cue list until a move instruction or block command is encountered Itis possible to change the default setting of lon to Cue Only This prevents changes from tracking forward into subsequent cues unless overridden with a track instruction lon also has a Cue Only Track button that allows you to record or update a cue as an exception to the default setting Therefore if the console is set to Tracking the button acts as Cue Only If console is set to Cue Only it behaves as a Track button Introduction 5 Move Fade Move Fade is a lighting control philosophy which determines how cues are
63. Cue Last Time 2 Enter this command would take you to the previous cue in the selected list in two seconds Go To Cue 8 Time Enter this command would take you to cue 8 using all timing values stored in cue 8 Other Go To Cue options When Go to Cue is pressed the softkeys in the CIA are changed to provide Go to Cue modifiers to enhance your playback ability From these softkeys you can specify that when going to a cue only some elements of that cue will be played back Specifically you can choose to play back single parameter channels only conventionals e GoTo Cue 1 SingleParam Enter multiple parameter channels only moving lights e GoTo Cue 2 MultiParam Enter move instructions only e GoTo Cue 3 MovesOnly Enter use marks e GoTo Cue 5 Use Marks Enter or you can choose play back a cue and withhold any link follow hang execute instructions it may contain e GoTo Cue 4 MinusLinks Enter These can be combined within the command line as well e Go To Cue 1 MultiParam MovesOnly Enter Cue Playback 213 214 Slider Module You can have access to multiple cue lists at once by using the virtual faders see Slider Module page 30 or fader wings This will give you the ability to run multiple cue lists or submasters from multiple faders at the same time Assigning Faders Playbacks and submasters can be defined on the fader pages in setup see Setup
64. E ERG CSS 242 Deleting an Effect 242 Effects on Submasters 243 Configuring an Effect Submaster 243 Recording an Effect to a Submaster 243 Running an Effect from a Submaster 243 Chapter 20 Using About 245 About About 246 About iie cee aceasta wanes ue ard ee ap 247 About System oo 50 24 eine Le eee ee ee eed 247 About Channel 249 About Address 250 About CUG i ceu eee es aee Pea a de AMENER ee 253 About IFCB Palettes 253 About Presets 2334 mot aut hate eae can 253 Chapter 21 Storing and Using Submasters 255 About Submasters 256 Recording a Submaster 256 Submaster Displays 257 Additive vs Inhibitive 257 Proportional vs Intensity Master 257 FA PWS NET Bes ce hack NAN ect rt AMG cs 258 Exclusive Submasters 258 Independent 258 Changing Fader Pages 258 On Fader Wings 258 On the Slider Module 258 Loading Subm
65. ES KU Deep Clear Deep Clear functions in much the same way that New does from the File menu or Reset System does from the Clear menu both are found within the browser A deep clear is automatically performed when new software is installed Sometimes it is useful to perform a deep clear between updates The advantage of deep clear is that you can clear all console data before reloading the console s current state during boot This is helpful if you are moving a new console onto the network and don t want it to suddenly take control of a system or if you somehow end up with a corrupt show file that is causing issues upon boot It s worth noting that Deep Clear like Reset System and File gt New does not reset any of the settings in the Eos Configuration Utility ECU like its operational mode or IP address settings Everything in the ECU remains as it was last configured Save Logs Clicking on the Save Logs button displays a dialog box prompting you to save the console log files for troubleshooting purposes By clicking on the Advanced button you can select or deselect any of the various individual log files to be saved Clicking Next you will see a drop down menu to select the target export location from any available write enabled removable media such as a USB drive If you experience software problems with your system that we are unable to reproduce sending these log files to ETC Technical Services see Help f
66. Example To delete channels in the patch display press e 6 Thru 1 0 Delete Enter Enter In the live blind display the channel numbers will still be visible but the channel outlines and parameter data will be hidden from view lon Operations Manual Fixture Creator lon provides you with the ability to create your own fixture type within patch and store it with your show file You can name the fixture assign all necessary parameters define the address and operational range of those parameters and set lamp controls The fixture creator is accessible from patch Once a fixture has been created it is stored in the show file It is not added to the fixture library To open the fixture creator Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press Displays gt Patch to open the patch display Or you may open it from the browser Select any channel it need not be the channel for the fixture you are creating but it can be from the keypad Click Type in the CIA patch display The left side softkeys will change to offer fixture type options Click User This will display buttons for all currently patched fixtures in the CIA Click Edit This will open a list displaying those same fixtures that are currently patched This is the fixture creator KI 81 82 Creating a New Fixture New fixtures are created from the fixture creator list in the CIA see above To create a new fixture click New A
67. If the unit does not power up check the hard power switch on the rear panel to ensure it is switched on 320 lon Operations Manual Front Panel Soft power 20 command keypad switch Removable buttons Backlit indicators label strip eg N Mo01 Mo02 woos moos ied Sync Offine NETS Zig Uy UJ Backlit LEDs LEDs indicate which mode the unit is operating in client or offline and the status of the operation sync The Client LED will illuminate when the unit is connected as a client of the master processor Additionally the Sync LED will illuminate when the data has been synchronized to the master console The Offline LED will illuminate when the unit is running offline and is no longer in Client mode Command Keypad Buttons The 20 buttons are configurable from the Eos Configuration Utility ECU They are set to a default configuration The label strips for these buttons are removable and reversible Any changes to the button configuration can be written on the opposite side in pencil USB Port The USB port on the front of the RVI unit may be used to connect a USB storage device for show downloading uploading or software updates Start Up At initial startup the RVI will display the Eos and the Congo logos Use the mouse to select the Eos operating system The RVI will initialize to the Eos environment each time the power is cycled
68. In Table view lon will default to showing all intensity parameters associated with the channels Color Blok DB Intensity Ch Intens Intens 2 In summary view the master intensity is shown If one of the multiple intensities has a value an will display beside the master intensity indicates that there is alevel set from an individual intensity 120 lon Operations Manual Lamp Controls Lamp controls allow you to execute control functions of selected fixtures such as calibrate douse lamp strike lamp and reset Each fixture type has its own set of lamp control options which are available to you when you select the fixture from live and press the Lamp Cntrls softkey This information is also available using About see Using About page 245 For Example e 1 1 Enter Lamp Cntrls or 1 1 Enter About Lamp Cntrls This screen displays any lamp controls associated with the selected channel this is also the Lamp Control subscreen of About If the channel is a conventional intensity only fixture no parameters will be displayed When the selected channel is an automated luminaire options specific to the fixture type will display for use Lamp Off Pressing any of these parameter control buttons will affect the selected channel immediately Lamp On Exit the lamp controls display by pressing Displays 8 Basic Manual Control 121 122 Using and Use and to increme
69. Iris instruction e Iris At Enter The Iris value from the previous cue tracks in Then you remove the intensity change as well Intensity At Enter All values from the previous cue track in Instead of using multiple commands you can in one command return the channels to their values from the previous cue e t Thru 5 At Enter The impact of blind edits on subsequent cues is determined by the default setting of Track Cue Only mode Obviously in track mode any changes will track forward until the next move instruction unless Cue only is pressed In cue only mode any changes will apply only to the selected cue If you want values to track forward the Track button will allow it The track cue only instruction must be applied when a value is entered Trace can also be used to have changes trace back to the initial move instruction Such as e 1 Thru 5 At 5 0 Cue Only Track Enter Intensity Cue Only Track At Enter e 1 Thru 5 At 5 0 Cue Only Track Trace Enter To Live From Blind From blind a softkey Live is posted when you press Recall From or Copy To to allow you to copy to or recall information from live The following examples only work with the Live softkey not the Live hard key 1 Recall From Live Enter e 2 Copy To Live Enter ELI Working with a Single Cue List 171 172 From Summary or Table Views Use the Format key to
70. Key reya a Bx ter erepti ead n 39 Label Gy ipaa orent Reach Rc S edt 39 Using Flexichannel 40 Indicators in the Playback Status Display 41 Using Format 43 Encoders 2 T LEE ERREUR Be 46 Encoder Navigation 46 Locking the Encoders 46 USING SORKCYS 4 048 ohe ea ged hap NA de eed Rd Se eee aS 46 Context Sensitive Softkeys 46 Changing Softkey Pages 46 Chapter 4 Managing Show Files 47 Create a New Show File 48 Open an Existing Show File 48 ii lon Operations Manual Selective Partial Show Opening 50 Merging Show Files 52 Printing a Show File 53 Saving the Current Show File 55 Using Quick Savo erres cerraran ti e eee 55 Using Save S 44e restai a ee DBA REA d 55 Importing Show Files 56 Exporting a Show File 56 Deleting a File 22 0 6 0 600 ec eee 57 File Manager aa deb hang beret bee eei oo 57 Chapter 5 PSC DBA EE NAA sane 59 About Patch 2 papa sae ANAN v ye NAA gta aie doe em ana 60 Clearing the Patch 0 2 cc eee eee e
71. Norwegian Turkish Czech and Russian Show Welcome Screen When this is checked the Eos console will boot into the Configuration Utility every time instead of booting directly into the main Eos application Backup Auto Switch Switches to the backup automatically if the primary should go offline Show Archive Path This is the default location to save show files The full path must be typed in and specified in a legal Windows format The default location is a folder on the D drive If you decide to change this setting it is recommended that you keep this location on the D drive This will keep show files safe during software updates that may include re imaging the C drive Share Show Archive Checking this box will enable you to share the show archive folder on the console with another console or computer Latitude Allows you to select the latitude the console is using Longitude Allows you to select the longitude the console is using EY Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell 297 298 The number on the monitors matches the number of the video port on the rear of the console External Monitor Arrangement Available Selected lon allows for up to two monitors The first time lon boots with two monitors it may not display output to both You will need to configure the monitors in External Monitor Arrangement under General in the ECU To configure dual monitors Step 1 Click an available monitor
72. R see in cue 8 Indicates the source cue which refers back to an earlier mark see Referenced Marks page 177 lon Operations Manual Using Format Some displays have multiple formats When the display is first opened it opens in its default view The default view for Live Blind is table view with all parameter categories displayed When the default format has been changed those new settings will be used whenever the display is changed back to that format Live and Blind share formatting When you change from one format to another format you are always working with the same format until you change it The exception to this is spreadsheet which is only available in blind If you are working in blind spreadsheet when you return to live you will be working with the table or summary view based on which one you were last using Summary View The summary view displays the largest number of channels of any of the formats Below you can see channels 1 60 are shown This format is best used to see large numbers of channels intensity data and or parameter category data Individual parameters are not visible in this view FCB icons will appear at the bottom of the channel area for channels that have those parameters patched to them When the summary view has been collapsed to show only intensity data you may include focus color or beam data in the summary view by holding down the Data key and pressing any encoder paging key
73. Rew B 1 State Keyboard 246100000067 ABRED 27 100mm Motonet Fader Rev 6j Motoraed Faders au7e3e 1600000080 425084426REVA 28 BOS Encoder Rev 13 Haptic Encoders Tons T Dostie Tap Tem 1500 Double Tao grasse Defaut LED color is Green Only one of the Bink Tests can be on at a bme T Birk Foder LEDs Rod I Birk LEDs Sow 75 F LEDs On T Birk LEDs Modum 75 T Birk LEDs Sow Birk LEDs Sow 87 T Birk LEDs Meum I Twich LEDs Birk LEDs Fon Ex I om ass 5 GORD Gl jng nt sas TTTTTTTUA Ni ca mmm EE 4250846188 FOS Keyboard p Aux Button 1x13 Geop aif a62 sy scs aos os 307 iow iov xao iiij i3 05 Keyboard 429004418 E sj spe Tel pamu mas api Encoders a WI 102 103 104 208 104 W7 HS 109 N 11i m F Fem Detent Je MEME UM HEHEHE HEE Ela lalala alat meme en 72 73 74 75 75 mmm mmmm eee rc 3 colt mammam eae PS HITO ean mad Ress ee wes 30 af 52 38 i 5s 6 37 tos rerpomd 25004520 Ey a Ena ud ac he de Blot pou OT Mosons r Mim ce E OF Wunde 812 Board Right Top ap 2f 3 sys 6 7f ap o e aika rpg zjaw m E a ae as eae aaa all c sbs s s CS x ronal at LE Honor tet ra a rar FE PT TAKA FT ET T5 a 50150501
74. Scrolling within a Display By default the page keys will advance retreat a display by one page per press However to scroll through displays you may press the Scroll Lock key on the keypad The LED on the button illuminates red when in scroll lock mode Scroll lock is a toggle state When scroll lock is first pressed Page V scrolls table spreadsheet and channel views down Page A scrolls table spreadsheet and channel views up Page P scrolls table and spreadsheet views right Page 4 scrolls table and spreadsheet views left Zooming Displays You may zoom in and out on displays To do this press and hold the Format button and scroll the Level Wheel to alter the display Scrolling the wheel up zooms in Scrolling the wheel down zooms out Zooming the channel summary display when it is in 100 channel mode is not supported You can also zoom using a wheel on a mouse lon Operations Manual Graphical User Interface GUI Display Conventions lon relies on many traditional ETC indicators which you may be familiar with as well as some new ones This section identifies the graphical and colorful conventions used in lon to indicate conditions to you Indicators in the Live Blind Display This is the live blind summary view paene CABLE ELLE QUE EE DOUCE gigg COQUE ET Bee Ce Ce n ee ol en Ce lu us DEES CEBEE Note The color and text conventions described below apply regardless of the for
75. Serial Commands 286 Chapter 25 Multiple Users 287 About User ID 44 4 4444443 ee m ges 288 Assigning User ID 2 288 Chapter 26 Using Partitioned Control 289 About Partitioned Control 290 How to Use Partitions 290 Setting Up Partitioned Control 290 Partition EISE 26 4 Gade eR t ERR ean ee daa 290 Creating New Partitions 291 Deleting Partitions 291 Using Partitions 292 Partitions in Playback 292 Flexichannel in Partitioned Control 292 Appendix A Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell 293 OVOIVIOW udo pese Race n due AY ee Oe eee ee 293 What the Utility Does 293 Eos Configuration Utility Reference 294 General Settings 296 Network Settings 299 Maintenance and Diagnostics 302 ION MEC 305 Appendix B Multi console and Synchronized Backup 307 OVEIVIOW a nA ae ae 307 Multi console setup 308 Synchronized Backup 311 Appendix C Remote Processor Unit RPU
76. This chapter contains the following sections e System Components 10 e Console Geography 12 Cleaning ION 6 0 chee vena Rb beedeee tae ira bey NG 13 Console Capacities 14 Outputting DMX 15 En System Overview System Components Console lon is designed from conception as a fully integrated controller for conventional lights and multi parameter devices for example moving lights color scrollers gobo wheels Attention to detail across all areas of the system design and architecture allows you the utmost flexibility and customization of use lon allows designers and programmers to develop a mutual vocabulary for moving light control This implementation of simple and uniform syntax for moving light control provides a solid foundation for both experienced and inexperienced moving light users Remote Processor Unit RPU The RPU can be used as the primary or backup processor for the system or for primary playback in installations that do not require a control console after initial programming is completed For more information see the appendix Remote Processor Unit RPU page 315 Remote Video Interface RVI The remote video interface allows remote interaction with the lighting control system This can be for display purposes only Additionally with a mouse and alphanumeric keyboard a
77. To record to a new cue list press Record Cue 2 5 Enter this will create cue list 2 and will record the data to cue 5 in that cue list Any cues recorded after this will automatically record to cue list 2 until another cue list is specified or the selected cue changes the cue list number Using Record Only Record Only can be used to create a new cue list instead of Record Record Only stores only manual data to the specified cue To record to a new cue list press Record Only Cue 2 5 Enter this will create cue list 2 and will record all manual data to cue 5 in that cue list The cue list display will change to show only data from cue list 2 Any cues recorded after this will automatically record to cue list 2 until another cue list is specified or the selected cue changes the cue list Make Manual This softkey can be used to convert live cue or submaster data into manual values allowing them to be included in the Record Only operation Therefore data from other cues or lists can be selectively converted to manual data and then stored to another cue list using Record Only For more information on Make Manual see Using Make Manual page 199 lon Operations Manual Using Assert By default channel parameters only respond to move instructions during playback see Cue List Ownership page 6 The Assert function allows tracked or blocked data from a cue to be replayed even
78. aaa Bata 0 TITE mm NE aa ae as ue pa Cae 39 20 2 C22 pee LS AN MN MN RE MN a a kakak EET Goo an ee oe Seks x s s ys Sia Board eft Bottom pen a Bee GG gi Cleon age FCIRE mm da me oo GN r P a pa Reset Button Colors Cx lon Operations Manual lon This screen allows you to configure the ports on the back of the lon console Ton Local DMX Outputs Port 1DMX Universe Number 1 v Speed Maximum Port 2DMX Universe Number 2 v Speed Maximum Show Control Midi Group Midi In Group 1 X Midi Out Group 1 b Contact Closure Contact Closure In Group T Contact Closure In Address 1 Local DMX This allows you to change the universe or port speed for the two DMX ports on the back of the Ion console Universes can be from 1 64 The default settings are Universe 1 and Universe 2 respectively with both ports set to maximum speed recommended Show Control MIDI Allows you to set the group number for the MIDI In and MIDI Out ports Group numbers can be from 1 32 Default for both ports is 1 Contact Closure remote trigger connector Allows you to set the Group and Address In values for the remote trigger input on the back of lon Relay Out remote trigger connector Allows you to set the Group and Address In values for the remote trigger port on the back of lon Remote Trigger connector pinout EY Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell 305 306 lon Op
79. added to the end of the channel list from an ordering perspective When a group is previewed using the group list the display defaults to showing the ordered view Channels can be reordered as needed from this list Use the Format key to change to a numeric listing of channels For another example e 1 0 Thru 2 Record Group 1 Enter This will record channels 10 through 2 to Group 1 and then if you select the group you can cycle through the channels using Next starting with 10 then 9 then 8 and so on lon Operations Manual Offset You can use the Offset softkey to aid in channel selection prior to storing groups The offset options are Odd Even Reverse and Random For example 1 Thru 9 Offset Odd Record Group 5 records all odd numbered channels between 1 and 9 to Group 5 1 Thru 2 0 Offset Reverse Record Group 3 records channels 1 20 in reverse order to Group 3 using the direct selects Editing and Updating Groups in Live Existing groups can be updated or rerecorded in Live If you rerecord an existing group a confirmation is required unless disabled in Setup By rerecording a group you replace the contents of the group you do not add to it Updating a group does not require a confirmation and adds channels to the group rather than replacing them Other editing or updating examples are Group x Label Label Enter clears the label
80. addresses the DHCP server will give out Pool Size This sets how many IP addresses the DHCP server will give out A setting of 500 means it will give out IP addresses to the first 500 devices that ask for an IP address Subnet Mask This sets the logical network size vs the device address ETC s default is 255 255 000 000 class B This is the subnet mask that the DHCP server will give to network devices Gateway IP This specifies the IP address of a router if one is present on your network This is the gateway IP address that the DHCP server will send to network devices to use If you are on a flat or non routed network the Gateway IP address should match the IP address of the device In order to configure this DHCP server to send out matching gateway IP addresses configure this gateway IP address to match the IP Address Pool field Then the DHCP server will give out a gateway IP address that matches the IP address Enable SNTP Time Server Clicking in the enable box will start the SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol service You determine if the service is running as a client receiving time messages or as a server sending time messages during the installation process Enable TFTP Server Clicking in the enable box will start the TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol server Root Path This sets the directory where files are to be served through TFTP This must be the full path to the directory including drive letter For ex
81. an advisory to indicate this preventing you from duplicating addresses in your patch Display Pages in Patch Softkeys available for use while in patch include Patch Attributes and Database Pressing any of these softkeys opens a paged view of the patch display and redraws the CIA to an expanded view of fields related to the selected page When creating and editing your patch page through each of these softkeys individually to enter more specific data about your selected device Patch Display and Settings When patch is opened lon defaults to this display It provides access to data input fields that you may use to define devices in your lighting system CG type E C how emery 2 1 f Dated Cord um RETA Channel In the patch display all channels are displayed in numerical order When multiple devices are patched to the same channel the channel number is only displayed in the first row additional devices are indicated with part extensions example P2 on the next row of the table e Select the channel number using the control keypad or the direct selects Type lon defaults to patching dimmers To specify a specific device type for the selected channel press the Type button from the CIA The two columns on the left side of the CIA are pagable and show manufacturer names The four columns to the right of the manufacturer s list are pagable devices that are available from the selected manufact
82. any data in the active cue with the current stage settings Record Cue x Enter Enter will replace the any data in cue x with the current stage values Note Using Record will record all parameters of all non default channels onstage This means that all other cue data and submaster data will be included in the record action This is a common method when working with a single cue list When working with multiple cue lists or submasters Record Only is a useful tool ELI Working with a Single Cue List 165 166 Using Record Only Modifying existing cues using Record Only is considered a selective store function As such it adds or modifies only manual data to the target cue but leaves any other data that was already in the cue intact and does not include playback values from other cue lists or submasters Record Only is a good way to modify existing cues without including contributions from other playbacks in the cue In that way it is very similar to update Record Only Enter Enter adds the current manual data to the selected cue Record Only Cue x Enter Enter adds the current manual data to cue x Move To You can use the command Move To to move a cue from one location in the cue list to another Cue 4 More SK Move To Cue 8 Enter moves the contents of cue 4 to cue 8 Cue 4 is removed entirely If cue 8 already existed a confirmation will be re
83. are using Single Monitor Configuration When using a single monitor the top half of the initial display screen becomes the primary viewing area for displayed information lon will first open with the live table display on the top primary half of the screen and the CIA on the bottom half of the screen When the CIA is open one line of the playback status display is visible above the double arrows You can view more of the playback status display by collapsing the CIA see Collapse Expand the CIA page 27 Primary screen live display Playback ommand Status Display line CIA Initial View Primary CIA lon Operations Manual You can use the Swap key to change the view of the display Multiple presses of Swap will yield the following responses First press Expanded View expands the top primary portion of the display to the full screen This essentially hides the CIA from view Second press Playback Status View exposes the CIA again and switches the primary area to the playback status display Third press Primary CIA View returns the screen to the original primary display with the CIA exposed As you open other displays later while programming they will open in place of the live table view The playback status display is always the display visible by pressing Swap aga MG NG Mal Expanded View Playback Status View Live Display EX System Basics 25 Dual Monitor Configuration When t
84. at 5 Enter e Group 5 at 7 Enter e Group 7 at Full Enter Select only Group 1 and dim the remaining Groups using the Rem Dim feature e Group 1 Rem Dim Enter Channels 1 through 10 are selected with an intensity value of 5096 and all remaining channels are at a 0 intensity You may progress channel by channel through the selected group Group 1 channels 1 through 10 using the Next or Last key Each press of the Next or Last key cycles you through only the channels of the selected group Using Next or Last negates the ability to return to the previous stage state by using Rem Dim KI Basic Manual Control 123 124 You can set the dim level for all remainder dim commands in Setup see Manual Control page 101 When set to a value other than zero all rem dim commands will bring intensity to this level instead However it won t bring an intensity up For example if the rem dim level in setup is set to 50 Rem Dim will drop any value above 50 to 50 but not add intensity to any channels below 50 It is possible to override the dim level temporarily by specifying a level after the Rem Dim command Rem Dim can also be used to exclude channels from a submaster or cues during a Record or Update For Example Using Rem Dim You can modify which channels are recorded in the submaster For this example assume that channels 1 through 10 are at full You ve recorded that to subma
85. be included in the record and all data that was included will not track forward Color data in the cue remains unchanged Update lt Cue gt 5 Cue Only Enter updates cue 5 with only those manual parameters that were receiving their instructions from that cue The changes will not track forward in the list Note that if the data being updated were referenced this action updates the referenced target as well 5 Record Cue 7 Cue Only Enter Enter rerecords the specified cue except the contributions from channel 5 The changes will not track forward in the list With system set to Cue Only Record Cue 5 Track Enter Enter rerecords cue 5 This will force the changes to track forward in the list until the next move instruction or block 5 Color Record Cue 7 Track Enter Enter rerecords the specified cue except the color data from channel 5 The recorded changes will track forward in the list Update Cue 3 thru 7 Track Enter updates cues 3 thru 7 Range updates are subject to the normal rules of track cue only in determining impact on subsequent cues ELI Working with a Single Cue List 169 170 Using Trace Trace works just as Track does except it allows changes to be tracked backwards through the cue list until it sees a move instruction A trace will track into but not beyond a blocked instruction Following are some examples
86. category parameter or submasters will return it to the default value 1 Home Enter homes all parameters for channel 1 except intensity 1 Color Home Enter homes all color parameters for channel 1 Group 1 Color Focus Home Enter homes the color and focus parameters of all channels in group 1 You can use the category keys in the CIA or the encoder paging keys Sub 1 Home Enter homes submaster 1 Sub 1 Thru Home Enter homes all submasters You can select a preset to provide home values for non intensity parameters instead of fixture library default values when home commands are used Store a preset with modified home values for only the channel parameters you would like at a different value than default And then assign that preset to Home in Setup see Show Settings page 95 Intensity will disregard the preset value Any channels that are not included in the preset assigned to Home in Setup will use their library defaults Select Last The Select Last key allows you to reselect the previous channel selection This includes multiple channel selections groups and so on Using Select Last Select Last you can recall the last completed command line However Select Last Select Last will not terminate the command line Enter is required When pressed and held the softkeys on lon change to display the following additional options Select Active selects all active
87. channels from live by pressing e channel list Delete Preset 2 Enter lon Operations Manual Chapter 10 storing and Using Palettes Palettes are building blocks that can be used to create presets cues and effects Palettes are a critical component when using moving lights and can save considerable programming time when editing show data This chapter contains the following sections About Palettes e Palette TYPOS a KANG e Eee WA e Storing Palettes Live e Recalling Palettes Editing Palettes Live Editing Palettes in Blind ET Storing and Using Palettes 137 About Palettes Palettes are referenced data This means that when included in presets cues or effects changes to the contents of the palette are propagated into all of the places the palette is stored Four types of palettes are available Intensity Focus Color and Beam lon supports up to 1 000 palettes of each of the four types Palettes can be recorded as decimal or whole numbers and are automatically filtered into IFCB categories Color data cannot be placed in beam palettes intensity cannot be included in focus palettes and so forth This makes the process of creating palettes easier faster and less work If you need to create a reference that will include a mix of IFCB information pr
88. cue in blind when you return to blind The default is disabled Level This sets the default for Level which is accessed in lon by double pressing Full Any value between 0 100 may be entered The default is 100 Plus This sets the level for the which is accessed in lon by pressing At which will increase the selected channel by the set percentage Any value between 0 100 may be entered The default is 1096 Minus This sets the level for which is accessed in lon by pressing At which will decrease the selected channel by the set percentage Any value between 0 100 may be entered The default is 1096 Highlight Preset This field is used to specify the preset that will be used for highlight commands Lowlight Preset This field is used to specify the preset that will be used for lowlight commands High Low Rem Dim This enables a Remainder Dim when any highlight or lowlight commands are given thereby temporarily dimming any channel not participating in the High Low Rem Dim Level This allows you to set the level for all Remainder Dim commands The default is 0 Default Times In this section you may change the default times for sneak commands and the respective feature response times based upon parameter category The default for these is 5 seconds except for back time which uses a default of 1 second Setup 101 102 Face Panel Encoder Tick Record i Error Advisory LW Tic
89. e Device Type A list of all parameters on the channel showing the background value and its source and the DMX value Moves displays information that shows Parameters e Previous move e Value of the previous move preset palette or absolute data Next move Value of the next move preset palette or absolute data Usage displays information on how the channel is used such as e Maximum Intensity Total number of cues it appears in based on intensity Total number of intensity moves e Cue lists it is used in List of submasters that include the channel e List of cues that have move instructions for the channel e List of cues with dark moves for the channel Patch displays the following information the chamnel s address range e the proportional patch level Curve if any e preheat information if any e swap invert pan tilt status any keywords associated with the channel List of all parameter values with their address home value and parked value if any Lamp Controls displays controls for the lamp or other parameters of the device if it is a moving light EJ Using About 249 250 About Address Press About to put the CIA into About mode When an address is selected the information below is displayed You can select the information you wish to view from the five buttons located on the right side of the CIA The buttons are Address displays the following informat
90. effect will run for a set amount of time given in minutes and seconds Enter the time from the keypad Num cycles the effect will run for a set number of iterations Enter the number using the keypad e Duration Cycles Num Cycles 1 0 Enter Parameters This allows you to select which parameters will be involved in the selected effect by default By entering a value here you do not need to specify the required parameter when placing an effect on a channel group To add or remove parameters to the effect press Parameters and then select the desired parameters from the buttons that appear to the left e Parameters Iris Enter Attributes These determine the basic behavior of the effect Attributes include behaviors such as forward reverse bounce positive negative and random grouping or random rate The attributes are slightly different between step absolute and relative effects Forward the effect will run in the programmed direction the arrow on the pattern editor indicates forward for pattern effects step and absolute effects will follow numerical order Reverse effect will run in the opposite direction of forward or reverse numerical direction Forward and Reverse are mutually exclusive settings Bounce effect will run first in forward then in reverse Subsequent passes alternate between forward and reverse Positive effect will run the steps on state and off state as programmed
91. ewan au Patate 198 managing show files 47 manual control last lo RW 109 DU Med sai Sea et es 109 advanced 195 capture 200 COPY tO sourate 196 recall from 197 channel check 127 controlling non intensity parameters NPS 111 during playback 216 encoder LCD 113 HAS ess das Rens ct 128 NID ee ee eden todos 126 highlight 125 home hardkey 119 lowlight 125 make manual 199 make null 198 OffSet v naan ah drame 109 remainder dim 123 selecting channels 108 setting intensity 110 setting lamp controls 121 settings see setup sneak 126 submasters 261 timing manual for cues 156 manual override key 217 in playback 217 mark about sites mass 175 allowing live moves 176 AutoMark 176 AutoMark timing 176 347 348 flagis cc senex eve dea bases 163 referenced marks 177 removing referenced marks 178 setting referenced mark flags 177 timing referenced marks 181 master console definition 307 merge OST ER EN EU 52 show file 52 MIDI ports configuring 305 setup
92. focuses on the features and methods used when working with more than one cue list This chapter contains the following sections e Recording to a New Cue List 188 e Using Assert 189 Changing the Active Cue List 190 Using the Cue List Index 192 EZ Working with Multiple Cue Lists 187 188 Recording to a New Cue List When recording cues cue list 1 is initially used as the default cue list Cue list 1 is displayed with only the cue number It does not have a lead cue list number or a To record to another cue list that list must be specified Cues will then be recorded to that cue list until another list is specified or until the selected cue is changed in live You may record up to 999 cue lists in an lon show file The cue list that you are storing to is always determined by the selected cue unless you specify a different cue list The selected cue is displayed just above the command line on the CIA and at the bottom of the live blind screen The selected cue is the last cue that you affected in live This includes a record an update ora playback action such as Go Back or a Go To Cue instruction or simply changing the timing on a cue It is very useful to keep an eye on the selected cue Using Record Record will record all parameters of any channels that have non default values to a specified cue
93. for the selected channels selected channels Palette n Enter recalls the associated IFCB palette for selected channels Channel List edge Beam Palette n Enter recalls only the edge data from the specified beam palette for the selected channels Group n Palette z Enter recalls all of the data in the palette and applies it to the selected group Intensity Palette y at z Enter recalls the intensity palette for selected channels and sets all recalled intensity values to a proportioned level of their recorded states Note The above example breaks the referenced link to the intensity palette To maintain the link the palette must be recalled without a modified intensity value Calling back the intensity palette at full will also break this link 142 When recalling palettes only channels that are selected at the point of recall will be affected by the palette recall The data recalled from a palette is referenced To break the reference you may use Make Absolute lon Operations Manual Editing Palettes Live D Note If a palette is already recorded Record replaces all existing data Record Only is a selective store therefore it adds data Recording over a previously existing palette requires a confirmation if confirmations are enabled in the setup menu It is also possible to Update to add manual changes to the record target Rerecord Rerecording foll
94. in Coarse Fine determination The DMX channel defines the Coarse adjustment and the LDMX defines the Fine adjustment Step 1 Use the Page keys to navigate to the LDMX column of the desired parameter Step 2 Enter the desired address using the keypad lon Operations Manual To alter the Home settings for any parameter You can define the value for any parameter s home value Step 1 Use the Page keys to navigate to the Home column of the desired parameter Step 2 Enter the desired home value 0 255 using the keypad Range editing a parameter You can enter the operational ranges for specific slots within any specific parameter such as color scroller color wheel gobo wheel and so on For example if the parameter were Gobo Wheel and the fixture included a four slot gobo wheel you Can use ranges to determine the minimum or maximum values for each of those slots You can also label the slots and define the minimum or maximum values that will appear in the channel display for that parameter To define the range values for any parameter Step 1 Use the Page keys to navigate to the parameter that you want to add ranges to Step 2 Click Ranges The range list will open Step 3 Determine the total number of slots required by the parameter Be sure to include open slots when needed Step 4 Click New to add ranges Repeat this step until you have as many slots as are required by the num
95. in the editor will impact the effect itself and all instances in which the effect is used Changes made to effects in the effect status display impact only that instance of the effect Changes made directly in the effect editor impact all instances of that effect Stop an Effect Pressing Stop Effect Enter will stop all running effects To stop a specific effect press Stop Effect x Enter You may also stop effects on specific channels by selecting channels Stop Effect Enter You may also remove an effect instruction by selecting channels Effect At Enter This command will work in live or blind You can also stop the whole effect by pressing Effect x At Enter Deleting an Effect To delete an effect press Delete Effect n Enter Enter If you delete one of the default effects 901 through 916 that effect will return to its default values lon Operations Manual Effects on Submasters Channels running effects can be loaded onto a submaster Pressing the bump button of the submaster starts or stops the effect For the submaster to control the rate and or size of the effect it must be configured as an effects submaster When a submaster is defined as effect only the effect information is stored The slider will then have control of the in and out behavior of the effect If the submaster is set to additive the slider will control non effect values only Configuring an Effect Submaster To config
96. in the previous cue that are not in the selected channel list will be set to zero in cue 5 To record only specific parameters into a target cue 1 thru 5 Focus Color Record Cue 4 Enter records the focus and color data for channels 1 through 5 into cue 4 Any other data on stage would not be stored in the target cue Using a selective store for a new record target will track in values from the previous cue that are not included in the record action Using a Negative Selective Store It is possible to withhold data from a cue by using the key as follows Group 3 thru Group 6 Record Cue 9 Enter records the specified cue with the exception of any channels associated with groups 3 through 6 3 thru 6 Record Cue 9 Enter records the specified cue with the exception of channels 3 through 6 Sub 7 Record Enter records the selected cue without the input from submaster 7 Sub Record Enter as above except withholds the contents of all submasters Color Record Cue 8 Enter records cue 9 without any color data ELI Working with a Single Cue List 153 Using Cue Only Track In Track Mode When you create a new cue any unchanged channel parameter data from the previous cue is tracked into the new specified cue Any changes in this new cue will also track forward into subsequent cues until a move instruction is enco
97. indications are Green Valid external timing is being received Red The internal clock is the data source and is running Grey No timing data is available lon Operations Manual Enabling the Clocks The internal and external clocks can be enabled separately for each time code list If you enable the external clock only events will play back as long as valid timing data is received When the timing data stops the events will stop When you enable the internal clock only it starts running immediately and triggers events appropriate to the time When both internal and external clocks are enabled the internal clock does not start running until the first valid external time is received After that it will run whenever the external time source is absent Loop times First and last times define the overall loop Times can be set anywhere from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 When external time is being received lon ignores these times However you should still set them to match whatever loop times the external clock is using Internal clock You can set the internal clock at any time by pressing Time and entering a time Programming a Time Code Event Define the first time and last time for the event list times are given as 00 00 00 00 Event 1 FirstTime 2 0 1 5 LastTime 2 0 4 5 1 5 Enter Specify the number of frames per second FPS used by the timing source 24 25 or 30 lt Event gt 1
98. located to the right of the LCD This displays all categories PERE CREP DRE Corre Hoo dodod cooo codot Cres EET E ECO CERRE CEDE ERI CLE CELL F C B data E System Basics 43 Table View Table view is available in live or blind Unlike summary view table view displays the fixture type associated with channels and details about each channel s category or parameter levels In live table view displays all active channel data being output from lon In blind it will display all data for a single record target cue preset palette depending on what is viewed In table view focus color and beam information can be viewed in either a summary of these three categories To expand a category to show detail press the Data or Params key and the associated parameter key For example Data Color will change the color category from a summary view to a detailed one To collapse a category press the Data or Params key and the associated parameter key You cannot hide a category from view When a category has been expanded to hide or reveal only certain parameters press and hold Data and then select the parameter buttons of the appropriate parameters in the CIA The parameters will be displayed or suppressed depending on the current view Notice that when you hold down the Data button the buttons of parameters that are currently selected for viewing will be highlighted in the CIA In the table view a slight space is
99. manually set values into the next cue in the list Record Only Cue 3 Enter stores only the manually set data into cue 3 2 thru 8 Record Only Cue 9 Enter stores only the manually set data for channels 2 through 8 into the target cue 9 Group 2 Record Only Cue 5 Enter stores only the manual data from group 2 into cue 5 selected channels Color Record Only Cue 4 Enter stores only the color data for the selected channels into cue 4 As with Record filters can further restrict stored data if deployed when using Record Only See Using Filters on page 183 lon Operations Manual Using Selective Store You may use the button to withhold information from a cue or use the button to specify a particular channel or parameter to be included in the record action These actions are both selective stores For information on a selective store using filters see Partial Filters page 185 Using a Positive Selective Store You may record only specified parameters into cues If the cue has already been stored this action adds the specified channel parameters to the existing cue data To record only specific channels into a new target cue 1 thru 5 Record Cue 4 Enter this records only channels 1 through 5 into cue 4 channel list Record Cue 5 Rem Dim Enter this will store the selected channels into the target cue Any channels active
100. mark 178 replace aee dep saad is 65 replace with 173 rerecord palettes 143 RFR See Radio Focus Remote RPU See Remote Processor Unit RVI See Remote Video Interface S SAVE aS enn 55 saving existing show file 55 QUICK cuc AG aang are a 55 scaled park 224 scroller calibrating 78 editing in patch 77 scroller picker 74 scrolling displays 34 security SUD Kua eov 105 select channels keypad 108 select last oss Nanana 119 selecting channelsin patch 63 selective store negative 153 positive 153 with cues 153 Sensor feedback enable see eus 301 serial RS 232 286 Services ETC Technical 3 settings attribute inpatch 70 database in patch 72 patch ev salang ad vet Ka 68 SOUP AA 93 desk settings 100 Displays 103 Face Panel 102 manual control record defaults 100 MIDI show control 98 time code 98 351 352 opening 94 Security eee ee eae 105 SNOW gece es bee Sos LG ET 94 show control 98 show settings 95 cue settings 95 fader configuration 96 SMPTE
101. of it Record LCD Defaults Settings Manual Fader Wing Control Config REL Face Panel SES Manual Settings Config On Apply Face Panel 4 Keypad Identify Displays PDF File Settings Click and drag the wings to match your physical layout Click Apply to save the changes Clicking Reset will restore to the last saved configuration Clicking Manual Config On will turn off manual configuration and will require a restart of the application before the console will automatically configure the wings RFR Settings This screen is for allowing RFR connections The default setting is Enabled Security This feature will be available in a future release Setup 105 106 lon Operations Manual Chapter 8 Basic Manual Control lon provides a variety of ways to select and command control channels This chapter identifies the many basic ways you can select channels and manipulate show data within lon This chapter contains the following sections Selecting Channels 108 Setting Intensity 110 Manual Control of Non intensity Parameters NPs 111 ul RE CR n EE 119 Lamp Controls 121 Using and 122 Remainder Dim 123 Highlight and Lowlight 125 GE BRP DAD gae d aee aie Rer du eee ee Bae 126 P secl llo ede fete
102. of these resources is sufficient contact ETC Technical Services directly at one of the offices identified below Emergency service is available from all ETC offices outside of normal business hours When calling for assistance please have the following information handy Console model and serial number located on back panel Dimmer manufacturer and installation type e Other components in your system Unison other consoles etc Americas United Kingdom Electronic Theatre Controls Inc Electronic Theatre Controls Ltd Technical Services Department Technical Services Department 3031 Pleasant View Road 26 28 Victoria Industrial Estate Middleton WI 53562 Victoria Road 800 775 4382 USA toll free London W3 6UU England 1 608 831 4116 44 0 20 8896 1000 service etcconnect com service etceurope com Asia Germany Electronic Theatre Controls Asia Ltd Electronic Theatre Controls GmbH Technical Services Department Technical Services Department Room 1801 18 F Ohmstrasse 3 Tower 1 Phase 1 Enterprise Square 83607 Holzkirchen Germany 9 Sheung Yuet Road 49 80 24 47 00 0 Kowloon Bay Kowloon Hong Kong techserv hoki etcconnect com 852 2799 1220 service etcasia com mE Introduction 3 Important Concepts Before using lon you should read and familiarize yourself with the concepts defined below You will find that understanding these terms and concepts will improve your efficiency with lon Channel Fixture A fixture is defin
103. offset using 72 output address 63 DICKE Le ann Aa sn Le 74 preheat 70 scroller picker 74 selecting channels in 63 settings 68 status column 63 tutorial patching dimmers 64 patching moving lights 66 unpatch a channel 65 wheel picker 74 Phone Remote 323 playback fader controls assert 4444 218 freeze 218 CPE doa bi eA f guts 215 manual override 217 349 release stop effect Stop Back timing disable intensity manual override manual control during out of sequence cues using Go using stop back using go to cue playback faders about mes playback status display color indicators indicators text indicators playing macros power powering down powering up preheat cue flag in patch presets about deleting editing in blind spreadsheet view table view editing in live list view opening recalling removing channels from rerecording storing using Record Only using Record storing in live updating using abo
104. on move instructions that it has on tracked values Some examples of using Make Null in blind are Color Palette 1 Enter 3 Magenta Make Null Enter removes all magenta parameter data for channel 3 from color palette 1 Preset 5 Thru 9 Enter Intensity Make Null Enter removes all intensity data for all channels in presets 5 9 Cue 8 Enter 2 Thru 7 Make Null Enter nulls all data for channels 2 7 in cue 8 Cue 9 Enter Intensity Make Null Enter nulls all intensity data for all channels in cue 9 In the cue scenarios above Make Null differs from using At Enter in that instead of allowing values established in previous cues to track in Make Null both restricts the recorded data from playing back and prevents other values from tracking in Therefore if the cue were executed as an out of sequence cue or asserted no data would play back or track in for any nulled values lon Operations Manual Using Make Manual The Make Manual softkey can be used to convert cue or submaster data into manual values allowing it to be included in Record Record Only and Update operations 5 Make Manual Enter selects channel 5 and makes all of its current parameter settings manual data 8 Focus Make Manual Enter selects channel 5 and makes all of its focus data manual 9 Thru 3 Color Intensity Make Manual Enter selects channe
105. or sell the Software but User may transfer User s rights under this License on a permanent basis provided User transfers this License together with the accompanying Software and all other relevant materials retaining no copies and the recipient party agrees to the terms of this License User agrees not to cause or permit the reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of the Software Removal emulation or reverse engineering of all or any part of the Software constitutes an unauthorized modification to the Software and is specifically prohibited If the Software is licensed to a User for use in a member country of the European Union User may reverse engineer and or decompile the Software to the extent that sufficient information is not available for the purpose of creating an interoperable software program and cannot be obtained by observing examining or testing the program but only for such purposes and to the extent that sufficient information is not provided by ETC upon written request User shall not remove any product MUN 101879 2 009900 0011 1 identification copyright notices or other notices or proprietary restrictions from the Software 4 Warranty Information Software is provided AS IS under this License without warranty of any kind either express or implied including without limitation warranties that the Software is free of defects merchantable fit for a particular purpose or non infringing The entir
106. parameter data with direct entry using the control keypad and using the parameters on the CIA 1 At 4 0 Cyan 5 5 Enter Note Color scroller data will display on the encoders and displays as frame numbers F1 which would be frame 1 F2 for frame 2 etc F1 5 is halfway between 1 and 2 F2 will display if the frame is less than 2 5 and F2 if the frame is greater than 1 5 After the frame number the gel number will also be displayed Frame numbers can be used from the command line 2 Scroller 5 Enter will send channel 2 s scroller to frame 5 Frames can also be selected by using the DMX address for that frame Pressing twice will post DMX to the command line 3 Scroller 2 5 5 Enter will send channel 3 s scroller to the frame with the DMX address of 255 Custom Control Pressing the Custom button displays intensity controls 8 Basic Manual Control 117 118 Using the Color Picker Press the Displays button and select the Color Picker from the softkeys to display the color picker in the CIA Within the color picker you will LAPONO 52 CAM see columns of buttons to the Gel GamColor ae Te ere right The first button Color Brigis to Roscohec Supercel Color Format is for toggling between native RGB CMY color scroller Sa eas or color select and hue and saturation The other buttons are manufacturer catalogs of gels To display a specific manufacturer
107. parameters in that category will be highlighted and Filter On will appear above the softkey Step 3 Click Filters The buttons return to their normal appearance In subsequent record functions only the filtered categories will be recorded You may apply multiple category filters at once Remember that applying all filters and no filters yields the same effect Partial Filters If you do not want an entire category to be recorded you may apply parameter specific filters partial filters instead To apply partial filters Step 1 Click Filters in the top right corner of the parameter grid in the CIA The parameter buttons change to display filter selection Step 2 Click the parameter button for example Zoom for the parameter you want to include in the record target That parameter will be highlighted and Filter On will appear above the softkey Step 3 Click Filters The buttons return to their normal appearance In subsequent record functions only the filtered parameters will be recorded You may apply as many partial filters at once as you wish Any unfiltered parameters will not be included in record actions In live unfiltered parameter data is displayed in its proper color but a grey n indicating null data will appear in the upper left corner of the parameter s field Removing Filters Applying filters is a toggle state To remove any filter simply repeat the application process described above W
108. removed Organizing the Direct Selects You have considerable flexibility in how you organize the direct selects They may be arranged to display one of several different types of data To choose which information to view Step 1 Click the Select button for any block of direct selects You will be offered the following choices to view Channels Groups Intensity Palettes Focus Palettes Color Palettes Beam Palettes Presets Macros and Effects Step 2 Click the button for the data you wish to view and the associated direct selects will populate with any recorded information of that type If there is no recorded information of that type the block of buttons will remain empty but will populate with data of that type as associated record targets are stored Step 3 You may also click Select again without choosing any option to return to the previous state You can increase or decrease the size of any set of direct selects by pressing the 20 50 button which will change the display between one set of 50 buttons and two sets of 20 buttons lon Operations Manual Using Direct Selects Direct selects allow access to a number of controls including a channel select display If there are more items than can be viewed at once you may view subsequent pages by using the page buttons Page A Page W by the direct selects Selecting Channels with Direct Selects Channel direct selects are highlighted when selected Channel selectio
109. s catalog press the specific manufacturer or catalog and select the desired gel The Bright to Full button will only appear if selected channels have a brightness parameter When channels are selected and a specific gel is chosen the color picker will show a dot which represents the selected fixture s The dot is a visual indication of the color each fixture can accommodate closest to the gel selected This tool is most useful when color matching between different fixture types to maintain an even field of color You can click in the picker to go to the hue and saturation values or you can match a specific gel color from the manufacturers list on the right Selecting a specific gel will also produce the hue and saturation value What is Hue and Saturation Hue is the actual color It is measured in angular degrees around the cone starting and ending at red 0 or 360 so yellow 60 green 120 etc Saturation is the purity of the color measured in percent from the center of the cone 0 to the surface 100 At 096 saturation hue is meaningless Brightness is measured in percent from black 0 to white 100 At 096 brightness both hue and saturation are meaningless Gel colors can also be manually entered into the command line 6 Color 1 1050 Enter assigns Apollo gel number 1050 to channel 6 Each of the manufacturers have been assigned a number which can be seen beside their name in the Color Picker
110. specific days RTC events can run at a certain time of day like 5 00pm on Tuesdays a certain date or at a time based off of astronomical events such as sunrise and sunset Enabling Real Time Clock RTC is enabled or disabled in Setup See Show Control page 98 for more information For RTC events to work properly time zone latitude and longitude should all be setup correct Those settings are found under the General tab in the Eos Configuration Utility For more information see General Settings page 296 Real Time Clock Events RTC events are created using the Show Control Display RTC events consist of a time field a day or date field and an action Time for RTC events can be specified as local time or as time relative to the astronomical events sunrise and sunset Local time is displayed in the 24 hour format For example if you want an event to run at 2 50pm you would need to set it for 14 50 Programming Real Time Clock Events Define the Time and Data for each event Event 1 Time 1 5 0 0 Days Mon Wed Fri Enter sets the time for 3 00pm on Mondays Wednesdays and Fridays Event 2 Time Before Sunset 3 0 Days 1 2 3 6 Enter sets the time for 30 minutes before sunset lt Event gt 3 Time After Sunrise 6 0 Date 3 0 Month 1 0 Year 2 0 0 8 Enter sets the time for an hour after sunrise on October 30 2008 Note Days
111. starts the effect The fader controls the rate and or size based on the effect s entry behavior Pressing the bump button again stops the effect In other words there is no difference between a proportional fader and an intensity master when the submaster is configured to be an effect submaster EL Creating and Using Effects 243 244 lon Operations Manual Chapter 20 Using About About provides detailed information regarding selected elements When opened it appears in the CIA and remains open until closed or until another action forces it to close This chapter contains the following sections EJ Using About noon MERCEDE 247 About Channel 249 About Address 2 02 icis lodi ib eines 250 About GUC ooo ee su de hr A Reha 253 About IFCB Palettes 253 About Presets 253 245 246 About About Pressing About puts the console in about mode which allows you to examine about information indefinitely simply by selecting the element you are interested in When in about mode selecting a channel will reveal information about that channel Below are examples of the Current Values view see below of information that is presented when selecting conventional or moving lights Conventional Channel Current Values Moving Light Channel Current Values The buttons on the right side of the about screen alt
112. station before doing so The remote will be functional once it is connected directly to the console If the base station is still connected and a command is entered on the remote multiple iterations of the command may register and this may create errors in the lon command line 328 lon Operations Manual RFR Operation Modes The Eos lon RFR defaults to opening in Live mode There are other modes available in the RFR however To switch modes hold down the Mode More SK button and then select the desired mode from those available by pressing the appropriate softkey Mode options are Park Live Playback and Patch Park Mode This mode is used for parking channels and also for channel check and address check functions Softkeys The following softkeys are available in park mode Address Channel e Last Full Out Next Address and Channel are used to select addresses or channels for parking Channel 7 5 Enter Parks channel 7 at 50 Address 8 Full Parks address 8 at full Full and Out are used to set those levels for channels or addresses Out parks the channel or address at 0 Next and Last are used for the check functions see below 9 Enter unparks channel 8 Channel or Address Check When a single address or channel is selected using Next and Last you can rapidly increment or decrement through the channels or addresses to verify function T
113. system The main difference between backup and client modes is what happens in the event of primary processor failure If the primary fails a backup will automatically ask if you want it to take control as the master of the system or if you want to troubleshoot the problem User ID determines some interaction between the backup and the primary console If the backup and the primary have the same User ID they will share the same command line If they have different User IDs they will have independent command lines Backup mode can be run on lon consoles and lon RPUs Remote Processor Unit For more information on lon backup systems see Multi console and Synchronized Backup page 307 Offline Offline mode puts the software in a state where there is no network activity no control no connections with other consoles or any other network devices This mode is primarily intended for offline editing of a show file Offline mode can be run on Eos lon RPUs RVIs and personal desktop or portable computers EY Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell 295 296 General Settings General Device Name OEM JPKFD3JY630 rine 14 TEN Time Zone GMT 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada Language amp english united states M Keyboard samenglish united states Shaw Archive Path D ShowArchive When you click on a field to change the entry an appropriate keyboard numbers RE B B n B n gt n D n B only vs fu
114. system without a loss of show data or live output lon Operations Manual Synchronized Backup Once you have changed settings to facilitate a multi console system on the network you may activate synchronized backup to ensure show data security lon synchronized backup is designed so that during normal operation the primary console controls the lighting system and any console configured as backup or client synchronize with the primary The following activities will synchronize between consoles when operating in a backup system e Playback Record operations Manually set data Show file and show data Only lon consoles Eos consoles or RPUs can function as a primary or backup Setting up Synchronized Backup Before backup is possible you must have at least two lon devices consoles or RPUs only connected to the network One must be assigned as primary and one as a backup To assign a backup to a primary Step 1 Exit the lon Eos environment Browser gt Exit lon on the console you wish to act as the backup This will send you to the ECU welcome screen Step 2 Click on the Backup button in the welcome screen The console will then startup the software this time in backup mode lon will try to connect to a master console The CIA will say Waiting for Master One moment please Step 3 If the backup doesn t connect after a few moments click the Troubleshoot button in the CIA This will open the network configure scre
115. the color data from the specified preset for selected channels Recall From Preset 3 at 5 s05 Enter recalls all channels in preset 3 and sets all intensity values at 5096 The original intensity data is still linked to the preset If the intensity change is desired you must update the preset to maintain the change and the link or make the data absolute before storing to another record target Channel List Preset 7 Enter at 5 Enter recalls preset 7 for selected channels Intensity values will be recalled at 5096 of their recorded state The intensity link is maintained If the intensity change is desired the user either needs to update the preset to maintain the change and the link or make the data absolute before storing to another record target Recall From Preset 9 Enter selects all channels with data stored in preset 9 1 Recall From Preset 1 At 5 0 Enter recalls the intensity of channel 1 from preset 1 at 5096 of the stored value If channel 1 was set to 50 in preset 1 it s recalled value would be 25 lon Operations Manual Editing Presets Live There are two ways to edit a preset in Live You may rerecord the preset or you may use Update Rerecord Rerecording follows the conventions of Record and Record Only The only exception is that a confirmation is required to actually rerecord the preset For Example Preset 5 has already been recorded To rerecord Preset
116. the console power off connect the USB cable provided between the console and one wing as shown above If multiple wings are joined only one power and one USB connection is required for all joined wings Using the power supply adaptor kit connect the fader wing to a power source It is recommended that you run the power and USB cables through the strain relief included on the back of the wings Turn the console on Connect to USB on the console RE Universal Fader Wings 337 338 User Guidelines for Fader Wings Fader Wing Interaction With lon 1x20 When connected with a USB cable the 1 x 20 will automatically be populated with the faders 1 20 Any other fader wings will then be populated with successive fader pages 2x10 or 2x20 lon will automatically recognize the fader wings and their configuration 2 x 10 or 2 x 20 once they are connected to the console The system will configure the faders according to the configuration in fader wing configuration screen for more information see Fader Wing Config page 104 The left most fader will be fader 1 on page 1 next will be fader 2 on page 1 and so on Multiple wings connected If multiple wings are used in conjunction with each other configuration will automatically adhere to the following logic 1x20 Anytime a 1x20 is attached to lon it will automatically load the first 20 faders Other wings will then be populated starting with the 21st fader 2x10 and
117. the last time it will reset to the first time and continues running Although external timing may run faster or slower than real time the internal clock runs only at real time Analog uses external time only Real Time Clock uses internal time only Since that timing information doesn t come to lon from an external source it is important that all the correct information for time zone latitude and longitude are properly setup in the Eos Configuration Utility lon Operations Manual Programming an Event List Getting started with an event list is the same regardless for which Show Control protocol you are using To program an event list in lon you first must open the show control display Go to e Browser gt Record Target Lists gt Show Control Display Create an event list by specifying it in the command line This display follows the Cue List Cue structure in calling out Event Lists Events Event 1 Enter Specify what the list will respond to MIDI SMPTE Analog or RTC Event 1 Type MIDI Enter Define the group or source e Event 1 Source 8 Enter Activate the internal and or external timing functions see nternal vs External Time page 278 These functions are toggle on off states Event 1 Internal External Enter When defining an event list it is feasible to enter multiple commands in the same command line This can speed your programming of a
118. the level will move to 15 That will hold for 1 second and then the level will return to full The channel or address will keep flashing until either the command line is cleared Below are some examples of patching from the Patch display Patching a generic dimmer 1 At 5 Enter patches channel 1 to output 5 1 Thru 2 4 At 1 Enter patches channel 1 24 to outputs 1 24 Patching a moving light 2 Type ETC Revolution IM SM Wybron At 1 1 Enter patches an ETC Revolution fixture to channel 2 with a starting output address of 11 Attribute Display and Settings The Attributes page provides you with optional fields for additional information and details about the configuration of your system Attribute settings include Preheat Proportion Curve Invert Pan Invert Tilt and Swap When the selected device includes a color scroller a Scroller button will be displayed in the CIA when the selected device includes a color wheel or a gobo wheel Color Wheel or Gobo Wheel buttons will appear Click the desired attribute button and use the keypad to set the attribute value Preheat Preheat This field allows you to specify an intensity value to preheat incandescent filaments When a preheat flag is applied to a cue any channels that are fading from zero to an active intensity and have been assigned a preheat value in patch will preheat in the immediately preceding cue
119. the new frame is accurate If itis press Last again to move to the previous frame in the scroll If not follow the calibration procedure again Repeat steps 6 9 until you have calibrated all of the frames Press Live or Blind to close the virtual encoder display You can also calibrate from the encoder LCD This eliminates the need for the virtual encoder display lon Operations Manual To calibrate from the LCD Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 KI Select the channel of the scroller you wish to calibrate Press the Color encoder button to the upper right of the LCD Multiple presses may be required before the scroller encoder is visible in the virtual encoder display Use the encoder to move all the way to the last frame of the scroller Watch the scroller and continue adjusting the frame until it is centered in the desired position Press and hold the scroller encoder Calibrate becomes visible as a softkey in the encoder LCD Press Calibrate The new center position is now stored for the selected channel Continue holding the encoder and press Last to move to the center point of the previous frame Visually verify if the center point of the new frame is accurate If it is press Last again to move to the previous frame in the scroll If not follow the calibration procedure again Repeat steps 6 9 until you have calibrated all of the frames
120. the playback status display AutoMarks will execute using the time of the cue in which the moves occur the cue indicated by M The exception to this is if discrete timing is stored with the move instruction in which case the discrete time will be used Conditions Triggering an AutoMark The following rules determine which channels AutoMark is applied to and how it is deployed The marked cue must have a move instruction for intensity of moving lights above zero or null The marked cue must have a move instruction for non intensity parameters of those channels AutoMark will not occur if the channel is receiving an intensity instruction from another source such as a submaster or HTP fader AutoMark must be enabled for an AutoMark to occur AutoMark is based on the current setting of the default during playback It does not matter what the setting is at the point of record On a per channel basis an AutoMark does not occur until Any parameter delay time has elapsed and The intensity has reached zero and the parameter has completed any previous movement Allowing a Live Move When AutoMark is On it is possible to override it on a per cue or cue part basis The override will be available through a softkey AutoMark Off This softkey is not visible when AutoMark is disabled in default settings AutoMark can be disabled on cues or cue parts When enabled the cue that executes the mark will have an
121. the scroll or wheel select the NEW text The available gel color gobo and effect media selections will be displayed Manufacturer Manufacturer Cataloged media list catalog sorted numerically The media selection includes the following softkeys Gel Color Gobo and Effect each will display available media selections as they are cataloged by the associated scroll or wheel manufacturers Open places the frame in Open White Generally the first media frame is open Cancel cancels the media selection and returns to the frame editor When a manufacturer is selected from the list the catalog selection changes to display only the selected manufacturer s offerings When a specific catalog is selected the media will display in the last three columns of the editor When you make a media selection the display returns to the new wheel frame list where additional frames can be added to the scroll or wheel using the New frame button or you can click in the next frame area to add more frames Note An Invert softkey will display when creating or copying a wheel or scroller Invert is used to reverse the order of frames 76 lon Operations Manual Editing a copy of a scroll or wheel If a copy has been made of an existing scroll or wheel the copied scroll or wheel will display as New Wheel x before the standard manufacturer offerings The frame list will include an exact duplica
122. their default highlight values see above Highlight Lowlight Rem Dim In addition to the highlight lowlight preset there is also a setting for Highlight Rem Dim in setup When enabled and highlight lowlight mode is active the intensity for all non selected channels are automatically set to the Rem Dim value established in setup if that Rem Dim value is lower than the channel s current intensity This can be used to help further isolate the channels you are working with in Highlight Lowlight Mode If you do not wish to enable Rem Dim globally in setup you can specify a rem dim on the command line for temporary use Highlight Rem Dim Enter 8 Basic Manual Control 125 Sneak The Sneak command when a destination is not provided removes manual changes from selected channels and allows the channels to sneak back to their background states cue or submaster instruction if any For Expression users this is similar to Release If there is no background state from the playbacks the channel parameters will be set to their home position The sneak command follows the sneak timing default established in Setup see Setup Manual Control page 101 unless a timing value is provided as part of the sneak command The sneak command can also be used to send a channel parameter to a specific destination either with or without timing The following examples illustrate the various methods of using the sneak command channel
123. this space 5 Database Notes this fixture is a backup to channel 15 for front of house right new lamp installed on 10 4 06 Enter adds a note to channel 5 Using Offset in Patch Using the Offset feature in patch allows you to force a numerical offset between the starting address of channels in patch or for offsetting your channel selection This feature is useful when you have configurable devices in your show such as a Source Four Revolution which has option slots for additional addresses scrollers indexing pattern wheels and so on or when you want to start your addresses at some known multipler 1 Thru 5 Type Source Four Revolution At 1 Offset 3 1 Enter fixtures will be patched with a patch address offset of 31 channels allowing you to have additional space within the patch for a given fixture type regardless of configuration or personality 1 Thru 2 0 Offset 2 Type VL1000 At 1 Offset 2 0 Enter selects every other channel in the list and patches them with an offset of 20 addresses lon Operations Manual Patch Channels from the Encoder LCD You may use the encoders and LCD to patch channels in lon This is an alternative to using the methods described above The end result will be the same this simply gives you the ability to patch without requiring the use of the mouse or external touchscreen To patch channels from the encoders and LCD Step 1 Manu
124. touchbutton allows you to configure how many frames need to be synced before timecode starts running Frames can be from 1 30 Default is 2 frames MSC Receive This touchbutton toggles the setting for receiving MIDI Show Control from an external source between Enabled and Disabled The default setting is Disabled MSC Receive Channel Also known as Device ID this setting allows you to establish the MIDI Show Control device ID for lon The device ID can be set from 0 126 lon will process commands sent to the matching Device Id lon will also process commands sent to Device Id 127 All Call For example MSC Receive Channel 5 0 Enter ACN MIDI Rx ID s This setting allows you to specify the MIDI Show Control data that lon will receive when transmitted over the Advanced Control Network ACN When set lon will receive MSC data from any gateway that has its MIDI In Stream ID set to the same number ACN_MIDI Receive ID can be from 1 32 ID ranges may be used For example ACN MIDI Receive ID 2 5 Enter MSC Transmit This touchbutton toggles the setting for transmitting MIDI Show Control data between Enabled and Disabled The default setting is Disabled MSC Transmit Channel Also know as Device ID this setting allows you to establish the device ID with which lon will transmit MIDI show control information A device ID can be from 0 126 or 127 All Call For e
125. wish to alter A button window will open Step 5 Click on the type of button you want it to be Macro or Eos Hard Key If Macro Click on the Macro box and enter the desired macro number from the keyboard and press enter Then click Accept If Eos Hard Key Click on the Eos HardKey drop down menu and select the hard key you wish to use Then click Accept Step 6 Repeat this process for any other buttons you wish to reconfigure Step 7 To restore the default buttons at any time click the Restore Defaults button RVI and RPU button configurations are interchangeable Therefore you can import button configurations from one to the other To import a button configuration You may import an RVI button configuration file from a USB device Step 1 Click the Import button in the RPU section of the ECU The RVI will search for valid RVI RPU button file Step 2 If a valid file is found the ECU will ask you if you want to import the settings Click Yes The settings will be imported Step 3 Click Ok To export a button configuration You may export your RPU button configuration to a USB device Step 1 Click the Export button in the RPU section of the ECU Step 2 If a USB drive is available the ECU will ask you to choose the desired drive from the drop down menu Click on the desired USB drive Step 3 Click Accept The button configuration will be saved to the USB drive Step4 Click OK
126. 1 2 3 4 and 7 Cue 1 thru 5 Sub 1 thru Enter sequentially loads cues 1 thru 5 to subs 1 thru 5 a CopyTo command will appear within the syntax on the command line E Storing and Using Submasters 259 260 Updating a Submaster It is possible to make changes to a submaster in live mode Update is used to store changes to a submaster Update Sub 5 Enter updates sub 5 to include changes in live output only for channels already in submaster 5 You can also press the bump button for submaster 5 to select it Channel list Update Sub 5 Enter adds only the specified channels to submaster 5 Labels can be changed without restoring the contents as well Sub 6 Label xxxx Enter Sub 6 Label Label Enter removes the label Deleting a Submaster You can delete a submaster using the Delete key When a submaster is deleted the slider remains configured as a submaster but it will be empty Delete Sub 5 Enter Enter deletes the contents of sub 5 lon Operations Manual Using Bump Button Timing With Submasters Each submaster bump can have three different timing values Upfade Dwell and Downfade see below The default timing is set so that the bump functions as an on flash key for additive submasters and an off flash key for inhibitive submasters Effects on submasters will follow submaster timing unless timing has been placed in the effec
127. 10 Termination Notwithstanding the above ETC may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies terminate this EULA if any of the following events should occur i if you fail to perform or comply with any provision or term herein and ii if you become insolvent go into liquidation file or initiate an action for bankruptcy or have a receiver administrative receiver or liquidator appointed or suffer similar MUN 101879 2 009900 0011 3 measures in any relevant jurisdiction or if you cease doing business in any form or are no longer able to meet your obligations within the meaning of this EULA 11 Confidentiality You shall keep secret and confidential and shall not disclose to any third party any and all confidential information owned or otherwise possessed by ETC including without limitation the Software the related documents and the contents of this EULA without prior written approval from ETC 12 Ownership ETC and its licensors shall retain exclusive ownership of all world wide intellectual property rights in and to the Software and any copies of the Software All rights in and to the Software not expressly granted to User in this EULA are expressly reserved for ETC and its licensors 13 Warranty for Third Party s Intellectual Property Rights You shall indemnify defend and hold harmless ETC and the Supplier or Suppliers as applicable from and against any and all losses damages claims liability costs and exp
128. 2x20 When 2x fader wings are attached to each other the faders will populate continuously across the attached array according to the configuration in fader wing configuration screen The top row of all wings will be successive from one wing to the next The bottom row will start where the entire top row left off and then will also be successive from one wing to the next Therefore when fader wings are attached to each other Top Row Faders 1 10 11 thru 30 31 40 Bottom Row Faders 41 50 51 thru 70 71 80 2x10 2x20 2x10 LCD The display at the center of the fader wing shows information about the faders For submasters the sub number label and current value 0 100 of the fader are shown When the page is changed the current value will display the necessary percentage the fader must be set at to match the required level of the submaster For playbacks the cue list number will be shown preceded by an L for example L3 cue list 3 Beneath this the current pending cue is displayed in an oval shape For Grandmasters a GM is displayed and the current output percentage is shown 100 blackout lon Operations Manual Using the Buttons Each fader is equipped with two buttons beneath the potentiometer When used with submasters the bottom button is the bump key The top button can be used in two ways When pressed in conjunction with the bump button it will act as a Load button for that fader and c
129. 3 at 45 3 Color Palette 4 Enter parks color for channel 3 at color palette 4 Following are examples for clearing parked values while in the park display channel list Park Enter unparks channels in the list channel list At Enter unparks channels in the list Below are examples for parking addresses in the park display Address 5 At 5 0 Enter parks address 5 at 50 intensity Address 5 At Enter unparks address 5 Parked Channels Ang cen 9 45 25 AM 10 11 50 50 128 129 FL FL Address Value Channel Param Address Value Channel Param Address Value Channel Param 97 nter 112 2 ntens 300 98 tens 113 3 ntens 301 114 221 ntens 302 115 223 tens 303 116 li ntens 304 117 ntens 305 118 yy nten 306 120 121 122 123 124 155 Parked channels Parked addresses Using Park 225 226 lon Operations Manual Chapter 19 Creating and Using Effects Effects are a method within lon to provide dynamic repetitive action to channels This chapter explains the different types of effects and how to use them This chapter contains the following sections PIPOUL ERG ves bru deep REA xu ue HALANG 228 The Effect List 222 2 20 020 ce beeen ee oes 228 Effect Status Display 233 S ED EHEC fic alaga das ale Rare Pa NA GAD SAP AG 234 Absolute Effects 237 Relative Effects 2
130. 39 Program a New Relative Effect 241 Apply an Existing Effect 242 Effects on Submasters 243 KO Creating and Using Effects About Effects Effects are manual control functions that can be applied to a channel parameter and then included in cues or submasters Cues can contain both standard transitions for some channels and parameters and effects for the same or other channels and parameters A single channel parameter cannot have more than one effect applied at any time However a channel may have one effect running on one parameter and another effect running on a different parameter Effects have user defined properties and attributes which are applied to the effects whenever they are used in cues Effects also have cue level overrides which allow you to use an effect in multiple locations and modify its size shape or rate in individual cues Within lon effects are broken up into three fundamental behavior types Step Absolute and Relative effects The Effect List At any time you may press Effect Effect to view the effect list Any recorded effects will be displayed here The effect list is a blind view and any changes made in this view are automatically stored a record command is not required Notice that there are effects existing in this list prior to any being recorded Effects 901 916 are preprogrammed relative effects that are automat
131. 52 Printing a Show File 53 Saving the Current Show File 55 Using Save As 55 Importing Show Files 56 Exporting a Show File 56 Deleting a File cee AN ee ved eee sara 57 ES Managing Show Files 47 Create a New Show File To create a new show file navigate within the browser to File gt New gt and press Select You will be prompted for confirmation that you want to create a new show Press OK to confirm or Cancel to discontinue the operation Patch 1to1 will be selected by default If you wish to not have a 1 to 1 patch deselect the Patch 1to1 button and click Ok A new show created with Patch 1to1 selected will have a 1 to 1 patch and 1 to 1 channel to sub assignment Show File Names Names of show files may appear in the browser list in normal text or in bold text Files in normal text indicate that there is only one show file stored by that name Bold show names indicate that there are several versions of the show file stored under that name the bold one being the most recent To access the most recent show file simply select the bold name You may right arrow gt from the bold name to expand a list of previous versions beneath it in the browser Select the desired show from the expanded list Open an Existing Show File To open an existing lon show file
132. 79 Keywords Query is a feature available in Eos but not in lon Since show files are compatable between the two consoles in lon you can assign keywords to channels that can be queried when the show file is loaded onto an Eos If you plan on being able to query channels in Eos based on a keyword association the keyword must be defined in patch To enter a keyword for a channel Step 1 Press Displays to the right of the LCD Step 2 Press the Patch softkey Step 3 Press Database Step 4 Select a channel or range of channels in the command line Step 5 Click one of the Text 1 4 buttons in the CIA to specify which keyword you are entering A list of previously defined keywords will be posted Select from these or press New Keyword A virtual alohanumeric keyboard will appear Step 6 Type the keyword or words you wish to use You may use either the virtual or external keyboard Step 7 When finished press Enter Once keywords have been created they will appear in the keyword section of the CIA when a query is performed in Eos Deleting Channels It is possible to delete channels in patch Deleting channels is different from unpatching in that deleted channels cannot be manipulated or have parameter data stored for them When deleted the channel numbers will still be visible in the live blind display but the channel outline containing the parameters and level information will be removed from the display For
133. Assert AllFade Mark and Preheat Block You can apply a block to a cue a cue part to any channel or group of channels or parameter or group of parameters within a cue Block is an editing function it has no impact on how the data is played back At a cue level A cue level block causes all tracked values in the cue to be treated as move instructions for editing purposes which prohibits any data changes from tracking into the cue Parameters that are not included in the cue are not impacted by the block instruction Blocks do not protect a cue channel or parameter from being modified by a range edit nor are they protected from a trace instruction see Using Trace page 170 It is assumed that if you use the trace instruction then you really want the initial value to change A block will stop the trace from moving any further backwards through the cue list lon also supports an auto block function Auto block can protect your cue data from unwanted changes For example in cue 5 you set channel 1 to 50 It is stored as a move instruction Then you later go back to an earlier cue and set channel 1 to 50 and it tracks forward to cue 5 Channel 1 will be auto blocked in cue 5 Even though it is now at the same value as the previous cue the original concept of a move instruction is maintained Blocks that you have applied will display parameter data in white Auto blocks are displayed in white wit
134. E LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION II FOR CONSUMERS WITH RESIDENCE IN A MEMBER COUNTRY OF THE EUROPEAN UNION A TO DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM ETC S NEGLIGENCE B TO THE VIOLATION OF ESSENTIAL CONTRACTUAL DUTIES BY ETC AND C TO DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ETC S GROSS NEGLIGENT OR WILLFUL BEHAVIOR SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 9 Export Administration The Software including technical data are subject to U S export control laws including without limitation the U S Export Administration Act and its associated regulations and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries User shall not directly or indirectly export or re export the Software or the direct product thereof without first obtaining ETC s written approval User agrees to comply with all regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export re export or import the Software The Software may not be downloaded or otherwise exported or re exported i into or to any country to which the U S has embargoed goods or to a national or resident thereof or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons List or iii to any country facing U S sanctions as listed by the U S Treasury Department s Office of Foreign Assets Control
135. Enter sets submaster 5 to 70 Load Q allows you to load a cue into the pending file for the master playback fader pair only Load Q 5 Enter Loads cue 5 of the master playback fader to the pending file for that fader Pressing Go will execute this cue Go and Stop Bk are duplicates of the Go and Stop Back buttons for the Eos lon master fader pair Macro allows you to execute a macro Macro 3 Enter Goto Q allows you to jump to any cue in the show Goto Q 6 Enter plays back cue 6 for the master playback fader pair Goto Q 4 2 Enter plays back cue 2 from cue list 4 To play back cues from any other list than the one loaded to the master playback fader pair requires you to specify the cue list in the command line The left thumbwheel controls intensity of a selected submaster The right thumbwheel acts as next or last for the most recently selected cue list LE Remote Control 331 332 Patch Mode In patch mode the LCD displays the channel address and type for the currently selected channel s Softkeys The following softkeys are available in patch mode e Address A B Fixture Controls shown as FixCtrl Address allows you to change the address of the selected channel 1 Address 1 Enter addresses channel 1 to output 1 A and B are used for patching dimmer doublers 9 7 Th 1 0 2 Address 1 B Enter patches channe
136. Enter since curve 901 is a pre established curve this command will return curve 901 to its default state thereby removing any edits to it Delete Enter deletes the currently selected curve EE Storing and Using Curves 275 276 lon Operations Manual Chapter 24 Using Show Control lon supports MIDI Show Control MIDI and SMPTE Time Code Serial RS 232 commands Analog Inputs and Relay Outputs and Real Time Clock RTC This chapter contains the following sections About Show Control Events Time Code Analog Inputs and Relay Outputs MIDI Show Control Serial RS 232 EZ Using Show Control Real Time Clock RTC 277 About Show Control The lon Show Control system is made up of MIDI Show Control Serial RS 232 Time Code MIDI or SMPTE Analog Inputs and Relay Outputs and Real Time Clock RTC MIDI Show Control and Serial require minimal setup from lon and will be discussed at the end of this chapter Time Code Analog Inputs and RTC require the use of the Show Control Display which is accessed by pressing Displays gt Record Target Lists gt Show Control Display The Show Control Display allows for the creation of event lists Setup lon provides user definable settings for show control which can be accessed by pressing Displays gt Setup gt Show gt Show Control For more information see Show Control page 98 Events An event consists of
137. Enter When the cue is stored the system will automatically create a cue 2 and mark the lights to it If a light is marked and that mark is later broken for example being used by a move instruction stored in the mark range lon will attempt to repair the mark This is done by automarking in the cue previous to intensity fading up if possible This will be indicated in the cue list by a in the cue immediately proceeding the R cue Mark Earliest The Earliest command can be used with Mark to mark the channel into the cue after the last intensity moved from a nonzero level to 0 The mark is stored and behaves exactly as if you had typed the cue number instead of Earliest This works in blind or in live if you record afterwards For Example Cue 2 moves the intensity for channel 1 to 0 Cue 3 thru 4 have no intensity for channel 1 and Cue 5 has the intensity move to full From Cue 5 1 Mark Earliest Enter This will work the same as 1 Mark Cue 2 Enter and will mark from cue 2 to cue 5 Note Mark Earliest will mark through block cues or blocked intensity moves of 0 until it finds the earliest intensity move to O If the cue immediately before the cue being marked is the earliest intensity move to O it will mark in that cue EE Using Mark 179 180 Mark Symbols The symbols that appear in the Mark flag include s Dia tee a attend EI AutoMark is disabled EM Lc nr Indicates a manual re
138. First press Go and while the fade is in progress drop the fader to zero and the raise the fader at the desired rate Once it is raised fully the fade will complete and control will be returned to the buttons lon Operations Manual Index Symbols v m 122 YG d ste ak ta KA aute BB a stadi Rcs 122 Numerics 1 to 1 patch 60 A about about 2 2 oi nee mens 246 channel sursaut 249 250 CUBL Sr ated qur e masa esie Eat 253 palettes 253 DIeselS ss Na het eae uS 253 system 247 absolute data with palettes 144 absolute effects 237 active cue list changing 190 Address iM IV ed es ee BS 127 address parkingin live 224 allfade 24 2 ane ia pated 163 190 analog inputs 283 assert andload 218 at channel level 189 at cue level 189 cue list 218 flags e nai Flee Dee 163 using with cue lists 189 assign Virtual faders 214 AtEntery 22 28 su eat ate dun 165 AutoMark 176 allowing live moves 176 timing oem mets 176 B back key 215 backup 307 313 backup console 307 client paa aaa aaa haaha hay 307 master iil Baha Nah ee 307 offline console 307 primary 307 backup co
139. Focus System Macros Curves Advanced Palette Settings NS Selected Show Components As you specify components they are added to a table in the CIA In the table fields with a dark background may be edited fields with a light gray background do not apply to that component For each component in the list you can specify the desired range by pressing the proper area in the table and entering numbers from the keypad The columns in the table are e List The list you are taking data from such as a cue list List Target The list you are adding the data to e Start The first in a range of components such as a range of cues End The last in a range of components Target The desired location of the components in the new show file for ranges this will be the location in the new show of the first component in the range the others will follow in order lon Operations Manual To merge only partial components Step 1 From the browser navigate to the desired show file see Open the desired location page 48 Step 2 When the merge show load screen appears press the Advanced button The partial components selection screen will appear in the CIA Step 3 Select the show components that you wish to merge by pressing on their respective buttons on the left side of the CIA The components will appear in the list to the right as you select them Step 4 Press any fields for which you want to enter specific numbers T
140. INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE The End Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Copyright c 2001 2002 Expat maintainers Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE
141. ION Lighting Control Console Operations Manual Version 1 7 Copyright 2009 Electronic Theatre Controls Inc All Rights reserved Product information and specifications subject to change Part Number 4310M1210 1 7 0 Rev A Released 2009 07 ETC Eos lon Emphasis Expression Insight Imagine Focus Express Unison Obsession ll ETCNet2 EDMX Revolution and Sensort are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Electronic Theatre Controls Inc in the United States and other countries ETC permits the reproduction of materials in this manual only for non commercial purposes All other rights are reserved by ETC Table of Contents Introduction 1 Using this Manual 2 Register Your lon 2 3 Help from ETC Technical Services 3 Important Concepts 4 Channel Fixture 4 Output es enana ag eta AA eee dae eile aed 4 Record Target 4 Move Instruction 4 Syntax SUCIS 3 su so nec um e PALAGE AN end enane 4 Parameters and Parameter Categories 5 Tracking vs Cue Only 5 Move Fade occas ae Re VERA Li che een a saa EAR E E 6 Block vs Assert 6 Live and Blind 2 224
142. Local Drive FE X Local Drive Network Path Network Path 10 101 90 101 ShowArchive Se eal Network Path Type Eos Network Path Type m Network Path Type Other Md ee ps ey Provider E Username Password m Shared Folders Shared Folders allows you to see if any folders are currently being shared by the console You can select the folder and click Don t Share if you no longer want to share the folder By selecting Don t Share here you will also uncheck the box for Share Show Archive in the General tab Log Off This will log off the current user EY Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell 303 304 Face Panel Test Face Panel Test provides a way to verify the functional state of all of the keys encoders and sliders on the lon console The screens are very straightforward For field diagnostics you shouldn t need more than the sections of lon Keyboard Press move every key and verify that those events register on the diagnostic test screen HH_ConsoleTester ajoj xi GR ever Hnd Nat Used pang a Lec Fa Hotoszed Foden 4250836 REVA 14 Snap Dome Button Overiay Rev 1 Teo Left m 24142625000000 4280836MAEVA 14 Snap Dome Button Overy Rev A 2 Bottom Lent See 27 EVS_100MM_MOTORIZED_FADER_REVE d c28 1 0000001 425086617kEVA 39 BOS 1x5 Button Plug in Module 3 Bottom fight a1730 500000088 4 S54618REVB 26 EOS Keyboard
143. OLLOWING CAREFULLY BEFORE OPERATING INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE BY OPERATING INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE YOU WILL BE DEEMED TO HAVE ACCEPTED AND AGREED TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED AND COPYRIGHTED NOT SOLD Subject to the following terms and conditions Electronic Theatre Controls Inc ETC grants to you User a non exclusive license to use the Software 1 Grant of License This is a worldwide royalty free non exclusive license granted to User subject to and in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement ETC intends to provide but does not guarantee updates or upgrades of the Software ETC will provide maintenance and support relating to the Software The Software may not be transferred sold assigned leased rented sublicensed or otherwise conveyed in whole or in part by User to any third party without ETC s prior written consent You have acquired a device Device which includes software licensed by ETC from one or more software licensors The Software is licensed not sold You may use the Software only on the Device 2 ETC s Software Rights The Software is a proprietary product of ETC and is protected under all applicable copyright laws and international treaties Except for the limited license granted herein all right title and interest to and in the Software remains forever with ETC 3 Additional Restrictions User may not modify distribute rent lease
144. Operations Manual Chapter 17 Cue Playback lon has many features that aid in cue playback The playback section is located on the left side of the console and includes the master fader pair grandmaster load button and the fader control button Virtual faders see Slider Module page 30 and the fader wings can also be used in playback This chapter contains the following sections Introduction to Playback e Selected Cue Out of Sequence Cues Assigning Faders Changing Fader Pages e Playback Fader Controls Cue Playback 209 210 Introduction to Playback Cues may be played back using the master playback fader pair While any cue list can be loaded to these faders the first cue list you record to will automatically load to the master fader pair The master playback fader pair is located to the left of the control keypad The master is a split cross fader pair The two buttons beneath the master fader pair are Go and Stop Back The Load button is located directly above the fader pair and the area of the LCD above it corresponds as well displaying the current cue and list active on the master fader Playback Controls Load button Master fader pair lon Operations Manual Selected Cue The selected cue is always indicated just above the CIA The selected cue and all of its attributes are displayed near the bottom of the live blind display and on the playback status display Live Bl
145. P T di First Address 10 10 101 0 Number of addresses Net3 Services Settings These are settings for the network services that may be running on your lon console If you are unable to enable them they are not currently installed on this console Network Adapter This reports if the network adapter is Online configured connected to a network and operational It reports as Offline if any one of the above conditions is not true Protocols This is for selecting which protocols the console will output and which ones are included in the default ACN Priority This sets the control priority for ACN data from this console The valid range for this setting is 1 lowest to 200 highest This is the reverse of ETCNet2 ETCNet2 Priority This sets the control priority for ETCNet2 data from this console The valid range for this setting is 20 lowest to 1 highest This is the reverse of ACN Local DMX This enables DMX output from the local ports on an lon console Avab UDP This sets the subnet for Avab UDP data from this console The valid range for this setting is 0 9 ArtNet This sets the subnet for ArtNet data from this console The valid range for this setting is 0 15 Enable Output in Offline Mode Checking this box allows for output in offline mode for use with a visualization program EY Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell 299 Net3 Settings All settings in this section require a reb
146. P LTP The HTP LTP softkey is a toggle state between LTP latest takes precedence and HTP highest takes precedence For more information on HTP LTP see HTP vs LTP page 7 All parameters other than intensity are LTP Intensity by default is also LTP Cue lists can be set with an HTP intensity override When a cue list is set to HTP intensity values provided by that cue list will override the LTP value of which there can be only one provided the HTP instruction is higher than the LTP value When a cue from an HTP cue list is executed lon determines if the intensity value when the cue is complete will be higher than the current setting If so the intensity will begin to fade from its current value to the required value in the incoming cue using the cue s upfade time Note that this behavior is relevant only to cues If an HTP cue is going to provide a higher level than a submaster value lon will wait until the value is matched before assuming control of the intensity The following example illustrates the use of the HTP LTP softkey in the cue list index Cue 1 LTP HTP Enter toggles the selected cue list between HTP LTP behavior Independent The Independent softkey sets a cue list to independent Any channel parameters currently under the control of an independent playback cannot be changed by other non independent playbacks or submasters Independent status is equally shared between other independent cue lists a
147. Palette 3 selects channel 2 and sneaks it to intensity palette 3 in 2 seconds Flip The Flip feature is used to invert the pan and tilt values of selected channels to achieve the same focus position from the opposite yoke position This allows you to correctly focus a fixture that may be at the end of its pan or tilt range or to correct a fade that may be moving in an undesired direction Flip is a softkey in the encoder LCD To access it press and hold either the Pan or Tilt encoder then press the corresponding softkey The following example illustrates the use of Flip channel list Flip lon Operations Manual Channel Check Channel check allows you to quickly step through all of your patched channels This is useful for checking lamps or checking focus Note Parked dimmers will not be affected by the channel check feature The following examples illustrates the how to use the channel check feature 1 at 7 s05 Channel Check Enter brings channel 1 to 70 intensity Next channel 1 returns to its background state and channel 2 is set to 70 intensity Next channel 2 returns to its background state and channel 3 is set to 70 intensity For Example If the command line currently reads e 1 at 5 0 Enter You may still place channel 1 in channel check mode even though the command line is terminated Press e Channel Check Enter Use Next or Last to progress thr
148. Reference Labels 100 Channel Display Face Panel Settings Disabled Disabled Face Panel Group Chans 8y5 Cmd Line on PSD Keypad Enabled Disabled PDF File Settings High Contrast Display This button toggles the setting between Enabled and Disabled When enabled high contrast brightens the cue numbers and channel numbers in displays and also brightens the magenta used to show tracked values The default setting for this is Disabled Show Reference Labels This button toggles the setting between Enabled and Disabled When enabled referenced record targets such as presets or palettes with labels will have their labels displayed in the live blind display rather than their target type and number Label can be used to toggle between views Reference labels The default setting for this is Disabled Group Chans By 5 You can turn off on the grouping of channels in groups of 5 in the live summary view from this field The default for this setting is Enabled User Id You can Change the User ID for the console by selecting this button and entering a number from the keypad For more information on User ID see About User ID page 288 100 Channel Display This setting can be used to display 100 channels at a time in the live summary view The default for this setting is Disabled Cmd Line on PSD This setting can be used to display an optional command line on the Playbac
149. SE a DE DUE ch ae er 56 ASGIL A ases ethos Ss many Ro 56 Fast Focus Pro 56 show file 56 F facepanel locking anga a ea ak ee 28 fader control hardkey 215 fader pages 214 faders assigning 214 auto playback enabled 214 manually 214 changing pages 214 configuration in setup 96 fader control hardkey 215 intensity master 194 playback 209 playback controls 215 220 YON ANA DA d EE 215 stop back 215 proportional 194 rate override 220 release oaan cce 219 slider module 30 turning off 219 Virtual a 214 assigning 214 virtual See Slider module 30 file create new show 48 filters about LE urnes 183 partial filters 185 record filters 184 storing data with 186 removing 185 using with palettes 141 fixture creator 81 Opening aaa 81 update library 85 fixture library updating in show file 85 flags snc EE 162 allfade euo no Aka 163 block n ea een ga 162 channels parameters 162 CLOS fates tears aa 162 marks folc bb Nba malana 163 flaShize NA amid NA e Na 128 flexichannel description 40 parti
150. These fields include Notes and Text 1 through Text 4 Clicking on Text 1 through Text 4 will open up a display for selection of keywords It will display keywords that were already created as well as showing an option for creating new keywords Clicking on New Keyword will display an alphanumeric keyboard for entering in a new keyword 1 015848 Cost P1 Orc 14 Orasts19 Ie i LER Orci 78 Orc 312 1 07586 Orast 19 Le 1e 15 es 24 Orast 79 Orc 13 a amama IE S Orasts12 Le 12 1274 Orat 71 Orc 6 Orat 39 Orc 35 aaa 1 ACCRA y Croate 13 Orotan Groste22 Orc 1774 Grant Orc 36 amm mn camcn cm c comma ns Text Text fields are used to provide up to four keywords see Keywords page 80 about any channel or group of channels These fields can be anything that you think is important about a channel such as its location FOH an attribute of it wash spot or other characteristics of the channel such as gel R80 You may use the virtual PC keyboard in the CIA or an external keyboard to provide up to 30 characters of key words about the device 5 Database Text 1 lt FOH right Enter adds text to channel 5 Notes Provides you the ability to attach a text note to a channel or group of channels Select the Notes button on the CIA to display the virtual PC keyboard You may type a label or any length of note regarding your channel in
151. a but not a list Go When accompanying a MIDI Go command data for the following fields will result in the following effects Cue Data List Data Field Field Effect Cue List Runs the specified cue in the specified cue list Cue Runs the specified cue in the default cue list List Runs the next cue in the specified list Runs the next cue in the default cue list Stop When accompanying a MIDI Stop command data for the following fields will result in the following effects Cue Data List Data Field Field Effect Cue List Stops the specified cue amp list if running Cue Stops the running cue from the default cue list List Stops the current cue from the specified list Stops all cues Resume When accompanying a MIDI Resume command data for the following fields will result in the following effects Cue Data List Data Field Field Effect Cue List Resumes the specified cue amp list if stopped Cue Resumes the specified cue in the default cue list List Resumes the current cue in the specified list Resumes all stopped cues 284 lon Operations Manual Set The Set command allows MSC to control potentiometers using both a numeric control number which specifies the potentiometer and a data field which controls the level 0 100 Control values are as follows Control Value Indication 1 127 Submaster 1 127 128 Primary playback in 129 Primary playback out 510 Grandmaster Accompanying any of thes
152. a color scroller and a gobo changer may be patched to a single channel This is referred to as a compound channel lon also allows you to create and edit the patch from the encoders and LCD For details on this method see Patch Channels from the Encoder LCD page 73 When you open a new show file lon gives you the option of creating a 1 to 1 patch This means that the patch will automatically have channel 1 patched to output 1 channel 2 to output 2 and so on up to the maximum channel count of your console Clearing the Patch You can clear the patch entirely by accessing the clear functions from the browser Select Clear from the main browser menu The clear functions window will open in the CIA Clear MIDI Reset System Y Time Code Clear SMPTE Clear Show Time Code Reset Show Clear Patch Defaults Reset Desk Defaults Reset Patch Reset Subs 1 Clear Targets tol To clear the patch click Clear Patch A confirmation is required before the patch will be cleared To exit the clear functions screen without clearing press the Displays key at any time or select a clear button and then select Cancel from the confirmation screen lon Operations Manual Displays To begin patching your show you must first open the patch display To open the patch display Step 1 Press the Displays button Step 2 Select the Patch softkey on the lon LCD screen The patch display will open on the primary display and th
153. a ee wets 88 macro using editor display 268 new fixture 82 palette 139 preset 2 marre ele A 130 submaster 256 cue selected the 211 in blind 211 in live 211 cue level timing Setting c en a 155 cue list index 192 teditl 14b ebbe eed n 194 HTP LTPY EREA 193 independent 193 move to 194 Solo Mode 194 opening 192 cue lists assert amp load 218 active list changing the 190 attributes 193 new recording to using Record Only 188 using Record 188 recording to new 188 using assert 189 Cue Only mode deleting cues in 174 cue playback 209 cue settings lon Operations Manual in Setup 95 cues At Enter 165 ABOUT 2 69 eee aya 150 applying curves to 275 asserting 189 attributes 159 clearing 161 follow hang 159 label 161 link loop 160 Fate SR 161 basic programming 150 olola ur sss lee RA 162 cue list index 192 opening 192 deleting aaa 174 in Cue Only mode 174 in Track mode
154. a high gt o B frequency HF link for bi directional communication with a og E D connected console During operation the system status can Om 2 be viewed on the LCD of the remote OO Gills Ip Note This appendix covers only RFR operation with the Eos Family control system For information on using the RFR with Congo or Congo jr consoles see the Congo Congo jr User Manual or the Net3 Radio Focus Remote Setup Guide for more information 324 Handheld Remote The RFR handheld unit features 24 backlit buttons and two push button thumb wheels one on either side for scrolling to desired targets and selecting them for interaction The top side of the remote has an on off power switch a high frequency antenna and a USB mini b port The USB mini b connection is used to supply power for the internal rechargeable NiMH battery cell using the provided power supply 717 Gl amp lon Operations Manual Base Station Receiver The receiver includes a USB type B connector and an Ethernet connector IEEE 802 3af on the front of the unit for connection to the console USB or to a switch in your Net3 network USB When the base station is connected directly to a console by USB type B the RFR is powered by and controls only the console the base station is connected to ETC supplies a 1 8m 6 ft USB cable for bas
155. a time or address and an action An event plays back or fires when the clock reaches or passes the specified event time or an input is seen on an address Multiple events can be fired at the same time lon supports three event actions run a cue control a submaster and fire a macro Cues can be run from any cue list and will play on their assigned fader Submasters can be bumped turned on or turned off Submasters do not have to be assigned to a fader Macros execute without interaction with the command line If another macro is fired before the first macro completes the first macro will finish its action before the second is started Internal vs External Time The lon Show Control system makes use of two timing sources internal and external The different protocols use internal and external clocks in different ways Time Code MIDI or SMPTE normally requires timing information from an input source like a show control gateway lon can receive MIDI Time code via the MIDI input on the rear of the console This timing source is referred to as external time since it is coming from a source external to lon If the external time source stops for any reason each Time Code event list within lon has an internal timing source which will assume control if enabled This internal timing source requires three pieces of information to determine how to generate its timing first time last time and frame rate When the internal clock reaches
156. able at this time Setup 99 Desk This setup softkey accesses settings for the user identified on the associated lon device Changing these settings does not impact other lon controllers on the network assigned a different user ID Record Defaults This screen enables you to change general record defaults as well as change the default parameter category times associated with certain actions Back Go to Cue and Assert Record is Record Defaults Defaults Settings 7 Auto Playback Manual Fader Wing Enabled Config Control Track Face Panel A Tracking Mode Settings Record Confirm Face Panel Enabled Keypad Delete Confirm Displays Enabled PDF File Settings To change the setting for any of these fields click the field in the CIA to activate it If the field requires data enter it from the keypad If the field is a toggle state one click of the button will switch the field to its other state Auto Playback When enabled this feature automatically plays back cues and submasters as they are stored and releases manual control For submasters to automatically play back the slider must be at full This field is a toggle state between Enabled and Disabled When auto playback is Disabled all manual levels are maintained and cues must be loaded and executed on playbacks The default is Enabled Track This field allows you to switch between tracking and cue only modes see Tracking vs Cue Only page
157. addresses to other devices Configure the monitors Set the date time time zone and location Change the system language or the alphanumeric keyboard layout Choose to boot the console in Primary Client Backup or Offline mode Perform a simple button and encoder response test Update software Save log files Deep clear the system Backup show files Using the file manager EY Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell 293 Eos Configuration Utility Reference During the boot process a countdown timer will appear near the lon logo There are two ways that you can force the console to boot into the utility instead of the main console application You can either click with a mouse the countdown timer itself or you can hold down e o and s at the same time on a connected alphanumeric keyboard You have 5 seconds to do either one if you want to go directly to the configuration utility Otherwise you can always enter the ECU from the lon application by choosing Browser gt Exit lon Starting Screen Clicking Primary will lon Welcome Screen Eos Configuration Utility entry point start the console in Primary mode Clicking Backup will assign this console as a backup to a processor in Primary mode gt Clicking Client assigns this console as a client Clicking Settings will take you to the settings and screens of the Eos Configuration Utility ECU described below Clicking Offline wil
158. aders you would like to add When no faders are under rate control pressing Rate collects the master fader for rate override Use the rate encoder to adjust the rate dynamically The default is 100 which is real time example 5 seconds 5 seconds Decrease the percentage to slow the cue down Setting the rate to 0 will stop the cue Increase the percentage to speed up the event Following are some examples of rate A 50 decrease rate applied to a 5 second event will play the cue in 10 seconds A 200 increase rate applied to a 5 second event will play the cue in 2 5 seconds The top rate adjustment is 2000 All timing values associated with a cue including any follow or hang times are affected by the rate modification proportionally If a cue is complete any rate adjustment applied affects the cue in the pending file When that cue is subsequently activated the adjusted rate is used to direct timing Press Rate again to rate control off and reset to 100 lon Operations Manual Chapter 18 Using Park This chapter describes using park functions from both the live and park display This chapter contains the following sections Park Display seine peed deve ee va leur TA 222 Parked Values in Live 223 e Scaled Parked Values in Live 224 Park Values from the Park Display 225 KO Using Park 221 Using Park The park instruction allo
159. ain control of channels from other cue lists and fade other channels from that cue list out Note Channels with tracked values in the associated cue will not fade out in response to an allfade These tracked values are part of the associated cue and therefore will be played back 190 To assign an allfade to a cue Record Cue n m Allfade Enter records cue n m as an allfade cue thereby forcing any channels not in the cue to fade to zero on playback Like many other cue attributes allfade is a toggle state To remove the allfade flag specify the cue and press Allfade Enter Changing the Active Cue List The active cue list will be displayed in detail on the playback status display This view is changed by the following actions Recalling another cue list in the command line Cue 3 Enter Recording a cue to another cue list Record Cue 3 8 Enter Playing back a cue from the fader of another cue list press Go for the associated fader lon Operations Manual Using Go To Cue with Multiple Cue Lists Go To Cue defaults to the currently selected cue list Go to Cue is a live function It can not be used to change cues in blind Go to Cue instructions can be executed from any operating mode without returning to live By default a Go to Cue instruction is an out of sequence cue and will follow the rules of such see Out of Sequence Cues page 212 For exa
160. ained even when the cue has completed If a pending cue has any manual control properties you may either preset the fader to zero or if it is a virtual fader the console will automatically set the fader to zero when the Go button is pressed The master fader pair must be manually set Manual intensity override is not possible if there is any manual timing in the cue as the potentiometer is already occupied with that control Manual Override Manual override allows the potentiometer of the associated fader to control all parameters in a transition state on that fader When Fader Controls Man Override amp Load are pressed all activity on that fader is frozen The potentiometer is used to manually complete the cue transition for all parameters If the fader is operating in a paired mode the left fader controls the intensity upfade and all non intensity parameters while the right fader controls all intensity downfade actions Manual control override automatically releases when the cue is complete A group of faders can be collected for manual override by pressing or clicking Man Override amp Load continue adding faders by clicking the associated Load buttons Cue Playback 217 Using Assert Playback Button Use Assert amp Load for the associated fader to re run the active cue in that fader following the same rules as Go To Cue Assert can be used to regain control of all cue contents apply a newly set indep
161. al Control 195 196 Using Copy To Copy To allows you to copy all data from one channel to another either within the current working mode or to a different record target Copy To works much like Recall From but in the opposite direction Copy To forces data fo a channel from the selected channel whereas Recall From pulls it from a channel to the selected channel By using the IFCB category buttons or parameter buttons you may copy subsets of channel data Entire cues cue ranges and cue lists can be copied to other locations To only copy over intensity levels use the Only Levels softkey When referenced data is copied if the copy target also has data in the reference that is being copied the target will be placed in that reference such as CP 1 at its stored values If the copy target is not included in the reference absolute data will be copied to the target and not the reference Below are some examples of copy commands from record targets This command is very versatile and the following list is far from exhaustive 2 Copy To Cue 5 Enter copies all information for channel 2 to cue 5 2 Time Copy To Cue 5 Enter Copies just the timing data for all parameters of channel 2 to cue 5 e 2 Focus 8Copy To Cue 5 Enter Copies all parameter data for channel 2 other than focus to cue 5 Group 3 Copy To Preset 6 Enter copies current information for gro
162. alter how the data is displayed see Using Format page 43 When in Live the data displayed represents the data being sent from the console at that moment In other words the parameter data that is live on stage When you edit data in live those changes will become active and visible on stage as soon as the command line is terminated When in Blind the data displayed represents data from the record target you choose to view cues presets palettes and so on When you edit data in Blind changes will not automatically appear on stage since the data you are modifying is not live This is true even if the record target you are modifying is active on stage It is possible to play a cue in Live then switch to Blind and edit that cue in blind without affecting levels on stage Edits in Blind do not require a Record command to be stored They are considered stored when the command line is terminated Any display that is not the Live display is considered Blind and the Blind LED will be illuminated For example if you open patch the blue LED on Blind will be lit to show that you are in a Blind display HTP vs LTP HTP Highest Takes Precedence and LTP Latest Takes Precedence are terms used to define the output of a channel parameter that is receiving data from multiple sources In HTP the highest level of all sources will be executed In LTP the most recent level received will be executed Cue lists and submasters can operate a
163. alues of the current stage state to sub 5 Record Only Sub 5 Label xxxx Enter as above with a label Record Sub 5 Mode Enter as above and alters mode between inhibitive or additive Other submaster properties HTP LTP Exclusive and so on can be assigned in this way as well You can also record selected channel data to submasters as well See below Channel List Record Sub 5 Enter records all data for the channel list to sub 5 Channel List Record Only Sub 5 Enter records manual data for the channel list to sub 5 If the fader is at full when the submaster is stored you can use the Rem Dim command to automatically release the content to the submaster lon Operations Manual Submaster Displays In the display window of any programmed submaster you will see the following Submaster number Submaster label if any Independent flag if any Master flag I M if any Current setting Additive vs Inhibitive You may define your submaster as additive contributes to the live output or inhibitive limits live output lon defaults to submasters being additive To toggle a submaster between additive inhibitive or effectsub Sub 7 Mode Enter Additive submasters are indicated by a green LED or a green outlined fader icon in the fader window Inhibitive submasters display these indicators in red Channels mastered by an inhibitive submaster a
164. ample C etc nodesbin lon Operations Manual lon IP Settings These are the settings that determine the method to get an IP address and or the actual IP address information that lon uses for network communication Enable DHCP If DHCP is selected the In use IP ed the address information is displayed Clicking in the enable box will set lon to get its IP address dynamically from a DHCP server While the console is starting it will ask for an IP address from a DHCP server If one responds it will use the assigned IP address If no DHCP server is available lon will default to a self generated link local IP address in the range of 169 254 x y The IP address used by lon in this configuration may change dynamically as needed A change should typically only occur when there are changes to the network configuration or to resolve an IP address conflict Enabling or disabling the DHCP setting will require you to reboot lon for the new setting to take affect Note You cannot set lon to receive an IP address via DHCP and act as a DHCP server at the same time It can either send dynamic addresses or receive them but not both at the same time IP Address If DHCP is disabled you set the lon IP address here This is a static IP address and will remain set until changed by a user lon defaults to an IP address of 10 101 100 101 If DHCP is enabled this field will display the IP address that is being used by the console wheth
165. an be used to load submasters When pressed individually it will act as a group select button for all channels in that submaster Pressing it in this instance is the same as entering Group Sub x on the command line For playbacks the bottom button acts as a Go button and the top button acts as a Stop Back button similar to the buttons beneath the master fader pair on lon When pressed together these buttons act as a Load button for that fader which can be used to load faders or to use any of the fader controls such as Release or Stop Effect Loading Faders To load a submaster or playback onto an unmapped fader specify the desired submaster or cue list on the command line and press Enter Then press both fader buttons which equals Load To load contents to a fader that is already mapped you may have to release the fader by pressing and holding Fader Controls pressing Release and then pressing both fader buttons Load To assign a fader as a Grandmaster you must do so in the fader configurator in setup Fader Wing Paging The fader wing is paged using the Fader Controls button on the lon console Fader pages are delineated in 20 fader increments If you advance to the next fader page your entire fader wing array will advance by a total of 20 faders For Example If you have a 1x20 and a 2x20 attached to lon the initial fader configuration will be faders 1 20 on the 1x20 and faders 21 60 on the 2x20
166. annel list A step effect is displayed in a chart with the following columns Step indicates the step numbers e Channels displays the channel s in the step Param displays the parameter if other than intensity controlled by the step Step Time time from triggering the associated step to triggering the next step In Time the length of time for the channels to fade to the on state Dwell Time the length of time the step remains in an on state Decay Time the length of time it takes for the channels to fade to the off state On State the parameter level in or referenced data to be used for the on state e Off State the parameter level in or referenced data to be used for the steps off state If you want the off state to be the background state from playback select the column and press At Enter All times are entered from the keypad in minutes and seconds tenths and hundredths Here is an example of a step effect when viewed in the CIA Type Scale A StepBased n a Cascade Cycle Time uration Cycle 6 25 Infinite Fade by Size Parameters Attributes Intens Forward Positive Step Time ON OFF Delete Insert Move To Step effect softkeys 234 lon Operations Manual Program a Step Effect Below is the process used to program the effect illustrated in the image above For Example To open the effects list press e Effect Effect Establish the num
167. annels Rem Dim Enter sets all non selected channels to zero Rem Dim clears the rem dim function and returns the stage to its previous state Pressing Rem Dim again releases all channels from rem dim mode and restores the stage to its previous state Using the Next and Last buttons releases the current selected channel from Remainder Dim mode and sets its intensity to zero while selecting the next or last channel and continuing Rem Dim operation For Example Assume channels 5 through 9 are selected and set at an intensity level of 5096 and channels 10 through 15 are selected and set at an intensity level of 7096 Select channel 9 and dim the remaining channels 9 Rem Dim Enter Channel 9 is set at an intensity level of 50 and all remaining channels are dimmed to zero Next Selecting Next changes the channel selection to channel 10 which is set at an intensity level of 70 the level set in the previous state and all remaining channels including channel 9 are dimmed to zero Rem Dim can be used in groups including the use of Next and Last buttons to progress through the channels within the selected group For Example Assume you have group 1 selected includes channels 1 through 10 with an intensity value of 5096 group 5 selected includes channels 11 through 20 with an intensity value of 7096 and group 7 selected includes channels 21 through 30 with an intensity value of 10096 e Group 1
168. anual values that were modifications to a palette or preset stored in the cue will be updated as absolute data in the cue The reference will be discarded 15 Advanced Manual Control 199 200 Using Capture Capture is a manual independent state Any captured channel parameter data will be unaffected by playback but will respond to manual control operations When channels are selected Capture Enter captures all parameters of those channels They will remain unavailable for playback or submaster override until they are released from the captured state Capture is a toggle state so to release parameters from a captured state press Capture Enter again For Example e 1 Thru 9 At Full Capture Enter A C is displayed next to the captured parameters intensity in the channel display The selected channels are now captured and are unavailable for playback or submaster instructions until they are released from capture You may also capture specific parameters of a channel using the parameter buttons in the CIA For Example 7 Focus Capture Enter If a group of channels are selected and some of those channels are captured and some are not the first press of Capture releases all channels from the captured state and the second press captures all manual settings for the selected channels Uncaptured channels remain at their current values until restored to previous values or a new instruction is pr
169. anual Control of Non intensity Parameters NPs 111 Parameter Display 111 Setting Parameters with the Keypad 112 Setting Non intensity Parameters with the Encoders 112 Using the Color Picker 118 HOME esata na KA eee a an het aes Gale Mik pa San oS ash ee 119 Select Last in ie etage DANG NBA etes ga sae alos 119 Multiple Intensity Channels 120 Lamp CONtrOlS 2 28 1540 an paella Wid pan eee pag 121 Using and 96 ep LR REDE eR idR 122 Channel Intensity 122 Non intensity Parameters 122 Remainder Dim ees 123 Highlight and Lowlight 125 iv lon Operations Manual ST OR aaa a a a a aa 126 Sees aces e ea a Ne ANNA NGA LAAN NAA de 126 Channel Check 127 Address at Level 127 Address Check estos veda ea daha ER RE SERA 127 IASI 24 cease cent UN eres andes he Gee de Sivan een kee a 128 Using Move To 128 Chapter 9 Storing and Using Presets 129 Storing Presets Live 130 Storing Presets Using Record 130 Storing Presets using Record Only 131 Recalling Presets
170. are not at their default values and it will record all information about those channels including parameters that are still at default Therefore presets can contain all of the same information as a cue but they have no timing information or cue attributes such as follow delay or cue overrides When recorded or rerecorded presets are automatically recalled on stage Presets may be individually labeled and each has an optional notes field Storing Presets Using Record The Record key will store all parameter data for channels that are not at their default values as modified by the filter settings in the CIA This will store all parameter data that is not default even if it is not manual data If filters are used only the parameters enabled by the filters are stored When you record data to a preset live the channels involved in that preset will then actually be in that preset The following methods can be used to store presets using Record Record Preset 5 Label name Enter Records all parameter data for all channels not at default and adds a label to preset 5 Record Preset Next Enter Records data to the next sequential preset number 2 Record Preset n Enter stores the preset withholding the group or channels specified Channel list Record Preset 6 Enter stores the preset but only the data for the channel list supplied Record amp Preset 8 stores the prese
171. asters 259 On Fader Wings 259 On the Slider Module 259 Updating a Submaster 260 Deleting a Submaster 260 Using Bump Button Timing With Submasters 261 Controlling Subfades Manually 261 Submaster List 262 Editing Submasters 262 Chapter 22 Storing and Using Macros 263 AboutiMactos i uu LA KN ae da memes i ees 264 Store a Macro from Live 264 Using the Learn key 264 Macro Editor Display 266 Create a New Macro from the Display 268 Edit an Existing Macro 269 Playa Macro ux REBATE NA apay NANANG Ana dox Res 270 Stop a Macros sedeo E etude AERA URP ER eR MAS 270 Delete a Macro 2 eet tutem ituros 270 Chapter 23 Storing and Using Curves 271 About CURVES S23 Naba st M dure POE Ac AA ALAB NG bng badi HAHA ol toe Bl dius 272 Creating and Editing Curves 273 Creating a Curve oraa eee aa 273 Editing Curves 274 Applying a Curve cs cega eee 275 To Channels In Patch 21244323 4 ua e 275 To Ges cipe Oed E Iis 275 Delete a CUNG sues
172. ation feature for the Level wheel This feature allows you to adjust the wheel s sensitivity to fast adjustments thereby temporarily overriding the number of ticks setting To adjust the level wheel acceleration use the virtual slider labeled LW Acc Factor The higher the slider setting the less sensitive the level wheel will be to acceleration The lower the setting the more sensitive it is When set low the faster you move the wheel the greater the increment covered by a revolution When movement stops the normal LW ticks will be reinstated Encoder Similar to LW Acc factor see above the encoder acceleration factor is used to adjust the acceleration of all encoders To adjust the encoder acceleration use the virtual slider labeled Encoder Acc Factor The higher the slider setting the less sensitive the level wheel will be to acceleration The lower the setting the more sensitive it is Encoder Tic Freq can be used to increase or decrease the number of ticks in a full turn of the encoder Face Panel Keypad This screen allows you to adjust the auto repeat settings delay and speed for the facepanel keypad as well as enable disable the blackout and grandmaster functions for your lon lon Operations Manual Displays This desk setting button gives you access to the lon display settings Record Ke Defaults Settings Manual Fader Wing High Contrast Displays d User ID Control Config Disabled 1 RFR Show
173. be a reference to a linear diagram which can be applied to any parameter You can redraw the linear diagram for an existing linear effect by pressing Edit 5 Clear and then tracing the diagram on the graph with the mouse or your finger Press Apply when you are done Linear ENSE Linear Cascade Fade by Size Fade by Size Infinite Tilt Forward Spread Even lon Operations Manual Define a Pattern Shape Shapes can be defined for any relative effect focus color or linear To define a shape press the Edit softkey beneath the pattern editor The softkeys will change to Apply Restore Clear Press Clear to clear the pattern Draw a new pattern using your finger or the mouse If you want to return to the original pattern press Restore before pressing apply When you have the proper pattern drawn press Apply The pattern will be applied to the effect Note If you delete a preprogrammed effect for example after making changes to it the effect will return to its default value Preprogrammed effects 901 916 cannot be deleted You can also copy effects to another effect location and modify them from there This will leave the original effect untouched Effect 904 Copy To 8 Enter Program a New Relative Effect To open the effects list press Effect Effect Establish the number of the effect by pressing Effect 4 Type Linear Focus Color Enter The effect will a
174. ber determined in step 3 Step 5 Use the Page keys to select the range and field you wish to edit Fields are e Min enter the minimum value 0 255 for the range slot you are defining Max enter the maximum value 0 255 for the range slot e User Min enter the value that will be displayed to users for example what will be displayed in the live summary view when the slot is at its minimum value Value can range from 9999 to 65535 User Max enter the value that will be displayed to users when the slot is at its maximum value Value can range from 9999 to 65535 Step 6 Click Label to add a label to any range slots These will appear in the encoder LCD when the related parameter is displayed for the new fixture Step 7 Click Done when you have finished editing the ranges Copying a Fixture It is possible to copy an existing fixture and then edit its parameters In the fixture editor there is a Copy button Pressing Copy when a library fixture is selected will create a copy of that fixture and will assign it a new name This new fixture can then be edited Importing a Custom Fixture You can import custom fixtures from an ASCII show file see mporting Show Files page 56 Update Library When a new library is installed on lon for example included in a software update changes in library data will not automatically update your show files This is to prevent library changes from affecting a functional show file
175. ber of the effect by pressing Effect 1 Enter The CIA will repaint with unpopulated fields for the new effect Assign the effect as step by pressing e Type Step based The effect will appear in the list and the CIA will repaint with the default entries for the effect and a step chart for the effect Define the number of steps by pressing e Step 1 Thru 6 The steps will populate the chart and will remain selected To make identical changes to all steps at once you may now use the page arrow keys to navigate the chart To make changes to only a single step specify only one step in the command line default values are drawn from the previous step After paging to the Channels column specify the channels for the effect e t thru 1 2 Enter Channels 1 12 will be broken up and distributed through the steps in the chart Choose the parameter you would like in the effect by pressing e Parameters Intensity Intensity is assumed unless another parameter is specified All steps are now intensity based Use the page arrows to access the Step time column Enter the desired step time 1 Page arrow to the Dwell Time In time is left at O column and enter a dwell time 1 Page arrow to the Decay Time column and enter a decay time RID Page arrow to the On State column and enter the on state percentage e 1 0 0 Page arrow to the Off State column or use the softkeys to go to the d
176. blished curve lon Operations Manual Applying a Curve To Channels In Patch Curves can be applied to any intensity parameter in patch Once added the curve number appears in the channel s Curve column of the patch display To Cues Displays Patch Attributes 1 Curve 9 0 1 Enter applies curve 901 to channel 1 intensity Displays Patch Attributes 2 Thru 8 Curve 2 Enter applies curve 2 to intensity for channels 2 thru 8 Displays Patch Attributes 1 Curve At Enter removes the curve from channel 1 Curves can also be applied to cues or cue parts in Live Blind This affects the percent completion of the cue or part by applying the curve s output level as the percent completion for all fade calculations Once added to a cue the curve number appears in the cue s Curve column of the cue list in the playback status display Cue 5 lt More SK gt Curve 4 Enter applies curve 4 to cue 5 Cue 4 6 Thru 9 lt More SK gt Curve 9 0 6 Enter applies curve 906 to cues 4 6 through 4 9 Cue 5 lt More SK gt Curve At Enter removes any curve from cue 5 Cue 8 Part 3 Curve 6 Enter applies curve 6 to part 3 of cue 8 Delete a Curve While in the curve display you can delete a curve in the following ways Delete Curve 3 Enter Enter deletes curve 3 from the list Delete Curve 9 0 1 Enter
177. but only the manual data for the channel list supplied Channel list Color Record Only Preset 7 Enter stores only manual color data for the specified channels to the preset KI Storing and Using Presets 131 132 Recalling Presets Channels must be selected when recalling a preset If a selected channel or parameter has no value in the preset it will stay in its current position If you want to recall all channels in a preset you can press Recall From Preset x Presets on direct selects will grey out if they are not applicable for the current channel selection If you only want to recall certain parameters of the preset select channels and enter the required parameters or those not required using the key in the command line see command examples below When a preset is recalled parameter changes will follow the manual timing defaults if enabled Any preset which is contributing to live output from lon is considered to be active You may recall presets using any of the following methods e Preset 8 recalls the associated preset data for selected channels Preset 2 Enter recalls preset 2 for selected channels Channel List Preset 2 Enter recalls the preset data for the channels in the selection list Channel List Color Preset 5 Enter recalls only the color data from the specified preset for the specified channels Color amp Preset 7 recalls just
178. ccess help press and hold Help and press any key to see the name of the key e adescription of what the key enables you to do e syntax examples for using the key if applicable Note Keyhelp is included on most tangible action buttons on your lon console This includes most softkeys and clickable buttons as well as the traditional keys on the keypad As with hard keys the press and hold Help action can be also used with softkeys and clickable buttons Online Eos lon User Forums You are encouraged to visit and participate in the ETC Eos lon User Forum accessible from the ETC web site www etcconnect com This gives you access to an online community of Eos and lon users where you can read about other users experiences suggestions and questions regarding the product as well as submit your own To register for the ETC Eos lon User Forum Step 1 Goto ETC s community web site www etcconnect com community An introduction page to the online community will open Step 2 You may register for the forum using the register link in the introduction or by clicking the join link in the upper right corner of the page Step 3 Follow the registration instructions provided by the community page lon Operations Manual Chapter 1 oystem Overview Inside this chapter you will find general descriptions of your lon control console how it fits into a network control system and the various areas of user interface
179. channels Select Manual selects all channels with manual data Select All selects all channels 8 Basic Manual Control 119 Multiple Intensity Channels When a multiple intensity channel is patched lon assigns it a master intensity The master intensity can be used to control the multiple intensities together The master intensity is handled in the same way as the intensity of a single intensity channel Levels can be set via the level wheel from the keypad and the encoders Master intensity can also be set via the parameter buttons in the CIA Intens controls the master intensity The other intensities will default to 100 Control of the individual intensities of a multiple intensity channel is handled using keypad with the parameter buttons in the CIA see Manual Control of Non intensity Parameters NPs page 111 or the encoders Pressing the Custom button will map the intensity parameters to the encoders You can either use the encoder itself to adjust the level or you can press down the encoder of the parameter you wish to put on the command line Levels assigned to the individual intensities will act independent of each other and the master intensity 1 0 0 Intens 3 At 5 0 sets intensity 3 of channel 100 to 50 intensity 1 0 0 At 7 5 sets the master intensity of channel 100 to 75 intensity All intensities for channel 100 will be set to 75 unless they have a separate intensity set
180. channels from a palette This can only be done from blind For Example Open the palette in blind e Blind amp Color Palette Select the palette you wish to edit Color Palette 5 Enter Remove channels by pressing 2 4 6 Thru 9 At Enter You may also remove a channel or parameter from a range of presets by pressing e Beam Palette 1 Thru 5 Enter 6 At Enter You can remove channels from live by pressing e channel list Delete Color Palette 2 Enter ET Storing and Using Palettes 147 148 lon Operations Manual Chapter 11 Working with a Single Cue List When cues are created they are stored in a cue list By default recording cues will result in a single cue list identified as cue list 1 While other cue lists can be recorded in lon this chapter deals primarily with working in a single cue list For more information on multiple cue lists see Working with Multiple Cue Lists page 187 This chapter contains the following sections Basic Cueing 150 Recording Cues in Live 151 FANG CLE 155 EC Loo T 162 e Modifying Cues Live 165 Recording and Editing Cues from Blind 171 e Deleting Cues 174 ELI Working with a Single Cue List 149 150 Basic Cueing A cue is a record target comprised of channels with associated para
181. coder LCD Calibrating a scroller is normally done from the live display Note It is recommended that you calibrate your scroller frames starting with the last frame and working backward to the first frame This will help ensure a complete and accurate calibration Calibration may need to be performed when you initially patch a scroller and may need to be adjusted through the course of operation as spring tension changes in a color scroller 78 To calibrate a scroller from the virtual encoders Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 In the browser navigate to Virtual Controls gt Encoder A new window will open in the CIA Select Open as Primary Display in the CIA Virtual encoders will open on the display screen Select the channel of the scroller you wish to calibrate Press the Color encoder button to the upper right of the LCD Multiple presses may be required before the scroller encoder is visible in the virtual encoder display Use the encoder to move all the way to the last frame of the scroller Watch the scroller and continue adjusting the frame until it is centered in the desired position Click Calibrate in the virtual encoder display The new center position is now stored for the selected channel Click Last in the virtual encoder display to move to the center point of the previous frame Visually verify ifthe center point of
182. coder Page Keys Using Softkeys Some of the features and displays in lon are accessible from the softkeys which are located in the bottom right area of the LCD Remember the use of the Displays button This button offers softkeys that access the following displays Effect Status Color Picker Patch Setup Curves Browser Each of these displays offers its own specific softkeys of relevance Context Sensitive Softkeys Softkeys are context sensitive and will change depending on a number of factors including the active display the current command line the active record target and so on lon always repaints the Softkeys to coincide with your current action To get the full use of features on your lon system be sure to familiarize yourself with the softkeys that become available as you program your show Changing Softkey Pages When there are more relative softkeys than the six available softkey buttons the LED in the More SK button will light Press More SK to view the additional softkeys lon Operations Manual Chapter 4 Managing Show Files This chapter explains how to create open and save your show files Each of these operations are accomplished through the browser area in the CIA This chapter contains the following sections Create a New Show File 48 Open an Existing Show File 48 Merging Show Files
183. companied the hardware or download it from our website at www etcconnect com En System Overview 15 16 lon Operations Manual Chapter 2 system Installation This chapter depicts the placement of lon in a few lighting system risers It also details connection of the various components of your lon hardware This chapter contains the following sections e Basic System Risers 18 Large System Riser 19 2 System Installation 17 Basic System Risers n re K gt DMX RDM E BE Net3 Gateway n DUNONG d To ETCNet2 3 Eam CI HH EH Ei B o BAR lon Console Sensor Dimmers f r of as DMX RDM o Net3 Gateway Co H FHH ogooogoggg H H To ETCNet2 3 iH BO I FEE Remote Processing Unit JL TIL O0 c BB T H EH 100 00 lon Console lon Operations Manual Large System Riser
184. controls which are populated on the LCD with the parameters used in your show The encoders can also be used to enter information into your patch LCD This display accompanies the CIA as an additional user interface This LCD offers you softkeys encoder information and an additional view of the command line Load The load button is located above the fader pair at the bottom of the LCD and is used to load the specified cue Control Keypad The control keypad area is divided into three general sections including record targets numeric keypad and modifiers and special function controls Level Wheel Proportionally adjusts intensity for selected channels It also provides scrolling and zoom functions in various modes Navigation Keypad Used for quick access to the live and blind displays format paging and navigation within displays Parameter Category Encoder Page Buttons Parameter buttons are used to select parameter categories and change encoder pages IEEE Ethernet 802 3 Ethernet Port Ethernet port for connection to a network switch network gateways and accessory devices Littlites You may connect a Littlite to the side of your lon console Cleaning lon Should the exterior or LCD of your lon require cleaning you may gently wipe them with a dampened not dripping non abrasive paper towel or soft cloth If this does not clean the console sufficiently you may apply some window cleaner containing ammonia is f
185. conventions The following example illustrates the use of the Move To softkey in the cue list index Cue 1 2 Move To Cue 2 1 Enter moves the selected cue 2 from cue list 1 to the new list 2 When a cue list is moved any links that referenced the cue list are changed accordingly Alternatively you could use Copy To to copy the content of the cue to another cue or cue list Edit The Edit softkey opens a blind channel view of the selected cue and changes focus from the cue list index You can change the blind display to spreadsheet or table view by pressing the Format key You can edit any of the cue attributes for the cue selected in the index but the cue contents must be edited in the blind display See Recording and Editing Cues from Blind on page 171 lon Operations Manual Chapter 15 Advanced Manual Control This chapter describes some more advanced features for manual control functions These features can save you valuable programming time This chapter contains the following sections Using Copy To 196 Using Recall From 197 Using Make Null 198 Using Make Manual 199 Using Make Absolute 199 Using Capture 200 Using Undo esses hed de BAG BRED Ee LENA 201 HE Advanced Manu
186. cue You can assign a negative value to a hang time allowing a subsequent cue to overlap an active cue You can assign either a follow time or a hang time but not both Both features are accessed using the Follow Hang key on the console Following are some examples of use Record Cue 5 Follow Hang 8 Enter records cue 5 and provides a follow time of 8 seconds which impacts the start of the next cue in the list The following cue will automatically initiate on the same fader when the follow time has elapsed The follow time will begin counting down when the associated cue Cue 5 is executed Record Cue 5 Follow Hang Follow Hang 8 Enter records cue 5 and provides a hang time of 8 seconds which impacts the start of the next cue in the cue list The following cue will automatically initiate on the same fader when the hang time has elapsed The hang time will begin counting down when the associated cue Cue 5 is complete Record Cue 5 Follow Hang Follow Hang 5 Enter records cue 5 and provides a hang time of negative 5 seconds To remove a Follow Hang time Cue x Follow Hang Enter ELI Working with a Single Cue List 159 160 Link Loop Link allows cues to be run out of sequence by causing a different cue number to be loaded into the pending file of the playback fader when the cue that carries the link instruction is activated If a follow or hang time is inclu
187. cue only track System setting Note In the following examples the commands Track indicate the same key hit of Cue Only Track which is a single button on the keypad The system setting determines the actual context of the button depending on the mode the system is operating For clarity only the contextual function of the button is used in the examples 154 With system set to Cue Only Record Cue 5 Track Enter records cue 5 This data will track forward in the list until the next move instruction or block 5 Color Record Cue 6 Track Enter records the specified cue except the color data from channel 5 The data will track forward in the list until the next move instruction or block Record Only Cue 2 thru 7 Track Enter stores all manual data The stored data will track from cue 2 and stop at cue 7 lon Operations Manual Timing Cue timing can be applied in a variety of ways At a cue level timing categories are provided for intensity up intensity down focus color and beam transitions Each of these times can have an associated delay Timing can also be applied directly to a channel or a specific parameter This is called discrete timing Time can be entered in minutes and seconds example 10 15 or seconds and tenths of seconds example 1 3 or 100ths of seconds example 1 35 with valid fade times from zero to 99 59 When no time is applied at a cue l
188. cycle through the available views see Using Format page 43 Summary view allows you to see the greatest number of channels at once though parameter data is somewhat truncated Channels with focus color or beam data are indicated with a respective F C or B beneath the level data This view is useful for viewing lots of channel data at once or for editing primarily intensity values Table view grants you greater visibility of parameter data and a reduced number of visible channels This view displays channels along the y axis and parameters along the x axis Parameter categories are always visible lI F C and B You can also view specific parameters by pressing and holding the Data button and then pressing the category softkey s for the parameters you wish to view This will expand the category to show any parameters used in the show You can also deselect the parameters you do not wish to see This is remembered the next time you go to table view The table view is useful for viewing and editing all parameters for a smaller number of channels Both summary and table views allow you to make changes to channels or parameters From the Cue Spreadsheet The cue spreadsheet is another useful blind view of cue data In spreadsheet view cues are listed on the y axis and channels and parameters are displayed on the x axis This view is useful for viewing a limited number of channels over a span of numerous cues This makes spreadsheet view
189. d and is placed on the command line You can use the and Thru keys to make your channel selection For example 1 0 1 Thru 1 1 0 Step 3 Step 4 Alternatively when patch is in address mode DMX address is assumed and is placed on the command line Channel mode and address mode are toggled using the Format key in the patch display Click the Type button in the CIA Select a device type from the fixture library a Press Manfctr from the CIA to display the fixture library The two columns on the left are pagable and show manufacturer names b Use the arrow buttons to scroll the list of manufacturers Selecting a manufacturer repaints the device columns with all devices from that manufacturer that are available for patching c Scroll through the device list and make your selection After the selection is made the fixture or device type will be placed on the command line after the channel number and displayed in the box beneath the Type button Notice the two softkeys Show Favorites and Manfctr located beneath the CIA These softkeys provide you with the option of showing only the library of fixtures devices that are already patched in the show and your favorites Eos default devices Show Favorites or all fixtures devices available in the library sorted by manufacturer Manfctr Step 5 66 Enter a starting address for the selected channel or group of channels Press
190. d and some are unparked Park Enter will unpark them all A confirmation will be required 2 At Park Enter if channel 2 is unparked this command parks intensity at the current value If the intensity for channel 2 is parked this command unparks intensity 2 Color Palette 8 Park Enter parks the color for channel 2 in color palette 8 2 Color Park Enter parks channel 2 color at its current value Cue 6 Park Enter parks all the channels stored in cue 6 at their levels provided in the cue Park Enter clears all parked channels and scaled park instructions see Scaled Parked Values in Live page 224 A confirm is required When a channel is unparked it reverts to the level the console is currently providing or its default value if there is no current instruction A confirmation will be required KO Using Park 223 224 Scaled Parked Values in Live A scaled parked value allows the intensity output only to be modified proportionally in live Scaled park values are ignored when storing a record target The setting on the display indicates what should be stored not the actual scaled value An example of how to set a scaled parked value in live includes 3 At 1 2 5 Park Enter sets a scaled value of 125 on channel 3 intensity In other words whenever channel 3 is active it will be active 2596 higher than its current setting 3 At 8 5 Par
191. d data from cue 5 for channel 2 2 Focus Recall From Cue 5 Enter recalls all data for channel 2 from cue 5 except focus pan tilt XYZ data Group 3 Color Focus Recall From Preset 6 Enter recalls the color and focus information from preset 6 for the channels in group 3 Could also be used with a channel selection set instead of a group Group 3 Color Recall From Cue 7 Make Absolute Enter recalls color data for group 3 from cue 7 and breaks any references to record targets 2 Recall From Sub 4 Enter recalls all recorded intensity data from sub 4 for channel 2 Recall From Intensity Palette 1 recalls all of the values stored in intensity palette 1 Ci Note In live or blind hitting Recall From Recall From will put Recall From Cue on the command line HE Advanced Manual Control 197 198 Using Make Null The Make Null softkey can be used to withhold parameter data from record or update actions in live and remove parameter data from record targets in blind Make Null is applied using channel selection and can impact entire channels individual parameters or parameter categories In Live When you apply a Make Null instruction to channels or parameters in live channel data is still visible onstage but that data is essentially rendered invisible to record commands Similar to filters see Record Filters page 184 Make Nu
192. d in the source cue lon will not assume all moving lights apply to any given mark There are two ways to apply a referenced mark You can apply a mark flag at a cue level and then subsequently reference that flag in a later cue or you can apply a mark in a cue and reference back to an earlier cue Referenced marks are useful because the non intensity parameter data is stored in the cue that actually fades the lights up Therefore any changes to the non intensity parameter data is modified in the source cue You do not need to worry about changing it in the marked cue Setting Referenced Mark Flags You can apply a mark flag by pressing Cue n Mark Enter This sets a flag M on a cue for later marking activity In subsequent cues when channels are marked they will preset for movement in this cue unless told to mark elsewhere When you are building a cue containing channels that you want to mark do the following select channels Mark Enter Store the cue following normal procedures lon will automatically look backwards in the cue list for the first mark flag it encounters For Example Assume you had placed a mark flag on Cue 10 this is becomes the Marked Cue e Cue 10 Mark Enter Later you store Cue 12 with a mark instruction on channels 1 10 this becomes the Source Cue e 1 thru 10 Mark Enter Note that channels 1 10 are displayed with a red M in the upper right corner e Record
193. d indicates current Outlined in gold indicates selected Red Cue fade is in progress cue list area Text indicators e seecue6 Indicates that there is discrete timing within the associated cue Found in the cue display Timing area e seecue4 Indicates the cue has an allfade command Found in the cue display Flags area A or a see cues 3 amp 4 Indicates an asserted cue A indicates the entire cue is asserted a indicates a channel or parameter assert only Found in the cue display Flags area B or b see cue 5 Indicates a blocked cue B indicates the entire cue is blocked b indicates a channel parameter block only Found in the cue display Flags area F9 see in cue 8 Indicates a follow time associated with the cue in this case 9 seconds Found in the cue display EX System Basics 41 H4 seein cue 6 Indicates a hang time associated with the cue in this case 4 seconds Found in the cue display see cue 9 Indicates an intensity blocked cue Found in the cue display Flags area Morm Indicates a marked cue M indicates an AutoMark or a reference mark that is used by a subsequent cue m indicates a reference mark that is currently unused by any subsequent cue see Using Mark page 175 Found in the Flags area P see in cue 3 Indicates the cue will preheat Found in the cue display Flags area
194. ded with the cue attributes the activation of the linked cue will occur when the follow or hang time has elapsed The link can be within the cue list or to a cue in another cue list Following is an example of using link Record Cue 2 Link Loop Cue 8 Enter records the specified cue 2 and provides a link to cue 8 in the cue list When cue 2 is played back the linked cue is loaded into the pending file of the associated fader Loop is provided as a method to link a series of cues and loop them a number of times in a sequence Once the sequence of cues has played back the first time the system recognizes the loop command and plays the sequence again If the first cue in the sequence is a cue with an assert attribute or has move instructions for channels values from the last cue are not allowed to track through into the first cue when it is looped back But without a move or assert in the first cue values from the last cue will track into the first cue when it loops back A loop specified with O loops the sequence indefinitely Following is an example of using loop Cue 2 Link Loop Cue 1 Link Loop 3 Follow 4 Enter records a link from cue 2 back to cue 1 Because there is a follow time cue 1 will automatically trigger 4 seconds after cue 2 If cue 1 also has follow time it will automatically trigger cue 2 This sequence will run 4 times once plus 3 loops and then stop in cue 2 The loop
195. ding on the channels selected Below are scenarios to explain some of the possible operating conditions Parameters that are in the show patch but do not apply to the selected channels are suppressed The parameter name will be displayed in grey but controls will be withheld as they are not applicable to the selected channel When a group of channels is selected with some parameters that are similar but others that are not the following will occur Parameters that are shared by all selected channels are displayed in white with control provided for all channels Parameters that are available to some but not all of the selected channels are displayed in grey with all available controls indicated You may use these controls but the channels that do not support the relative parameters will not respond to the actions e Parameters that none of the selected channels support are displayed grey with only the parameter name shown When you access a parameter page the encoder wheels will automatically load and display the first page that has a valid parameter for the selected channels Encoder softkeys If you press the encoder for any parameter the softkeys change to display options relevant to that parameter These may include Home Last and Next or Min and Max and depending on the type of parameter a Mode or Calibrate button Home Each parameter has an associated Home softkey This accesses any parameter and r
196. display When channels are selected a black line may appear in the color picker This line indicates what colors can be mixed by the fixture If a color lies outside of the line that color is out of the range of that device If no black line is visible the fixture has not yet been calibrated and the color matching will be approximated The gel picker is normalized to 3200 degrees Therefore if you are setting Rosco 80 R80 on a arc source device it will appear to be the same color as R80 on an incandescent source Encoders When both CMY and RGB mixing systems are present in the lighting system they take priority in the encoder mapping followed by fixed wheels then scrollers A CMY color mixing fixture may not be placed in RGB mode nor can an RGB fixture be placed in CMY mode When the device is a fixed color wheel or a color scroller you can use the encoder to select the desired frame Pressing the E expands the display to include a button for each frame indicated with both a location number example 5 and a label example Rosco R80 The specific colors within the scroller or wheel are specified in patch See Creating a new scroll or wheel on page 76 lon Operations Manual Home lon is equipped with a Home hardkey This hardkey allows you to home a specific parameter Additionally you may home all of a channel s non intensity parameters or home only a specific category I F C B Homing a channel
197. dware 22 POWOL akan o tuer edes pean ed han ete at ate dacs Gabe uen 23 Power Up the Console 23 Power Down the Console aa 23 Your First Interaction 24 Single Monitor Configuration 24 Dual Monitor Configuration 26 The Central Information Area CIA 27 Parameter Display 27 BOWSER ANA e Nas al deb a Es Re NE anis 27 Collapse Expand the CIA 27 LOCKS CIA si eg paa Pak aa PLANG DANGAN oak ate X que Res 28 Locking the Facepanel 28 Using the Browser 29 Virtual Keyboard 29 Organizing the Direct Selects 30 Using Direct Selects 31 Clear Functions 32 Display Control and Navigation 33 Opening and Closing Displays 33 Swap Displays 2 utn PGH RD ne wae KAPAG da ed 34 Scrolling within a Display 34 Zooming Displays 34 Graphical User Interface GUI Display Conventions 35 Indicators in the Live Blind Display 35 Data Keys 1a v bL SEA Lies 39 Time
198. e Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 336 b Remove and save the two screws securing the bumper to the side of the wing Turn the wing over to return it to its upright position Remove the bumper s from the wing a Right Side Gently pull the bumper up until it is flush with the facepanel Left Side Gently push the bumper down until it loosens from the facepanel b Pull the bumper away from the facepanel until it is free from the wing Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each side of each wing that needs to be exposed Align the two wings Lift the wing on the right and place it gently on the hooks provided on the wing on the left Check that the two wings are aligned properly front and back lon Operations Manual Step 6 Step 7 then press down gently on the right wing until it is fully seated This should be a smooth connection but may require a little force Repeat above procedure to connect another wing to the right end of the pair if desired Re insert screws to secure wings together and secure the bumpers to the sides of the wings Attach fader wing array to lon Once all of the desired wings are attached within the limits above you may use the same procedure above to attach the wings to lon Connect Universal Fader Wing s to Console with USB Cable Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Connect PS313 F power supply cable lt lt 5 included IE Ga Connect ibn Bea USB cable PB included With
199. e CIA will display the patch controls Changing the Patch View By default patch is displayed in a sequential channel view While in the channel patch view any numeric entry from the keypad is assumed to be a channel Channel View Ci Note It is recommended that you use the patch by channel display when working with moving lights or other multi parameter devices By default the patch display lists channels on the X axis and device attributes on the Y axis In this view the channels are sorted numerically with the address in the second column In the patch by channel display the command line entry defaults to selecting channels To specify an address in this mode use the Address field shown in the CIA or press At after the channel entry S 5 Address e Interface 350 373 NI 351 352 53 it o n Ana el lal in kr Ven a AmA Ll e M a Viet a S ANA MAM e uw BEBE mI 62 Address View You can change the patch display to sort by DMX address by pressing Format The channel number is now indicated in the second column and the command line changes its default entry to Address To specify a channel in this mode use the Channel field shown in the CIA or press At after the address entry While in address patch view any numeric entry from the keypad is assumed to be an output address ELIT Cams as
200. e To softkey appears when a record target type cue preset palette is indicated on the command line Some targets macros groups effects only have the Move To option when viewing in the blind list view You can also hit Copy To Copy To to access Move To When using Move To to convert a preset into a palette all information not relevant for that palette will be removed lon Operations Manual Chapter 9 Storing and Using Presets Presets are very similar to palettes in that they are collections of data for specific channels to facilitate cue creation Presets however can collect a data for a given channel intensity focus color beam rather than just one parameter type Up to 1000 presets may be stored in lon using decimals or whole numbers and they can contain absolute data or a mix of IFCB palettes Presets can not refer to other presets This chapter contains the following sections e Storing Presets Live 130 e Recalling Presets 132 Editing Presets Live 133 Editing Presets in Blind 0 0 00 a 135 KI Storing and Using Presets 129 Storing Presets Live Presets can be recorded live using the keypad or the direct selects Both Record and Record Only can be used to record presets with or without filters See Storing Data with Record Filters on page 186 Record will store all channels that
201. e indications in the MSC data a numeric value of 0 100 would set the specified potentiometer to that level All other control values are ignored Fire This command fires a macro MSC supports macros 1 through 127 only Therefore a numeric value of 1 127 would accompany this command EZ Using Show Control 285 Serial RS 232 The serial interface allows RS 232 commands to be sent to lon through lon s serial port Enabling Serial Receiving serial commands can be enabled in Setup see Show Control page 98 Serial is enabled by default You will also need to tell the console which serial group s that it will be listening to Serial Commands All text will be stored until a carriage return a r or is encountered to show the end of the command The carriage return will act as the Enter key for the command line If the text begins with a the text that follows until the carriage return will be sent to the command line for user 0 and processed as if that user had typed it For example Chan 1 Thru 10 At Full r sets channels 1 through 10 to full manually All other text that doesn t start with a will be sent to the lon event handler Here are a few examples Go 1 fires playback 1 Cue 1 2 run cue 2 from list 1 on the appropriate fader Cue 1 fire pending cue from list 2 GoCue0 1 clear playback 1 fires cue 0 Release 1 release playback 1 Off 1 turn playback 1 off Resume 1
202. e information on this action see Using Go To Cue 0 page 191 Cue Playback 215 216 Using Manual Control There are three types of manual control for playbacks e Cues can be stored with manual timing When cues have stored manual timing the default behavior of the fader is to control those manual values Cues can be captured for manual intensity control only This is possible only when the associated cue has no manual timing values Cues can be manually overridden using the Man Override amp Load feature which captures all parameter transitions In each of these cases follow time counts down from Go The hang time will be started when the potentiometer reaches full or when the last parameter reaches its end state from timing whichever comes last Manual Timing Control Manual timing can be set for any parameter or group of parameters The potentiometer is then used to control the progress of a transition For Example Assume the active cue contains an instruction to set color at 5 for channel 1 The pending cue contains an instruction to set channel 1 to color 12 and the color parameter has a manual time Press Go to activate the cue Channel 1 color does not change As you move the fader up manually channel 1 color moves proportionally from color 5 to color 12 Any parameters with timing will start their moves at the press of Go and be unaffected by the manual control To program a channel manual time
203. e modified from 0 2000 e Shape Vertical or Horizontal as defined by the Mode button default is 100 and can be modified from 0 2000 Axis default is 0 and can be modified by 180 Use the encoders or softkeys to adjust the effects while watching the effect on stage Effect Status The effect itself can be accessed for editing from this display by pressing Edit Any changes made directly in the live effect editor are made to the effect itself and must be stored Cue level overrides also must be stored or updated to the required cue but do not impact the basic effect itself Effect attributes modified in the effect status display can be reset to their previous values using the softkeys Rate Enter resets the rate to the previous value EL Creating and Using Effects 233 Step Effects In step effects each step contains an on state and an off state The on state is the action the channels in the step should take when the step is active The off state is the action the channels in the step should take when the step is not active Step effects are a quick and easy way to build simple chases When building step effects channels must be defined for each step This is different from absolute and relative effects Once complete you may play back the effect on all channels embedded in it by pressing Recall From Effect x Enter Or you may specify only certain channels to play back from the embedded ch
204. e of the Package with your modifications c accompany any non standard executables with their corresponding Standard Version executables giving the non standard executables non standard names and clearly documenting the differences in manual pages or equivalent together with instructions on where to get the Standard Version d make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder 5 You may charge a reasonable copying fee for any distribution of this Package You may charge any fee you choose for support of this Package You may not charge a fee for this Package itself However you may distribute this Package in aggregate with other possibly commercial programs as part of a larger possibly commercial software distribution provided that you do not advertise this Package as a product of your own 6 The scripts and library files supplied as input to or produced as output from the programs of this Package do not automatically fall under the copyright of this Package but belong to whomever generated them and may be sold commercially and may be aggregated with this Package 7 C or perl subroutines supplied by you and linked into this Package shall not be considered part of this Package 8 The name of the Copyright Holder may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission 9 THIS PACKAGE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES
205. e pan and tilt levels Select the Swap button on the CIA 2 Attributes Swap swaps the pan and tilt parameters for channel 2 Scroller An attribute used to change the scroll loaded in a scroller or moving light Select the Scroller button on the CIA to display the scroller picker and the scrolls available for your device See Using the Picker on page 74 2 Attributes Scroller opens the Scroller Picker in the CIA for scroll selection for channel 2 Gobo Wheel An attribute used to change the gobo wheel loaded in a moving light Select the Gobo Wheel button on the CIA to display the wheel picker with gobo options available for your device See Using the Picker on page 74 8 Attributes Gobo Wheel selects channel 3 and opens the Wheel Picker in the CIA for gobo wheel selection Color Wheel An attribute used to change the color wheel loaded in a moving light Select the Color Wheel button on the CIA to display the wheel picker with the options available for your device See Using the Picker on page 74 More as shown in the patch display indicates additional parameter properties are available for the selected device such as the color and gobo wheels 4 Attributes Color Wheel selects channel 4 and opens the wheel picker in the CIA for color wheel selection Database Display and Settings The Database page provides you with additional fields for entering information
206. e risk as to the quality operation and performance of the Software is with User Should any Software prove defective in any respect User assumes the cost of any necessary servicing repair or correction This disclaimer of warranty constitutes an essential part of this license 5 Upgrades If this copy of the Software is an upgrade from a previous version of the Software it is provided to you on a license exchange basis You agree by your installation and use of such copy of the Software to voluntarily terminate your earlier Agreement and that you will not continue to use the earlier version of the Software or transfer it to another person or entity 6 Third Party Software The Software may contain third party software not owned by ETC which requires notices and or additional terms and conditions Such notices and or terms and conditions may be obtained by contacting your ETC sales rep and are made a part of and incorporated by reference into this Agreement In addition certain copyrights notices for such third party software also are included in the documentation attached hereto By accepting this Agreement you are also accepting the additional notices and terms and conditions if any set forth elsewhere 7 U S Government Restricted Rights The Software and any documentation were developed at private expense are commercial and are published and copyrighted The Software and any documentation may be transferred to the U S Government o
207. e station connection to a console or USB hub The maximum distance between products is 5m 16 ft When the base station is connected to Eos lon using USB the RFR remote will automatically connect to that console when powered Ethernet For use with the lon console the base station will need to be plugged into an ethernet switch If the switch is not power over ethernet the base station can receive power via USB from the console Note For single base station use no configuration is needed if defaults are used For multiple base stations custom configurations and connection issues further configuration will be needed AN CAUTION You may use either the ethernet connection or the USB connection for data to the console but not both Console Section Mode Holding down while the remote is booting up will take you to the console selection list This mode is used to select between Direct USB mode Base USB mode or available host consoles for networking Note If multiple RFR units are to be used separately within a range of each other s receiver units change the frequency and or ID settings to avoid conflicts Reference Change Frequency and ID Setting below for more information For optimal operation set the base stations apart by at least 5m 16 ft to ensure the two units do not interfere with each other s operation LE Remote Control 325 Change Frequency and ID Setting A netwo
208. e the virtual keyboard is open To close the virtual keyboard press the Displays button EX System Basics 29 Direct Selects lon gives you the option of opening direct select modules on the monitors To open the direct selects on a monitor Step 1 Goto Browser gt Virtual Controls gt 5 x 10 Direct Select Module A window will open in the CIA displaying your monitor placement options for the module Step 2 Click the placement option in the CIA in which you want the module to appear To close the direct selects on a monitor Step 1 Goto Browser gt Virtual Controls gt Close Module The placement screen will appear again in the CIA Step 2 Click the placement of the module you wish to close The module will be removed For information on populating direct selects see Organizing the Direct Selects below Slider Module If you prefer to have faders available to you the monitors can be populated with virtual faders called slider modules To open the slider module on a monitor Step 1 Go to Browser gt Virtual Controls gt Slider Module A window will open in the CIA displaying your monitor placement options for the module Step 2 Click the placement option in the CIA in which you want the module to appear To close the slider module on a monitor Step 1 Goto Browser gt Virtual Controls gt Close Module The placement screen will appear again in the CIA Step 2 Click the placement of the module you wish to close The module will be
209. e to any parameter slots that you wish to alter the default parameter designations for Step 6 When you have selected a slot click Parameters The CIA will display buttons representing all of the available parameters TT S robe Warm Frame Form Z Yellow gh m Amber je pi Blue Adjus White Angle Intensity Shutter an e ved HG BO C ris Barndoor In Point Orange Focus Control Saturation Green Flow Rate Global Tilt CTC Diffusion Fresnel Out Point Color X Cyan Blue Enable Pitch White 0 Edge Red Adjust Image Y Magenta Scroller Boston Cool White BEY Zoom SELI Rotate Z M Blink p Adjust lt lt Done a Click the gt gt and lt lt buttons to scroll through the available parameters in alphabetical order The buttons on the left side of the CIA can be used to speed your search You may click them to see only parameters that fall into the specific categories of Intensity Focus Color Image Form Shutter or Control All returns you to the complete list of parameters b Use the parameter category buttons on the left of the CIA to expedite searching for a particular parameter Patch 83 Step 7 Click the button for the desired parameter in the CIA Step 8 Repeat steps 3 5 until you have entered all of the required parameters for the new fixture If you are missing a parameter slot At any point you can use the Page keys and Insert to insert a parameter slot above the selected one
210. ected channels in the list up 30 of their current values If channels 1 through 4 were at 40 intensity this would scale them up by 30 to a value of 52 2 5 level wheel roll the wheel up for greater intensity or down for less intensity 1 Full Full selects channel 1 and sets it to the level as established in Setup Group 9 Out selects all channels in Group 9 and sets the intensity values for those channels to zero As long as channels are on the command line you can continue to address them with commands without having to reselect them 1 0 At At selects channel 10 and sets an intensity level of full For Example 1 thru 5 Full Enter The selected channels are highlighted in gold with white channel text and red intensity values indicating manual data You may continue to modify channels 1 through 5 since they are still selected and displayed on the command line AY FIF At FI This command would reduce the intensity of channels 1 through 5 by 2096 e at 7 5 Enter You can continue manipulating the selected channels so long as the channels are selected and displayed on the command line Level Wheel You may set intensity for selected channels or addresses using the level wheel Rolling the level wheel upwards increases intensity Rolling it downwards towards you decreases it lon Operations Manual Manual Control of Non intensity Parameters NPs Non intensity para
211. ed as a group of related addresses that together control a device An examples of a fixture would be an ETC Revolution This moving light contains 31 parameters that together allow you to perform various functions such as pan and tilt Each of these attributes is addressed by a different output lon treats fixtures and channels as one and the same Unlike former ETC consoles where a fixture occupied one channel for each parameter lon assigns each fixture a single channel number Individual parameters are then associated with that channel as additional lines of channel information Output Outputs are the method by which level changes to channels are conveyed to attached devices These outputs are patched to channels In its simplest form an output is the data signal sent from the console to turn on a light or modify a fixture parameter Record Target A record target is any data location that you can store data using a Record or Record Only command Examples of record targets are cues palettes presets and macros Move Instruction A move instruction is any change to a parameter from its previous stored value Any change to a channel s intensity is a move instruction Any change to a channel s pan or tilt is a move instruction Any change to a channel s color mixing is a move instruction and so on Syntax Structure Most instructions can be entered into lon through the command line When entering data into the console the lon com
212. ee eee 60 Displays pa br tec DD does Red ep dieu xa 61 Changing the Patch View 61 Channel View 61 Address VIEW ees dad A eden seit dida 62 Create and Edit Patch 63 Select Channel Set Device Type and Output Address 63 Patching a Dimmer 64 DG e 64 Dimmer Doubling 65 Moving and Copying Channels 65 Unpatch a Channel 65 Replace 65 Patching Moving Lights 66 Ti totial asa Dang dt BIDA NAA DA PAG KG BRE eee ae 66 Patching a Compound Channel 67 Display Pages in Patch 68 Patch Display and Settings 68 Attribute Display and Settings 70 Database Display and Settings 72 Using Offset in Patch 72 Patch Channels from the Encoder LCD 73 Using the Scroller Wheel Picker and Editor 74 Using the Picker 74 Using the Editor 75 Calibrating a Scroller 78 KOVNO S MC 80 Deleting Channels
213. elected point s output by 1 e Full sets the selected point s output to full e Out sets the selected point s output to zero At raises the selected point by the amount for established in setup At lowers the selected point by the amount for established in setup Using the curve display Once a curve is displayed in the CIA you can press Edit to edit the curve in the editor display In the curve editor you can trace the desired shape of the curve using the mouse on the screen As you progress through drawing the curve intensity values will be added for existing points on the curve If you add points to the curve from the keypad those points will be adjusted as well You can also toggle between an interpolated or stepped curve shape lon defaults to interpolated To switch to stepped press the Stepped softkey Once pressed this softkey changes to Interpolated which allows you to switch back Below are two examples of the same curve The first is interpolated and the second is stepped 13 20 3 21 98 7 36 43 47 47 85 99 1 FF 93 90 30 77 64 98 91 13 20 3 21 98 7 36 43 47 47 85 99 1 FF 93 90 3077 64 98 91 Interpolated Curve Stepped Curve Clearing the curve At any time you can clear a curve from the curve editor display by pressing the Clear softkey This will return the curve to its original linear shape or to its default shape if it is a pre esta
214. elete Cue 2 Enter deletes any channels in group 1 from cue 2 Cue 2 remains in the cue list and any channels not in group 1 are unaffected Delete Cue 2 thru 8 Cue Only Track Enter Enter deletes cues 2 8 making exception to the default setting as described above lon Operations Manual Chapter 12 Using Mark Mark is an instruction that automates the process of presetting moving lights to their required state in a cue prior to fading intensity up This allows your moving lights to unobtrusively perform non intensity parameter transitions in an inactive darkened state lon provides two different methods to mark lights AutoMark and Referenced Marks This chapter contains the following sections AutoMark Referenced Marks 177 EE Using Mark 175 AutoMark The AutoMark feature is a system default setting and can be turned on or off at a global level The system default for this setting is off To change the default settings see Show Settings page 95 When AutoMark is enabled non intensity parameter transitions will occur in the cue immediately preceding the cue in which the changes are stored if intensity in that cue is moved from zero to any active level Therefore the preceding cue executes the AutoMark AutoMark information is displayed for cues or cue parts It is not a channel instruction AutoMarked cues are indicated by an M in the M column of
215. emoving Filters 185 Storing Data with Record Filters 186 Chapter 14 Working with Multiple Cue Lists 187 Recording to a New Cue List 188 Using Record aa end Leurs pete tatin 188 Using Record Only 188 USING ASSON cse orae GA aa Sara eles 189 Using AllFade sexe RA ork et ha 190 Changing the Active Cue List 190 Using Go To Cue with Multiple Cue Lists 191 Using Go To Cue O 191 Using Go To Cue Out 191 Using the Cue List Index 192 Open the Cue List Index 192 Chapter 15 Advanced Manual Control 195 Using Copy TO snb fet ee ERU ee ER dees 196 Using Recall From 197 Using Make Null 198 Iri DIVE a nG KA Bid ee a ed doe ne hh aa m 198 In Blind iu cag NAGMANA NEANLAD DD LANA KGAD hee ae 198 Using Make Manual 199 Using Make Absolute 199 Using Capture 200 Using Undo 201 Command History 201 Chapter 16 Multipart Cues 203 About Mu
216. ems ea abe e uus premo E e aud aureas 275 Chapter 24 Using Show Control 277 About Show Control 278 Setup cx eme pak SUA cae ee Gel oe ED 278 Events etu e ete e eu ow en oe ete aa 278 Internal vs External Time 278 Programming an Event List 279 Time Code 5222 baie ubt ae NGA BAN a ous 280 Enabling Time Code 280 Timing Data 55 ated ete te Pe Nan URP E 280 Enabling the Clocks 281 Programming a Time Code Event 281 Learn Mod ora ero s isa Set NGA NATA GB ka Baa RP 281 Execution While Editing 281 Real Time Clock RTC 282 Enabling Real Time Clock 282 Real Time Clock Events 282 Programming Real Time Clock Events 282 Analog Inputs and Relay Outputs 283 Analog MPS 5 2 re Benet EL a KGG ERES S 283 Relay Outputs 0 5 cc ee e ee 283 MIDI Show Control 283 Data SourceSiss ec noe MD e Vedi 283 x lon Operations Manual MIDI Show Control Devices 283 lon Command Interpretation 284 Serial RS 232 286 Enabling Serial 286
217. en When you record the series of button presses to a new macro you can later play it back by simply pressing the macro direct select button running it from a linked cue accessing it from a connected show control system remotely triggering the macro or running it from another recorded macro You may create up to 1 000 macros either from live using the macro Learn mode to record a sequence of keystrokes as you perform the operation or you can create a macro from within the macro editor display entering and editing keystrokes into the macro content editor without actually executing the instructions The macro editor display contains a listing of all recorded macros including labels and the contents of the macros stored All macro editing is accomplished from the macro editor display Store a Macro from Live The most effective way to store a macro is from live mode using the macro Learn mode to record a sequence of button presses as you enter them You can include any button press on the console hard key or soft key except Macro the arrow keys Escape Select and Learn Using the Learn key Pressing the Learn key while in live mode places the console in macro learn mode The Learn key flashes and the CIA displays Learning above the command line Assign a number identifier from 1 to 1000 to the Macro using the control keypad and press Enter The CIA flashes Learning Macro above the command line Th
218. en in the CIA Go Offline Change Master Step 4 Selecta master console from the list on the right If no masters are available in the list a master console is not connected to the network Step 5 Press Change Master The backup lon will synchronize with the master EJ Multi console and Synchronized Backup 311 i Synchronizing with Master b Applying show data Re building show Processing Stage Data Processing 1 User Created Fixture Library Processing 31 Playbacks Processing 1 Scaled Parked Channel Processing 1 Parked Addresses Processing 1 Parked Channel Processing System Settings Processing Slider Map Processing Show Property Processing Patch Processing 16 Effect Lists Processing show Loading Show Sync Downloading Intensi Address Lamp Ctris Chan Check Cmnd Histoi Make Man MakeAbs Make Null Fan Offset The lon s LCD displays the current status of the backup If the primary goes offline for any reason the backup will automatically takeover as the master if backup auto switch has been enabled See Backup Auto Switch on page 297 This happens with virtually no effect to the backup other than a change in the CIA heading which will change to the following status If backup auto switch is disabled the backup will tell the user that the master has gone away and will ask if they want the backup to take control of the system If you enter the Network gt Configure screen it will ha
219. endent state to the associated fader or make any changes in blind to an active cue on stage When Fader Controls Assert amp Load are used together the entire contents of the cue are replayed You can assert just certain elements of a cue by using the command line Following are some examples of asserting elements of a cue from the command line channel list Cue 5 Assert Enter asserts the selected channels with values from cue 5 Note that cue 5 must be active for this command to execute channel list Color Cue 1 Assert Enter asserts the color values from cue 1 for the selected channels Using Timing Disable The Time Disable softkey used with Fader Controls and Load causes timing data to be ignored for any cues that are activated on the associated playback fader When a playback fader is in timing disable mode you will notice TD in the associated fader display To release the playback fader from time disable mode press Fader Controls Time Disable amp Load again You can also cut the next cue in by pressing Timing Disable amp Go or the last cue by pressing Timing Disable amp Back Using Freeze Freeze can be used to halt all playback activity on any active faders To activate a freeze for only a specific fader press Fader Controls Freeze amp Load There are two ways to remove the freeze command Press Freeze amp Load again for the specific fader
220. enses including reasonable attorney fees suffered or incurred by ETC or the Supplier as a result of any claim by any third party that by reason of your use or application of any intellectual property right contained in the Software constitutes an infringement of any third party s property rights including but not limited to patent and copyright 14 Destruction of the Software Upon termination of this EULA you must destroy the Software the related documents and any and all copies thereof within ten 10 days after the date of termination and submit documents evidencing such destruction to ETC 15 Miscellaneous A Complete Agreement This Agreement is the complete agreement between the parties with respect to the Software and supersedes any other communication written or verbal with respect to the Software B Severability The provisions of this EULA are severable if any term or provision shall be deemed void or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction such declaration shall have no effect on the remaining terms and provisions hereof C Governing Law This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Wisconsin USA MUN 101879 2 009900 001 1 4 The Artistic License Preamble The intent of this document is to state the conditions under which a Package may be copied such that the Copyright Holder maintains some semblance of artistic control over the development of the package while giving the users of the
221. er it is served via DHCP or a self generated link local IP address Subnet Mask If DHCP is disabled you set the lon subnet mask here This is a static setting and will remain set until changed by a user lon s default subnet mask is 255 255 0 0 If DHCP is enabled this field will display the subnet mask that is being used by the console whether it is served via DHCP or a self generated link local IP address Gateway If DHCP is disabled you set the gateway IP address here This is a static gateway IP address and will remain set until changed by a user lon s default gateway is 10 101 100 101 If DHCP is enabled this field will display the gateway IP address that is being used by the console whether it is served via DHCP or a self generated link local IP address Advanced Features Enable Sensor Feedback Clicking in the enable box will allow Eos to receive feedback over the network from a Sensor rack This option is Enabled by default See About Address page 250 for more information Enable RDM Clicking in the enable box will allow Eos to perform RDM functionality including device discovery See Patch Display and Settings page 68 and About Address page 250 EY Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell 301 302 Maintenance and Diagnostics Deep Clear Are you sure you want to purge your persistent storage Copy Log Files 10 Files 2 Mb Logoff Are you sure your want to log out of your console
222. er fader If there are no values for unloaded channels from the master fader channels are set to default Channels return to the master fader using the category level timing of the active cue on that fader If the master fader is released the fader is cleared and any intensity values owned by that fader are set to zero any non intensity parameters remain in their current state All fader attributes timing disable filters and so on are cleared by the release action Turning a Fader Off To turn a fader off press Fader Controls Off amp Load of the associated fader When a fader is turned off the cue list is maintained on that fader and any values provided by the fader are returned to the master fader or their background state Press Off amp Load again to turn the associated fader back on The active cue is replayed following the rules for assert You can turn the fader back on by pressing the Go or Stop Back button on the fader or by executing a Go to Cue for the cue list on that fader provided the cue list is not already active on another playback Cue Playback 219 220 Using Rate Override To collect a playback fader for rate control press Fader Controls Rate amp Load for the required fader When Rate is pressed without Load it always collects the master fader for rate control A subset of faders can be collected by pressing and holding Rate while clicking the Load button for the associated f
223. er the information that is displayed for the selected channel The selected button is highlighted in gray The buttons are Current Values this shows any current information that the channel is receiving and following Background this displays any information that is being sent to the channel but not adhered to since another source has ownership of the channel Moves this shows the previous move value of the previous move the next move and its value Usage this shows where and how a channel is used Patch this displays patch information about the channel Lamp Controls this displays any parameters associated with the channel If the channel is a conventional intensity only fixture no parameters will be displayed If it is a moving light this key will access lamp controls lon Operations Manual About When About is pressed the CIA presents the following information Channel count for the console Software version Copyright notifications Device name Assigned as Primary Backup Client Offline User ID Number of patched and unpatched addresses Priority ACN and Net2 IP Address About System When About System is pressed the CIA displays a list of all network devices that are connected to lon These network devices include Consoles RPUs RVIs PC Clients Show Control Gateways I O Gateways Unison processors CEM Net3 Gateways ETCNet2 Nodes Each network device
224. erations Manual Appendix B Multi console and Synchronized Backup Overview This appendix outlines the procedures required to use multiple lon Eos control devices such as an lon console Eos console Remote Processor Unit RPU Remote Video Interface RVI or PC with client dongle simultaneously on a network It outlines the setup configuration and behavior that is entailed in an lon multi console scenario lon multi console functionality is also used to provide synchronized backup of your show while running multiple lon devices on the network Definition of terms Familiarize yourself with these terms prior to setting up a multi console system Note lon consoles Eos consoles RVIs RPUs or a PC running Eos with a client dongle may all be considered active units on an lon network For the sake of brevity the term lon is used to represent any and all of these options in the following descriptions Primary When an lon is configured as a primary other lon devices can connect and synchronize with it If using a backup processor the primary is the lon that will be backed up Only lon Eos consoles and RPUs can be set to primary By default all lon consoles will start up as a primary Backup This lon is capable of taking control of the system if the primary fails You may input data and run your show from a backup There can only be one backup in an lon network and you must specify which primary it is backin
225. ers Make Null removes the data for the specified channel or parameter from the preset Preset 5 Move To Preset 9 Enter this will move the contents of preset 5 to preset 9 Preset 9 will be created and preset 5 will be deleted Preset 1 Copy To lt Preset gt 5 Enter this will copy the contents of preset 1 to preset 5 You may also copy ranges of presets to new locations 1 Recall From Preset 1 Enter will recall the contents for channel 1 in preset 1 Ci Note While editing presets in blind hitting Recall From Recall From will put Recall From Preset on the command line KI Storing and Using Presets 135 Editing in Spreadsheet View Spreadsheet view shows a range of presets along the Y axis and channels and channel parameters along the X axis Viewing presets in spreadsheet view is useful when you want to compare data between presets You may select a preset from the spreadsheet using the Next or Last keys to move through the list or you may select the exact preset from the keypad You may also select a range of presets to edit at once You can make changes to the preset s by selecting channels and altering parameter values In addition to normal editing functions you may also use the following commands in this view Copy To Make Absolute Make Null Move To and Replace With In addition to the examples given above in table view here are some examples of the addit
226. es and relabel or move them 1 5 Label lt name gt Enter While in the specific palette category list view the Move To and Edit softkeys are available for use To move a specific palette to a different location 1 Move To 3 Enter moves the contents and label of the specific palette 1 to palette 3 If palette 3 is already used you will be asked to confirm that you want to overwrite the existing recorded palette You can also hit Copy To Copy To to access Move To You can also move data from a preset to a palette and vice versa It is important to remember that when using the Move To command that data is removed from its current location and moved to its new location To copy a specific palette to a new palette 2 Copy To 5 Enter copies the contents of palette 2 to the new palette 5 You can also use Copy To from presets to palettes To edit any palette data from the List View 1 5 Edit Enter selects palette number 15 and brings the blind display into focus with palette 15 selected for editing You can use the Next and Last buttons to access the other palettes or select a new palette for editing from the keypad lon Operations Manual Deleting Palettes To delete color palette 1 press Delete Color Palette 1 Enter Enter When palettes are deleted any references in cues will be converted to absolute data Removing Channels from a Palette You can remove specific
227. esets can be used See Storing and Using Presets on page 129 Palette Types Intensity Palettes Intensity palettes can easily be created for use with all channels that have intensity parameter data Focus Palettes Focus palettes can be created for all channels that have pan and tilt functions Color Palettes Color palettes can be created for all channels that have any color parameter data Color palettes store any combination of color data including CMY RGB and HS settings color scrollers and color wheels You will find that Record Only filter settings and selective store commands will be very useful when storing color palettes Beam Palettes Beam palettes can be created for all channels that have any beam parameter data It is rare when storing beam palettes that you will wish to include all of the beam parameters for channels Therefore Record Only filters and selective store commands will be very useful when storing beam palettes lon Operations Manual Storing Palettes Live Palettes may be stored in live or blind There are a variety of methods for determining what data is stored into a palette but Record Record Only and using filters are the most common ways When Record is used lon will store the relevant parameter category data intensity focus color or beam for all channels that are not currently at their default value Record Only is a type of selective store that can be used to store onl
228. esets in blind 135 ranges for new fixture 85 scroller in patch 77 wheel in patch 77 effects about 228 absolute 237 programming 238 applying an existing 242 COlOF makaaasa oo ake estes 240 editing liVG sss aa edic uw eu 242 FOCUS ow eek Ee EE 239 liearas KAN shane dose A 240 relative ovo Na 239 CONOR AR 240 defining a pattern 241 1OCUS 2 245 oN EU 239 linear LME Te A NGA Nang 240 lon Operations Manual programming 241 status display 233 SIDE ade Ka ee KAG 234 programming 235 stopping 242 submasters 243 using Stop Effect 219 encoders about cias ene ER LE 46 color control 117 image control 116 LCD description 113 form control 116 Image of 113 locking ere eps 46 navigating 46 setting non intensity parameters 112 shutter control 117 using in blind 173 virtual opening 115 USCS rene normes 115 with scroller calibration 78 enter key using in syntax 5 Eos lon User Forums 8 ETC locations 3 ETC Technical Services 3 execute list 164 expanding displays 35 export CSV
229. esired field and enter the off state percentage 5 Adjust any of the effect details on the right side of the CIA by pressing the appropriate detail button and making changes see Effects Editor page 229 The cycle time is an aggregate of all of the timing in the effect and indicates how long it will take to make one full pass through the effect If the cycle time is modified by the keypad or the encoder it proportionally adjusts all of the timing within the effect EL Creating and Using Effects 235 236 Delete a step To delete a step from a step based effect specify the effect in the command line and press delete Effect 1 Step 4 Delete Enter Enter Effect 1 Step 4 Thru 8 Delete Enter Enter Insert a step To insert a step anywhere in the effect specify the step you wish the new step to be inserted before Effect 1 Step 4 Insert Enter Inserts a new step before step 4 If step four does not exist it also creates the steps necessary to have step 4 and then places a step ahead of it as well Inserted steps result in all succeeding steps to be bumped one place lower in the effect In the above example by inserting before step 4 step 4 would become step 5 step 5 would become 6 and so on The inserted step would become the new step 4 lon Operations Manual Absolute Effects Absolute effects are a listing of sequential actions that channels are to take They dif
230. eters to be stored in record targets When filters are deselected not highlighted they prohibit storing the associated parameters Note When storing show data applied filters are highlighted and allow the associated There is no difference between having all filters selected and having no filters selected default In either state all parameters are available for recording Record filters are applied from the CIA using the following buttons Filter button AIINPs E c Exit Ion Color Fami Wheel Shutter iy Power Off Console Select strobe gt Gobo n Scroller Frame a 1 Zoo gt gt Print CIA parameter aoe gt utities Position Gobo gt gt Record Target Lists buttons MSpeed Wow ES Virtual Controls Network 7 me H Tilt Magenta Frame a3 p s Intens Shutter Image Form intensity Focus Beam Parameter category buttons The parameter category buttons can be used to select filters as follows Intensity enables recording intensity data Focus enables recording pan and tilt Color enables recording color data Beam enables recording all beam data 184 lon Operations Manual To apply record filters by category Step 1 Click Filters in the top right corner of the parameter grid in the CIA The parameter buttons change to display filter selection Step 2 Click the parameter category button Intensity Focus Color Beam for the category you want to include in the record target All
231. eturns it to its default position Additionally the control keypad has a Home key The Home key on the control keypad is a channel level instruction meaning the entire luminaire will return to its home position unless you modify the instruction by selecting specific parameters or parameter categories The following examples illustrate use of these two keys both from the control keypad and the softkeys Home when pressed from the encoder LCD only the associated parameter of the selected channels will return to its home position 1 Home Enter homes all non intensity parameters of channel 1 When this command overrides playback data it results in a manual value for the associated parameters When this command is an override of only manual data it returns the parameters to their home position and removes the manual setting 1 Color Home Enter homes all of the color data for channel 1 You may also use the Color encoder page button for this command lon Operations Manual Min and Max Min and Max are displayed when the parameter is linear such as a shutter Use these keys to set a minimum and a maximum setting for a parameter Next and Last Next and Last are displayed when the parameter is segmented such as a fixed gobo or color wheel or a color scroller Use these keys to increment or decrement in full frames Mode The Mode key is provided to select different modes for the encoder wheel s
232. evel the defaults established in System Setup are used See Setup on page 93 Setting Cue Level Timing Unless you specify otherwise lon assigns default fade times to any cue you record Default timing is designated in Setup Cue level timing can be applied when a cue is recorded or can be added or modified later Following are some examples of record commands with cue level timing Record Cue 5 Time 9 Enter puts a time of 9 seconds on all parameter timing categories Record lt Cue gt 6 Time 3 Time 9 Enter specifies the intensity up focus color and beam times at 3 seconds and the down time at 9 seconds The first instance of Time is used for intensity up fade meaning intensity value is fading to a higher level than is previously set and the second instance of Time is used for intensity down fade time intensity values fading to a lower level than is previously set Record lt Cue gt 2 Time Enter resets time to default value If the cue is recorded with split time this command only resets the upfade time Record lt Cue gt 2 Time Time Enter resets the down intensity time to the default value Oc Note Unless FCB timing is specifically set it always defaults to the up fade time value Note If a cue is provided split fade times with no delay on either side and those times are later the same values the split time is cleared ELI Working
233. evice At 2 Next Enter finds the next available address range on universe 2 At 7 7 7 Next Enter finds the next available address after 777 At 9 Enter patches address 9 on the same universe that was last used Patching a Dimmer Tutorial Step 1 Step 2 To patch a dimmer you must first open the patch display You may open the patch display from the browser or by pressing Displays gt Patch Enter a channel number from the control keypad When typing any number from the control keypad and patch is in default channel mode channel is assumed and is placed on the command line Alternatively when patch is in address mode address is assumed and is placed on the command line Channel mode and address mode are toggled using the Format key in the patch display Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 You can also use the and Thru keys to make your channel selection 1 Thru 5 0 At 1 Enter patches channels 1 through 50 to addresses 1 through 50 sequentially Enter the DMX address or addresses You may press At and enter the DMX address using the control keypad The DMX address may be entered in standard format 1 0 2 5 Enter or by using port and offset 3 1 Enter Multiple addresses may be patched to a channel in a single command For example 1 0 At 1 0 5 2 0 5 3 0 5 Enter w
234. ew encoder information in a format more similar to Eos Virtual encoders can be opened on the display and manipulated with the mouse Color tiles gobos and other information can be viewed in the virtual encoder display Encoder buttons are more readily available to you from the virtual encoders as well To use the virtual encoders Step 1 Navigate to Browser gt Virtual Controls gt Encoder Step 2 Select Open as Primary Display in the CIA options The virtual encoders will open on the display Step 3 Manipulate the actual encoders and view the data available to you on the virtual encoder display Step 4 When you are done with the virtual encoders press Live or Blind to return to the normal display KI Basic Manual Control 115 116 Form Control Form a subcategory of Beam collects the parameters that affect the quality of the beam including the iris edge frost etc Shutter and Image are the other two subcategories of Beam When the Form encoder page button is selected the LED will illuminate and the encoders automatically populate with the Form parameters as specified in the show patch If there are more parameters in the show patch than will fit on the first page of the encoders press the Form button again to page through the remaining parameters in the category or press Form and a page number to jump to a specific page The form parameters may include Edge controls the hard and soft qua
235. ey have completed their last pass number of cycles or when they do not have enough time to make a final complete pass duration Immediate all channels exit the effect instantaneously Fade by Size when the effect is exited values will return to their background state while still running using the exit time Fade by Size and Rate when the effected is exited channels will stop running the effect and return to their background state using the exit time Stop and Fade when the effected is exited channels will stop running the effect and return to their background state using the exit time Stop and Hold when the effect is existed channels will halt exactly where the effect left them Time Entry or Exit These fields establish the length of time for channels to enter or exit the effect It can be entered in minutes and seconds from the keypad These timing values are applied to the entry and exit modes Cue level timing is the default for these Press Entry Time Enter or Exit Time Enter To reset to defaults press Time Enter EL Creating and Using Effects 231 Grouping Grouping is used only in relative and absolute effects This determines how channels currently running the effect will be grouped throughout the pattern To change this press Grouping and then enter the number of lights you want grouped together Grouping defaults to Spread This means that every light the effect is appl
236. ey or make a copy of an existing scroll or wheel by selecting the source then pressing the Copy softkey The editor does not limit how many frames you can add to the scroll or wheel for the selected fixtures Keep in mind that any fixture has its own limitations For example a Source Four Revolution color scroller is limited to 24 frames If you have created a custom color scroll with 30 frames the Source Four Revolution will only provide you access to the first 24 frames that you created This applies to wheels as well When using the editor the following softkeys are available for use Insert inserts a new frame above the selected frame Delete removes the selected frame Edit changes the selected frame Done completes the editing process Label displays the virtual PC keyboard on the CIA for labeling the new scroll or wheel Creating a new scroll or wheel When you create a new scroll or wheel New Wheel x appears in the wheel list as the selected button The frame list will be empty with only New displayed in frame 1 color wheel New Wheel 1 a AC iig Color Wheel Ka Ka Color Color Wheel 2 Wheel 3 Acme Color g Color Wheel 4 poea mer mer Color Color Wheel Wheel 2 Delete Edit Invert You can label the new wheel by pressing the Label softkey and typing the desired label on the virtual PC keyboard and pressing Enter To select a color or pattern for the specific frame in
237. eypad illuminates while the keys are in use and remains illuminated while the unit is transmitting data After a key is released the keypad will dim the backlight until the next button press or transmission Most of the buttons on the handheld remote function exactly as they work on the lon console A select few of the buttons require additional explanation More SK Mode When this button is pressed and released the soft keys will change to the next page of softkeys if there is more than one page available Press and hold the More SK Mode button to display the available RFR modes Enter Chan When the RFR is connected for use with an lon console this button functions as Enter which terminates the command line The first press of this button is at The second consecutive press is at level The third press is at Out S1 S6 These six buttons are softkeys defined by the operating mode and identified in the bottom portion of the LCD see below The first press of this button is The second consecutive press is P LCD General Layout Denis orcenage 5 The handheld remote LCD is divided into four sections The top section displays status for the selected target The middle section displays the command line This section scrolls to accommodate viewing long command S1 S2 S3 es 56 syntax The next section displays the console s mode status and error status if any The bo
238. eys exist This is because there is no way to predict what softkey page you are on at any given time Press lt More Softkeys gt until you find the required command References to other parts of the manual are indicated in italics When viewing this manual electronically click on the reference to jump to that section of the manual Note Notes are helpful hints and information that is supplemental to the main text CAUTION A Caution statement indicates situations where there may be undefined or unwanted consequences of an action potential for data loss or an equipment problem WARNING A Warning statement indicates situations where damage may occur people may be harmed or there are serious or dangerous consequences of an action Please email comments about this manual to TechComm etcconnect com lon Operations Manual Register Your lon Registering your lon system with ETC ensures that you will be notified of software and library updates as well as any product advisories When you register you will also be enrolled in My ETC a personalized ETC Web site that provides a more direct path of communication between you and ETC Register now at http www etcconnect com product registration asp Help from ETC Technical Services If you are having difficulties your most convenient resources are the references given in this user manual To search more widely try the ETC Web site at www etcconnect com If none
239. f any fader It allows you to define the fader target that a slider is assigned to Mapping is specific to the type of fader configuration playback submaster or grandmaster Submaster A maximum of 300 submasters can be recorded Mapped to defines the submaster number that will be controlled by the specified slider If a submaster slider is mapped to 10 when submaster 10 is recorded it will appear on that slider Grandmaster A maximum of 1 grandmaster may be assigned A grandmaster inhibits all live intensity values If the grandmaster is set at 50 all live intensities will be at 50 of their actual values Inhibited levels from the grandmaster do not impact data storage Playback A maximum of 200 playbacks can be assigned Mapped to allows you to have the same playback appear on multiple pages as it represents a playback number not a specific fader or cue list number To change the mapped location of any playback click the Mapped to button for that slider and enter the number you wish to assign to it Unmapped Selecting unmapped for any fader leaves that fader open and unoccupied lon Operations Manual Grandmasters submasters and playbacks may appear on more than one fader page In a partitioned control environment the mapping of the faders with the exception of the master fader is global Note Specifying a Mapped to location does not specify the cue list that will be loaded to that playback Cue lists ca
240. facturer LIND Patch Patch Press Displays gt Patch The LCD will change to display the patch interface pan Encoder ID Fields Command Line Softkeys Step 2 Select the channel you wish to patch e 9 7 Enter Step 3 Using the encoders directly above Manufacturer select the manufacturer of the fixture you want to patch Once the manufacturer is selected the fixtures available from that manufacturer automatically load to the Type encoder Note If you wish to patch a standard dimmer select Generic from the manufacturer list and Dimmer from the fixture list Or you can simply press the At key as in Patching a Dimmer page 64 and dimmer is assumed Step 4 Select the desired fixture type from those available from the manufacturer using the encoder above the Type field When the desired type is displayed press the Type encoder to select the displayed fixture type Step 5 Change the DMX universe if needed using the encoder above the Universe field Step 6 Set the address to the desired number using the encoder above the Address field KI Address number is shown as 1 512 with the network address displayed in parentheses When the proper address is shown press the encoder to select the address Your fixture is now patched 73 74 Using the Scroller Wheel Picker and Editor The scroller and wheel picker allows you to choose a specific scroll
241. fault to a circle You can clear this and draw your own shape by pressing Edit Clear and drawing on the graph with your finger or the mouse Press Apply when you are done Canned focus effects can be modified in the same manner The green arrow indicates default direction of motion which can be modified in attributes Focus Effect v Type Scale Entry Exit M Focus 37 Cascade Fade by Size Fade by Size Cycle Time uration Cycle 5 47 Infinite Parameters Attributes Time Time Pan Forward 1 1 Tilt JL Grouping Tal gt Spread Solo C EL Creating and Using Effects 239 Color Effects Color effects impact only color parameters Hue and saturation offsets can be used which are represented in the horizontal and vertical axes of the graph in the effects editor The Parameters key within a color effect displays the various color mechanisms used in any patched channels New color effects default to a circle You can clear this and draw your own shape by pressing Edit gt Clear and drawing on the graph with your finger or the mouse Press Apply when you are done Canned color effects can be modified in the same manner The green arrow indicates default direction of color shift which can be modified in attributes Color Effect Color Cascade Fade by Size Infinite Fade by Size Forward Spread Even a an Linear Effects A linear effect does not have to be parameter specific Rather it can simply
242. fer from step effects in that there is no on off state rather they define progressive behavior from one action to the next to the next and so on The best example of this is that palettes and presets can be used as actions in absolute effects Absolute effects differ from relative effects which are also progressive in that you are specifying exactly what actions you want the lights to take rather than mathematical offsets from the current state relative effects Absolute effects also do not contain an embedded channel list Therefore the effect must be applied to channels in order to be played back Absolute effects are displayed in a chart with the following columns e Action displays the action number Time the time for the action to fade in e Dwell the duration of the action before moving to the next action Level indicates either the level of the parameter specified in the effect or the referenced value for the channel s to perform Palette or preset as defined in the command line Type Scale Entry Exit Absolute n a Cascade Fade by Size Fade by Size er Time um nite Parameters Attributes Forward Action In Time Dwell Time Delete Insert Move To Absolute effect softkeys In the above image actions 1 4 indicate referenced values in the Level column palettes or presets though these values can be absolute data as well EL Creating and Using Effects Time Time ICE G T
243. ference override Manual changes have been made that override a previously stored reference such as to a palette or preset Once recorded the reference will be broken If updated the referenced target will be updated as well unless otherwise instructed uo M Lenis Bee nt Indicates a mark is placed but manual and must be stored Is blue when stored m indicates cue is not marking AA Indicates a cue is both a marking and reference cue when displayed in the mark flag AM os PIG NL tato pidi ek EN Indicates a dark move a cue that has any non intensity parameters moving on channels whose intensity is at 0 CS EE EE Indicates that a mark has been placed but the mark has been broken If possible lon will automark the lights lon Operations Manual Reference Marks and Timing Movement of non intensity parameters in conjunction with a mark will adhere to the following timing rules If discrete timing is used for non intensity parameters When channels execute a mark the moves will use the discrete time s assigned to them in the source cue For Example A mark is applied to Cue 5 making it the marked cue e Cue 5 Mark Enter Later channels 1 10 are assigned discrete timing and a mark instruction e 1 thru 1 0 Focus Time 8 Mark Enter Then those channels are recorded into Cue 10 e Record Cue 1 0 Enter In this instance when Cue 5 is executed channels 1 10 will perform their focus parame
244. ffects Snapshots DMX Patch View Cancel Focus Manne System Palette Settings Curves Cue List ES Managing Show Files 53 54 To reselect all show aspects press the Reset touchbutton and all buttons will return to gray selected To stop the show file from being saved to a PDF and return to the browser press the Cancel button When you have selected deselected all of the show aspects you require press the Ok touchbutton to create the PDF file You can also choose to print specific portions of show aspects To select this information press the Advanced button The touchbuttons at the center of the CIA will again represent all of the show aspects that you can choose By default all aspects will be deselected black Color Show Utilization OK Cues Presets Palette ets Control NG BEN Beam MIEL Palette Intensity Palette System Advanced ette Settings Groups N Selected Show Component As you select aspects they will be added to the table in the CIA For each component in the list you can specify the desired range by pressing the proper area in the table and entering numbers from the keypad The columns in the table are e List The list you are taking data from such as a cue list Start The first in a range of components such as a range of cues End The last in a range of components To deselect all show aspects press the Reset touchbutton and all buttons will return to black deselected
245. for the parameter you wish to store Step 3 Click the Filter button again to stop filter selection Filter On appears next to the parameter category label in the CIA To determine which parameter is filtered in the category Step1 Click the Filter button in the top right corner of the parameter grid in the CIA All actively filtered parameters are highlighted in grey You may need to click the arrow button in the grid for that parameter category to page to additional parameters in the category Filters are a toggle state To remove filters click Filter and then click the highlighted parameter buttons in the CIA to deactivate the filters For more information on filters see Using Filters page 183 ET Storing and Using Palettes 141 Recalling Palettes Palettes may be recalled from the control keypad or from direct selects When palettes are recalled all data is manual and will display in red Recalled palettes are applied only to selected channels therefore you must select channels before recalling a palette If a selected channel or parameter has no stored value in the recalled palette it remains in its current state Palettes on direct selects will grey out if they are not applicable for the current channel selection You can select all the channels included in a palette by pressing Group Palette x Enter You can also recall an entire palette by pressing Recall From Palette x Enter Recalled palettes wi
246. for users of the lon control system This chapter contains the following sections Using this Manual 2 Register Yourlon 3 Help from ETC Technical Services 3 Important Concepts 4 Other Reference Materials 8 Online Eos lon User Forums 8 Introduction 1 gt Using thi s Manual In order to be specific about where features and commands are found the following naming and text conventions will be used Facepanel buttons are indicated in bold brackets For example LIVE or Enter Optional keys are indicated in lt angle brackets gt for example lt Cue gt or lt Sub gt Browser menus menu items and commands you must perform are indicated in bold text For example In the File menu click Open Or Press Record Preset Enter Alphanumeric keyboard buttons are indicated in all CAPS For example TAB or CTRL Keys which are intended to be pressed or held simultaneously are indicated with the and symbol For example Load amp Timing Disable Softkeys and clickable buttons in the Central Information Area CIA are indicated in bold braces A note about lt More SK gt more softkeys this command is always indicated as optional and is only indicated once in an instruction regardless of how many pages of softk
247. g up Only lon Eos consoles and RPUs can be set to backup Client Any online lon that is not the primary or backup is a client Client data is sent and received over the network and clients will synchronize with a designated primary Offline Any lon controller that is disconnected from the lon network Changes to show data performed on an offline lon will not affect the rest of the lon network or the lighting system Master The lon that is currently sending control data to the lighting system is the master In most circumstances this is also the primary Should a primary fail and a backup takes control then the backup will be acting as the master Tracking Any console that is synchronized with a master is tracking Once a backup takes control it becomes a master and is no longer tracking User A user is an lon defined by a user ID If it has a unique user ID the lon will operate separate from other lon devices on the network but would still track show data If it shares a user ID lon will synchronize with like IDs See User D and multi console features page 310 System One primary lon one backup lon and if available multiple clients synchronized together EJ Multi console and Synchronized Backup 307 Multi console setup When using multiple lon consoles on the network you should adjust some of the settings of your devices to ensure optimal functionality 1 Note It is recommended that you perform the follow
248. ge of the cycle time Solo the first group will execute the entire pattern When done the second group will execute the entire pattern and so on Using Encoders with the Effect Editor When any effect is specified in the command line the encoder LCD automatically repaints to display the following properties Cycle Time Default is 5 seconds for relative effects Scale e Shape Vertical or Horizontal as defined by the Mode button Axis At any time you may use the encoders to adjust these properties within the effects editor for the specified effect lon Operations Manual Effect Status Display To view the effects currently running you may press Displays gt Effect Status to reveal the effect status display in the CIA This display shows you any currently running effects and gives you the ability to edit the effect while running When an effect is selected the encoders and encoder screen change to allow you to manipulate the effect according to rate size horizontal form vertical form and axis For Example To edit an effect select the effect using the command line or by clicking on the effect in the status display Effect 9 0 2 Enter The encoder screen repaints so that the encoders now control the five attributes in the columns of the effect status display e Rate modifies cycle time Default is 100 and can be modified from 0 2000 e Size modifies scale Default is 100 and can b
249. h a white underscore Cue 5 Block Enter B is displayed in the flags field indicating a cue level block When this cue is recalled all data that would otherwise appear as a tracked value will be displayed in white Any changes upstream in the cue list will not impact this blocked cue data Cue 6 Intensity Block Enter I is displayed in the flags field indicating a cue level intensity block At a Channel or Parameter Level Blocks can also be applied to a channel or a channel parameter This can be done in live or blind When applied in live the block instruction must be stored or updated to the appropriate cue 9 Block Enter applies a block to channel 9 A red B appears near the channel in the live display indicating a block has been applied but is not yet stored Group 5 Color Block Enter applies a block to all of the color parameters for group 5 When the block instruction has been stored or updated any tracked values the block was applied to will be displayed in white Channel level blocks and auto blocks are indicated in the cue list by a b representing a partial block lon Operations Manual Assert Assert is a way to make a tracked or blocked value act as a move instruction on playback It is often used in a multiple cue list environments or to assure that a transition happens in the desired time See Using Assert page 189 for more information on asserts in mu
250. h the exception of parking and unparking channel parameters or playing back cues If you try to control a channel that is not in your partition you must confirm that you want to control that channel You will not however be able to store information for that channel If you select a range of channels and set them to a level and some of those channels are not included in the partition you must confirm the command After which the command will be allowed on the channels not in the partition When you record a target cue preset palette only those channels that are partitioned to you are recorded Other programmers record actions to the same target can add to it they do not replace it unless channels are shared When shared the last value provided at the point of the record action will be stored Partitions in Playback In general partitions do not affect playback In lon how faders are configured and what is loaded to those faders is shared across all control devices When cues are played back from any console regardless of partitions that cue will be played back in its entirety This ensures that while partitions are used any user can activate a cue and all users will see that cue played back on the system To facilitate partitioned programming lon allows you to change the fader number of the master fader pair on any console This allows you to have different cue lists on the master fader pair of any consoles on the network Usi
251. he Learn key to enter and exit edit mode In edit mode the cursor in the macro content detail section of the display provides use of the arrow keys to navigate through the existing content list Use of the arrow keys will not be stored to the macro content To add content place the cursor in the section that you want to insert then add the command To delete a command place the cursor ahead of the content to be deleted then press the Delete softkey Press Select when you have completed all editing Press Escape to abort EZ Storing and Using Macros 269 Play a Macro You can play a macro from the command line from the direct selects run it from a linked cue or from another macro To play macro 5 from the command line press Macro 5 Enter Running Macro 5 displays above the command line in live while the macro is running To run macro 5 from the macro direct selects simply press Macro 5 Running Macro 5 displays above the command line in live while the macro is running To run macro 5 from cue 1 press Cue 1 Execute Macro 5 Enter If you would like to run multiple macros from cue 1 press Cue 1 Execute Macro 6 Enter Cue 1 Execute Macro 7 Enter Each macro has to be entered individually The previous example would result in macros 5 through 7 being executed from cue 1 To run a macro from another macro see the example under Create a New Macro from the Displa
252. he IEC connector on the rear of the console to turn power on This will provide power to all internal electronics Note You need to wait about 30 seconds between steps 2 and 3 Step 3 Press the power button located in the top left corner of the console above the USB port The button LED will illuminate blue to indicate the console is running The console will boot up into the lon environment The lon system is now ready for use In the future you may go straight to the welcome screen by adjusting a setting in the ECU See Show Welcome Screen page 297 in the ECU appendix Power Down the Console Step 1 Step 2 After saving your show see below in the browser menu select File gt Power Off Console A dialogue box opens asking you to confirm Confirm this command by clicking OK in the dialog box The console will power down Note lon is a persistent storage console Therefore if you shut down your system without saving the show file you will return to the same place in your show when you reboot EX System Basics 23 Your First Interaction When you first start up lon you will immediately enter the lon software environment A welcome window will greet you with a Let s Begin button visible on the screen Use your mouse to click on Let s Begin or you can press the Enter key Since lon can be set up with one or two monitors what you will first see depends partly upon the number of monitors you
253. he cue will display the absolute data rather than the reference indicator Update Break Nested This is used only when presets that have embedded palette data are modified in a cue If you wish to maintain the link to the preset but not impact the palette that was the source of the preset Update Break Nested can be used lon Operations Manual Using Cue Only Track The Cue Only Track key can be used as an applied exception to the cue only track system setting Therefore if the system is set to Cue Only the key behaves as a Track command Alternatively if the system is set to Track the key behaves as a Cue Only button For more information on Tracking vs Cue Only see Tracking vs Cue Only page 5 in Setup Cue Only Track can be used in conjunction with record or update functions Following are some examples of use same key hit of Cue Only Track a single button on the keypad The system setting determines the actual context of the button For clarity only the contextual function of the button is used in the examples Note In the following examples the commands Cue Only and Track indicate the With system set to Track Record Cue 5 Cue Only Enter Enter rerecords cue 5 This will make the changes to cue 5 only The changes will not track forward through the list Color Record Cue 5 Cue Only Enter Enter as above but changes to color parameters will not
254. he field if editable will highlight in gold Step 5 Enter the numbers using the keypad to specify the desired cues groups effects and so on Step 6 Press OK to load the components to the current show Printing a Show File lon provides you with the ability to save a show file or aspects from a show file to a PDF file for printing lon has three locations to save the PDF files including the Show File Archive the File Server if connected or a USB device if connected Saving the PDF file to a USB F device allows you to then print the PDF from a personal computer Printing directly from lon is not supported To save a PDF of an Ion show file navigate within the browser to File gt Print gt and press Select Browser File Exit lon Power Off Console Setup Clear Print v Print lo File Show File Archive gt AD STICK E Utilities Record Target Lists Virtual Controls This will open the printing screen in the CIA From this screen you can choose which aspects of the show file you want to save to PDF By default all aspects are selected gray and will be saved To withhold any show aspects from printing simply deselect them in the CIA by touching the respective button Deselected show aspects will appear in black Ces Color Praca Show Utilization Tracked Palette Control Reports Levels Beam Show Color Patel Submasters Fixtures Advanced zm Palette b Channels Printout Intensity Palette Summary Groups E
255. he record action Blue intensity has increased from the previous cue or a non intensity parameter has changed Green intensity level has decreased from the previous cue or a non intensity parameter has marked Magenta level has tracked from a previous cue White level has been blocked see Block page 162 Using Record When the Record button is pressed the keypad defaults to cue mode use of the Cue button is optional The following are representative examples of recording cues in Live Once the cue record has been specified cue attributes such as timing can be combined and entered in any order you wish Record Cue 5 Enter records all parameters of any channels with non default data into the specified cue number 5 Record Cue 5 Label name Enter records the specified cue and provides an alphanumeric label ELI Working with a Single Cue List 151 152 Using Record Only Record Only is similar to Record except that it selectively stores only manually set values preventing unwanted levels such as from a submaster or another cue list from being recorded into the cue Therefore when used to record a cue only the manual data for channels will be stored in the cue Any values in the previous cue that were unchanged will track into the new cue All of the same commands used for Record may also be used for Record Only Record Only Cue Next Enter stores only the
256. hen pressed again any applied filter will be removed To remove all filters at once Step 1 Press and hold Filters The parameter buttons change to display filter selection Clear Filters appears in the upper left corner of the parameter buttons Step 2 Press Clear Filters Any applied filters will be removed and the highlights will turn off Step 3 Release Filters The buttons return to their normal appearance All parameters are now available to record functions 13 Using Filters 185 186 Storing Data with Record Filters If a record target is stored with filters in place the filters allow only associated parameter data to be recorded in the target Non filtered data is not included when you record The various record targets are affected by filters in the following ways Palettes Palettes by definition are already filtered The color and beam filters can be used to further modify what is stored in the color and beam palettes however Presets Active filter settings impact what is stored in presets Cues Active filter settings impact what is stored in cues even when using record only commands Update Filter settings are ignored Recall From Recall from instructions are not affected by the filters lon Operations Manual Chapter 14 Working with Multiple Cue Lists lon provides many useful tools to allow you work efficiently and simultaneously with multiple cue lists This chapter
257. his only works when a single channel or address is selected on the RFR and then Next and Last is used In this mode the right thumbwheel will function as next and last commands and the left will function as the level wheel LE Remote Control 329 330 Live Mode Live mode is used for modifying levels and recording or updating cues This mode is intended to allow you to make basic adjustments to show data Buttons and softkeys function as they do within Eos lon The command line is displayed in the LCD to verify the commands you enter It also displays details for the currently selected channel or the current cue if no channels are selected Softkeys The following softkeys are available on page one of live mode which is designed to modify levels Home e Group Sneak Full Out RemDim The following softkeys are available on page two of live mode which is intended for recording or updating cues e Record Update Time e Cue only Track shown as Qoly Tk Trace e Macro In live mode the left thumbwheel controls the level of the selected channels The right thumbwheel acts as next and last buttons defaulting to next or last cue selection for the currently selected cue list lon Operations Manual Playback Mode Softkeys The following softkeys are available in playback mode e Sub LoadQ e Stop Bk e Macro e GotoQ Go Sub is used to set the level of a submaster Sub 5 7
258. ic data relating to the macro cue number and cue list that you wish to execute To trigger a macro Cue 1 Execute Macro 5 Enter triggers Macro 5 when cue 1 is executed To trigger cue lists press Cue 1 Execute Cue 4 lt gt 6 Enter Cue 1 Execute Cue 2 thru 5 Enter To trigger a specific cue on another fader Cue 4 Execute Cue 4 5 Enter When cue list triggers are set the system will automatically execute same numbered cues on the associated cue list For example assume that the last instruction above was applied to cue list 1 cue 1 When cue 1 1 is executed any cues numbered 1 in cue list 2 thru 5 will be executed accordingly If there is not a cue 1 in those lists no action is taken on them If there are cue numbers on secondary cue lists that are not in cue list 1 those cues are skipped and the subsequent cue taken as an out of sequence cue when triggered Therefore it is valuable to create dummy cues in the master cue list if needed to ensure that no cues on the secondary cue lists are skipped Removing a trigger To remove a trigger access the cue number and press Execute the record target type and press Enter Cue 5 Execute Cue Macro Enter lon Operations Manual Modifying Cues Live Recorded cues can be modified live Cue attributes such as link loop label and so on may be edited as well The cue does not
259. ically available to you see To navigate this list use the navigation keys as described in or select the effect number you wish to work with Notice that when you select the effect list the CIA changes to display the information for the currently selected effect Effect Label Exit Dur Cyc Immediate Infinite Immediate Infinite Immediate Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite Focus C de Immediate Infinite Focus C de Immediate Infinite r Smooth Linear C de Immediate Infinite r Fade Linear Linear C de Infinite Linear Casca ned Infinite Linear Casca mmed Infinite Infinite Linear C de mm Infinite Linear de Immediate Infinite 228 lon Operations Manual Effects Editor When viewing the effect list the selected effect is displayed in the CIA The effect properties and attributes are shown in categorized buttons in the CIA To change any property or attribute press the corresponding button and enter data as required The properties display of the effects editor is shown below and definitions of properties follow Type Scale Entry Exit Focus 25 Cascade Fade by Size Fade by Size Cycle Time uration Cycle 5 Infinite Parameters Attributes Time Time Pan Forward 1 1 Grouping Trail Spread Even Type Defines the effect type step based absolute or relative linear focus or color To change the type press Type and then press the desired effect type in the buttons to
260. ice For example consoles and RPUs are likely candidates for working with a unique user ID while RVIs and client PCs can be useful sharing an ID with another device to track programming information from a second location Eos lon devices sharing User IDs will share certain data while those with different IDs will not Below are the differences in multi console data depending on User ID Data shared between Eos lon devices with the same User ID command line null channels in live e selected channels filters e selected cue ive blind mode setup desk settings Data specific to the Eos lon device regardless of User ID current slider page current encoder page focus on displays without command line display configuration layout format visible parameters flexichannel paging without changing selected target or channels Data identical between all Eos lon devices regardless of User ID all stage levels and edits all data stored in the show file e playback sub and grandmaster contents and progress The default User ID for any Eos lon device is 1 You may change this based on your preference to allow restrict the functionality described above Assigning User ID User ID can be defined in setup see Displays page 103 When multiple programmers are working on an lon system partitioned control can be used to restrict a specific user s access to certain channels This can help avoid overlapping control of channel
261. ied to will act as an individual element moving through the effect sequentially based on the channel selection order cycle time and trail times You can enter any number you require A grouping of 2 means that every other light in the selection list when the effect is applied will move together through the effect Grouping of three means every third light and so on Your options are 1 29 or Spread which will distribute each channel in the effect evenly and treat it as a separate group e Grouping 2 every other channel in a range of channels will be grouped when running the effect When an effect is applied to a group in live that group is distributed by order using this grouping function If a group list is created and an effect applied each group is considered an individual element within the effect Trail Trail is applicable to relative and absolute effects Trail determines how channels are to follow each other through the effect it is a percentage of the cycle time Trail can be any value from 0 100 even or solo The default is even For example Even the groups will be distributed evenly throughout the pattern This is calculated by dividing the cycle time of the effect by the number of groups of channels 10 90 when the first group is 10 through the effect the second group will start the effect and so on through the remaining groups Therefore the groups will trail n behind each other as a percenta
262. igure To restore the default buttons at any time click the Restore Defaults button To import a button configuration You may import an RPU button configuration file from a USB device Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Click the Import button in the RPU section of the ECU The RPU will search for valid RPU button file If a valid file is found the ECU will ask you if you want to import the settings Click Yes The settings will be imported Click Ok To export a button configuration You may export your RPU button configuration to a USB device Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Click the Export button in the RPU section of the ECU If a USB drive is available the ECU will ask you to choose the desired drive from the drop down menu Click on the desired USB drive Click Accept The button configuration will be saved to the USB drive Click Ok For more information on settings in the ECU please see Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell page 293 KE Remote Processor Unit RPU 317 318 Basic Use Guidelines Displays The RPU can be used with either one or two DVI monitors You can collapse or expand the CIA on the displays by engaging the scroll lock and pressing F5 If you are using one monitor you may find this feature useful in increasing the efficiency of your available display area Net3 Services By default both lon and the lon RPU ship with all Net3 services enabled When used in a multi co
263. ind When working in live the selected cue is always the last cue you recorded edited updated or played back When entering blind for cues the selected cue will be selected and displayed Changing the selected cue in blind will cause the playback status display to change as well unless preserve blind cue has been enabled in Setup allowing you to see all the attributes of the cues surrounding the selected cue When you return to live the selected cue is synchronized to the last selected cue in that mode When in Live or Blind if you press Live or Blind respectively the selected cue will set to the last executed cue This cue will appear on the command line The attributes of the selected cue such as timing attributes label and external links are shown at the bottom of the live blind display below the command line Flags Attributes Bear MBAH Fwtig Link In Live To load a new cue to the faders select the cue on the command line press Enter and then press Load When the Go button is pressed the activated cue will be the selected cue For Example Assume cue list 1 is currently loaded to the master fader pair To load cue 2 1 e Cue 2 1 Enter Load Cue 2 1 will load to the pending file of the master fader pair In this example the last cue executed from cue list 1 is still the active cue while cue 2 1 is pending When Go is pressed 2 1 will be executed You can also load cue list 2 by pressi
264. ine BLIND Group x is displayed The following actions are now possible Label name Enter adds or modifies a group label Copy To Group 7 Enter copies the contents of the selected group to group 7 2 Insert Before 9 Enter inserts channel 2 into the group placing it before channel 9 in the ordered view 2 Insert After 5 Enter inserts channel 2 into the group placing it after channel 5 in the ordered view 2 Delete Enter removes channel 2 from the group Random Enter rearranges the channels in the group randomly Reverse Enter reverses the order of the channels within the group lon Operations Manual Using Groups as a Channel Collector Group can be used as a quick way to collect channels from submasters cues palettes or presets The following actions are possible Group Cue 1 selects all the channels in cue 1 Group Sub 3 selects all the channels in submaster 3 Group Int Palette 5 selects all the channels in intensity palette 5 KI Using Groups 91 92 lon Operations Manual Chapter 7 Setup This chapter describes the processes involved in changing your system settings to meet your preferences It also covers advanced setup functions This chapter contains the following sections Opening Setup 94 DROW o oooi Din bedi md ebbe cd iesu Sta ser as 94 A RAR 100
265. ine to the cloth and repeat the process until clean KU System Overview 13 Console Capacities Output Parameters 1 024 outputs DMX channels or 1 536 outputs DMX channels or 2 048 outputs DMX channels Channel Counts 10 000 channels Cues and Cue Lists Up to 999 cue lists Up to 10 000 cues Record Targets 1 000 Groups 1 000 x 4 Palettes Intensity Focus Color and Beam 1 000 Presets 1 000 Effects 1 000 Macros Faders 1 dedicated Master Playback with Go and Stop Back a maximum of 200 configurable playbacks with Go and Stop Back e amaximum of 300 configurable submasters with Bump and Assert Select lon Operations Manual Outputting DMX In order to output control levels from lon you can either use the DMX ports on the back of the console see Local DMX page 305 in the ECU appendix or you may connect a Net3 gateway or Net2 node If your device receives Net3 or ETCNet2 directly no gateway or node is required Nodes and gateways must be given an IP address before they can function with lon This may require using NCE Network Configuration Editor or GCE Gateway Configuration Editor and a Windows PC to configure the gateways or nodes The NCE or GCE Software CD and related user manuals and setup guides were packaged with your gateway or node Use these materials to prepare them for use with lon For more information on Net3 gateways or Net2 nodes see the product literature that ac
266. ing You can patch channels in lon to accomodate for dimmer doubling with Sensor dimmer racks This is done using the softkeys available in patch No Dim Dbl A and B For Example Let s assume you patch 96 channels of dimmers to addresses 1 96 1 Thru 9 6 At 1 Enter Now you wish to dimmer double 1 12 of your Sensor rack and you want these to be channels 97 108 To patch this press 9 7 Thru 1 0 8 At 1 B Enter Channels 97 108 are patched to address 1 12 B while channels 1 12 are now patched to address 1 12 A To remove the dimmer doubling from these addresses you must first press Format to enter Address mode and then press e 1 Thru 1 2 NoDimDbl Enter Addresses 1 12 have been returned to single dimmer modes and channels 97 108 are now deleted By default doubled dimmers start with an offset DMX address value of 20000 Therefore in the above example address 1B channel 97 is actually controlled by DMX address 20001 Address 2B is actually controlled by DMX address 20002 and so on This offset matches the default offset in CEM when configuring your Sensor dimmer rack for dimmer doubling To change the default offset value see Show Settings page 95 Moving and Copying Channels Channels can be moved from one location to another within patch 1 Copy To Copy To 7 Enter The second press of the Copy To key changes the command into a Move To This syn
267. ing setting changes before connecting your lon device s to the network After the changes are complete connect to the network and reboot the device Designate Primary By default all lon devices will boot as a primary When using multiple devices on the network only one should be designated as a primary Other devices should be configured as the backup only one per system or clients There can be a maximum of 12 lon devices connected to a master To change this setting you must exit the lon software Browser gt Exit lon and then designate the device as primary backup or client as described in the ECU appendix see Starting Screen page 294 DHCP Server DHCP server supplies IP addresses to network devices Only one lon device typically the Primary on the network is necessary to do this properly Therefore you should disable the DHCP server on all devices except for the intended primary To disable the DHCP server on your device see lon IP Settings page 301 Change Device Name To easily identify your lon on the network change the device name to be representative of the device such as Booth Primary or Tech Backup This is done in General Settings page 296 Backup Auto Switch Switches to the backup automatically if the primary should go offline This is enabled in Backup Auto Switch page 297 308 lon Operations Manual Change IP Address All lon consoles by default have the same static IP address All lon RPU
268. ion Address number displayed as straight address and port offset Dimmer label if any Associated channel number which is a hyperlink to the About channel display Part number if any Notes e Output value ACN Net2 ArtNet Avab UDP or DMX Current output value and source of output e Parameter controlled by the address Home Value Basic patch information e Extended patch information if available e If it is a scroller color gobo wheel the assigned scroll or wheel is indicated Next Part amp Last Part will advance to the next part or go back to the previous part These buttons only display for addresses with parts Go To Patch is a shortcut to edit the patch for the address selected This will open up the patch display Lamp Controls displays controls for the lamp or other parameters of the device if it is a moving light Address Check will bring current address to full Next Last Unpatched will allow you to see what addresses closest to the current address are currently unpatched lon Operations Manual Sensor AF appears when the current address is patched to a dimmer in an ETC Sensor rack Sensor feedback must be enabled See Enable Sensor Feedback page 301 for more information Note For Sensor feedback the CEM must be running software version 3 0 or later Sensor AF displays the following information e Sensor dimmer name Dimmer module type Rack Pos
269. ional preset editing features you have while editing in spreadsheet view Preset 1 thru 5 Move To lt Preset gt 9 thru Enter this will move presets 1 5 to presets 9 14 respectively You do not have to supply the end value for lon to perform the move If presets 9 14 already exist you will be asked to confirm this move Preset 1 Thru 5 Enter Iris 5 0 Replace With Iris 2 5 Enter for presets 1 5 this command will replace any iris parameter values of 50 with values of 25 This range editing using Replace With can only be done in spreadsheet view Deleting Presets You may delete presets in the following ways Delete Preset 1 Enter Delete Preset 1 Thru 5 Enter Presets can be deleted from any screen at any time A confirmation is required to delete unless confirmations have been disabled in Setup Removing Channels from a Preset You can remove specific channels from a preset This can only be done from blind For Example Open the preset in blind Blind amp Preset Select the preset you wish to edit e Preset 5 Enter Remove channels by pressing 2 4 6 Thru 9 At Enter Or you can remove a specific channel parameter from the preset by pressing 5 7 Color At Enter You may also remove a channel or parameter from a range of presets by pressing Preset 1 Thru 5 Enter 1 Color At Enter You can remove
270. is indicates that the console is ready to record the macro 264 Note It is helpful if you plan your macro content in advance of the macro record process While in learn mode each button press is recorded as content even the Clear button if you have mistaken a keystroke There is no way to fix a content error in live mode but you can rerecord the macro as needed or you can edit the recorded macro in the macro editor removing any unneeded commands See Edit an Existing Macro on page 269 lon Operations Manual Begin writing the sequence of button presses and events for the macro record When you have finished with the series of events and button presses press the Learn key again to exit macro learn mode Examples of a macro record function include Learn 1 Enter Go To Cue Out Time 0 Enter Learn records macro 1 with the go to cue out command Learn 5 Enter 1 Full Chan Check Enter Learn records macro 5 with channel 1 at full in channel check mode To check the next channel in the list press Next Learn 4 Enter Sub Record Learn records macro 4 with instructions to record a target excluding all submaster data Learn 2 Enter Group 6 Color Record Learn records macro 2 with instructions to record a target excluding the color data from group 6 You can also create a macro in live that bumps submasters across fader pages but first you mu
271. ition e Rack dimmer level displayed as a percentage e Rack dimmer source Sensor AF displays the following information which can be modified from lon Mode Curve Threshold e Scale Minimum Scale Maximum Preheat Preheat Timing Advanced Features AF The following buttons will also be displayed Set Dimmer sets that dimmer to an intensity Unset Dimmer unsets a dimmer Clear Errors clears any dimmer errors that are present for that address Note Clearing CEM errors from lon will be temporary unless the errors have been fixed at the CEM Errors displayed on lon will clear on their own once they have been cleared from the CEM Some CEM errors can only be cleared at the CEM EJ Using About 251 Device Details appears when the current address is patched to a RDM device RDM devices must be enabled through the ECM and discovered through the patch See Enable RDM page 301 and Patch Display and Settings page 68 Device Details displays the following information and allows some changes to be made to Note Changes may take a few seconds to take effect They will propagate to the RDM device and then back to the console s patch and about displays Device Label displayed at the top by the address number DMX Address can be changed in this display by clicking on the property or value Note Changing the address can not cause any part of the fixture to move to a differe
272. ity palette press 1 Thru 5 Make Absolute Enter e Update Cue 1 Part 2 Enter To update cue 1 part 2 and the referenced palette with the new levels e 1 Thru 5 Intensity Update Cue 1 Part 2 Enter For Example When cue 2 is active select channels 1 through 5 and set new levels for the color scrollers Update only part 4 of the multipart cue 2 with the new scroller levels e 1 Thru 5 Scroller Update Part 4 Enter lon Operations Manual Storing a Multipart Cue in Blind Note Edits in blind take effect immediately they do not require a Record or Update command Changing a Single Part Cue to a Multipart Cue When working in blind more often than not you will be breaking a single part cue into a multipart cue It is quite possible to create a new cue in blind and follow the exact same process except in addition to pulling channel parameters into parts you will also be providing them with move instructions or block commands It is worth noting that tracked instructions do not belong to any specific part of a multipart cue Select the cue you wish to break apart and specify the first part you wish to create Part 1 is generally where the body of the cue resides Therefore if you specify any part other than part 1 all of the move instructions in the cue are placed in part 1 Begin by selecting any channels that you wish to move into some part other than part 1
273. ive and from the park display Park Display You can access the park display by pressing Park Park or Blind amp Park The park display shows all parked channels and parameter values on the top half of the screen and all parked addresses dimmers on the bottom half of the screen Parked channels displayed on the top of the screen can be displayed in the summary table and packed table views seen in the live blind display by using the Format key When a channel intensity is parked the parked value will be indicated in white text When a channel has a non intensity parameter that is parked that parameter will also be indicated with white text The display also provides detail of which user parked the channel or parameter when multiple users are on the system When an address is parked it will appear in the bottom half of the park display The address parked value affected channels and parameters are indicated lon Operations Manual Parked Values in Live Channels and parameters may be parked and unparked from the live display Following are some examples To park a channel parameter or group from live 2 At 5 0 Park Enter parks channel 2 intensity at 50 2 Intensity Park Enter parks the intensity of channel 2 at its current value 2 Park Enter parks all parameters of channel 2 at their current settings Note If a channel list is constructed in which some channels are parke
274. k 218 discrete 158 Go ToCue 213 manual control of in playback 216 setting for parameter categories 156 time navigation key 39 time code 280 MIDIGG oie MALA seed dut 98 SMPTE 98 timing disable in playback 218 trace with update 170 Track mode deleting cues in 174 trackball 115 U undo command history 201 using iine 201 unpatch a channel 65 break nested references With dad s tes dt ru es 167 update cues using Cue Only Track 169 without references 168 current CUe 170 dialogue box 167 fixture library in show file 85 groups in live 89 inactive cues 170 options 167 palette 143 presets 133 references in CUES 168 Source CUE 170 submasters 260 using trace 170 update dialogue box 167 user data between different IDs 288 ID about 288 assigning 288 relation to data sharing 288 multiple 287 user ID relation to data sharing 310 with multiconsole 310 V View spreadsheet in blind 45 table as astute asso 44 virt
275. k Enter sets a scaled value for channel 3 Whenever channel 3 is active it will playback 1596 lower than its current setting Remove the scaled parked value 3 At Park Enter unparks a scaled intensity for channel 3 Park Enter unparks all parked channels A channel can have both a scaled parked value and a parked intensity value Keep in mind that the parked intensity has priority over and overrides scaled park values A channel can have a parked value or a scaled park value but not both Parked Addresses in Live DMX addresses can be parked in Live When in live an Address softkey exists beneath the CIA Below are some examples of parking an address in live Address 5 At 5 0 Park Enter parks output 5 at 50 intensity Address 5 Park Enter unparks output 5 A confirmation will be required Address Park Enter unparks all parked outputs A confirmation will be required lon Operations Manual Park Values from the Park Display You can park and unpark channel parameters or addresses from the park display Open the display by pressing Park Park or Blind amp Park While in this display it is assumed that you want to park channels or parameters therefore the use of the Park key is not necessary when parking but is required for unparking Following are examples for parking channel parameters from the park display 3 At 4 5 Enter parks channel
276. k Status Display The default for this setting is Disabled Setup 103 104 PDF File Settings This screen allows you to select the orientation and paper type for PDF files LCD Settings This screen allows you to adjust the brightness and contrast settings for the lon LCD and the fader wing LCDs Fader Wing Config This screen allows you to manually configure the positions of fader wings connected to the lon The console will default to configuring the wings on its own To manually configure you must click on the Manual Config Off softkey Record In Fader Wing Config Defaults Settings Manual Fader Wing Manual Control Config Config Off RFR Face Panel Settings Face Panel Keypad Displays PDF File Settings Clicking on the Manual Config Off button turns manual configuration on and displays the Fader Wing Configuration screen Record Ke Defaults Settings Manual Fader Wing Reset Control Config Face Panel e MAL Settings Config On Face Panel EE identi Keypad Erud Displays PDF File Settings lon Operations Manual Clicking Identify will display numbers on each wing s display to aid in configuration The numbers do not identify the wings as to their actual order Order is determined from left to right The left most wing will contain the first faders unless a 1x20 wing is attached A 1x20 will always contain the first faders regardless of other wings to the left
277. ks LW Acc Factor Encoder d T Factor Freq Defaults EE Freq Length Freq Length Jo AAAA ee ee Control F RFR mr Settings aag me aa C E Displays CC aga Pd E E Turn ET PDF File Settings pee Reset Sounds You can adjust the frequency and length of the audible sounds that lon delivers Sounds are qualified as being either an error sound or an advisory sound Both types of sounds can be adjusted from this setup screen in the CIA To adjust a sound move the virtual slider with the mouse on the CIA To hear the result of your adjustment click the Test button respective to the sound type located beneath the sliders To turn off all sounds completely error and advisory alike click the Turn Sounds Off button The sound area will then be replaced with a Turn Sounds On button which can be pressed to reactivate audible signals in lon Level Wheel You can adjust the increment and acceleration effect of the level wheel from this screen as well To alter the number of ticks in a full turn of the level wheel adjust the slider labeled LW ticks This will increase or decrease the amount of change effected when you use the level wheel A higher tick setting will increase the amount of change resulting from one turn while lower settings will decrease the amount making smaller adjustments easier to perform The options range from 50 255 ticks The default is 150 lon also provides an adjustable acceler
278. l of those ways Creating a New Multipart Cue in Live Build part by part Make desired changes to the stage state If all of the changes that you have made are to go into a part press Record Only Cue 2 Part 1 Enter Continue making changes and storing parts as you go Build parts from cue end state In most instances you will create the end state of the cue and then break it into parts To do this you use selective storing commands as follows channel or parameter selection Record or Record Only n Part a Enter channel or parameter selection Record or Record Only Part b Enter Each part can contain its own cue level timing and other attributes Follow Hang Link and Loop and Allfade commands can be placed at the cue level only they cannot be placed on a part Also through the channel selection you can put channel parameters into different parts Part 1 of any multipart cue is where all unassigned move instructions will reside Therefore if the body of the cue which is the normal behavior is to be in part 1 you can simply select the channel or parameter list that you wish to place in parts 2 and higher lon Operations Manual Setting Multipart Cue Attributes Cue attributes such as Time Delay Block Assert Label Rate Mark and AutoMark Off can be assigned in part cues They are stored and function exactly as they do in single part cues Cue part attrib
279. l lon consoles and clients connected to the system Num of Channels You may use this field to set the number of channels in your lon to the number of channels in your system lon supports a maximum of 10 000 channels Enter the number of channels for your system using the keypad This entry must be confirmed with the Enter key Auto Mark This toggles the AutoMark settings between enabled and disabled see Using Mark page 175 for more information AutoMark is disabled by default Dimmer Double Offset This allows you to set the address offset for dimmer doubling The default for this is 20000 to match the Net2 standard offset including Sensor software Partitioned Control Enables or disables the assigning of partitions Default is Disabled see Using Partitioned Control page 289 for more information Home Preset Allows you to specify a preset that will be used as the home level for all non intensity parameters stored in the preset instead of the fixture library defaults This preset will be applied for all Go to Cue Out and home commands Intensity values in the preset will be ignored Channels not included in the assigned home preset will continue to home to their library defaults Cue Settings This screen allows you to set the default cue times for the parameter categories of your lon system To change a time click the parameter category button in the CIA and enter the desired time on the keypad To set a
280. l put the console in offline mode and will not interact on the network with other devices Clicking Shutdown will shutdown the lon console after a confirmation This is the starting screen of the utility From here you can choose to boot the console in one of several different modes change various settings or shutdown the console Primary This is the mode for using a single console on a network On a system with multiple consoles the primary is the console that client and backup consoles synchronize with making it the source of all information a client or backup console sees on the network Primary mode can be run on Eos lon and RPUs Remote Processor Unit Client A device set to client mode can act as a remote controller or remote video station for a system A client device cannot output to the lighting system Only a primary or backup processor can do this User ID determines some interaction between the client and the primary console If the client and the primary console have the same User ID they will act as one If they have different User IDs they will have separate command lines Client mode can run on Eos lon RPUs RVIs and personal computers with the client dongle 294 lon Operations Manual Backup Backup mode requires a primary console be online to synchronize Once this is done a backup console intakes all show data for use in the event that it needs to assume control of the lighting
281. lettes with Record Only on page 140 When a palette is created the channels and the parameters involved in the record action are automatically set to the palette reference CP 4 in this instance To view the absolute data for those channels press and hold the Data key The following methods can be used to store palettes using Record Record Color Palette 1 stores all color parameter data to color palette 1 and deposits it to the first color palette direct select Record Focus Palette 2 Label lt name gt Enter records focus parameter data for all channels not at their default state and adds a label to focus palette 2 Record Color Palette Next Enter records data to the next sequential color palette number 5 Record Beam Palette Next Label lt name gt Enter stores to the next sequential beam palette withholding the group or channels specified and adds a label EU Storing and Using Palettes 139 Selective Storing Palettes with Record Palettes can also be created using selective storing which allows you to specify only the channels and or parameters that you want to store The following examples illustrate various methods of selectively storing palettes using Record 1 thru 3 Record Intensity Palette 2 Label lt name gt Enter records the intensity data for selected channels 1 through 3 and adds a label to intensity palette 2
282. lic Domain or from the Copyright Holder A Package modified in such a way shall still be considered the Standard Version 3 You may otherwise modify your copy of this Package in any way provided that you insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how and when you changed that file and provided that you do at least ONE of the following a place your modifications in the Public Domain or otherwise make them Freely Available such as by posting said modifications to Usenet or an equivalent medium or placing the modifications on a major archive site such as ftp uu net or by allowing the Copyright Holder to include your modifications in the Standard Version of the Package b use the modified Package only within your corporation or organization c rename any non standard executables so the names do not conflict with standard executables which must also be provided and provide a separate manual page for each non standard executable that clearly documents how it differs from the Standard Version d make other distribution arrangements with the Copyright Holder 4 You may distribute the programs of this Package in object code or executable form provided that you do at least ONE of the following a distribute a Standard Version of the executables and library files together with instructions in the manual page or equivalent on where to get the Standard Version b accompany the distribution with the machine readable sourc
283. list Sneak Enter releases manual control setting parameters to their background state If there are current values for those parameters from a playback those are the values that will be restored If there are no values from a playback the parameters are set to home or default position channel list Color Sneak Enter sneaks color of the selected channels to the default or background state Sneak Enter when no channels are selected restores all channels with manual values to their background state Sneak Sneak puts AIINPs Sneak on the command line which sneaks out all non intensity parameters Sneak Sneak is a self terminating command Sneak Time 3 Enter restores all channels with manual values to their background state in 3 seconds Group 5 Color Palette 9 Sneak Enter selects group 5 and sneaks it to color palette 9 using default sneak time Group 3 at Color Palette 1 Sneak Time 7 Enter selects group 3 and sneaks it to color palette 1 in 7 seconds Sub 4 At 5 0 Sneak 2 Enter selects submaster 4 and sneaks it to 50 in 2 seconds Note When recalling a reference from the direct selects to use with the sneak command the sneak command has to be entered before the reference 126 Chan 1 Sneak Preset 1 selects channel 1 and sneaks itto preset 1 using default sneak time Chan 2 Sneak lt Time gt 2 Intensity
284. lities of a spot luminaire While some fixtures may call this parameter focus it is always represented as edge in lon to avoid confusion with Focus which refers to pan and tilt data The edge encoder provides two buttons Hard and Soft which set the selected luminaire to its hardest sharpest edge or its softest edge These values are set to the system default value for the selected luminaire but may be modified as required on a per fixture basis Iris Zoom Strobe and IMF each parameter has in out narrow wide or fast slow settings Iris and Zoom also have programmable limits called in out and narrow wide respectively The strobe mode setting varies based on the fixture type Image Control Image is the collection of parameters that affect the contents of the beam gobo prism effects wheel etc lon Operations Manual Shutter Control Pressing the Shutter button displays shutter controls if there are any fixtures with framing devices patched Press the Shutter button again to access the additional shutter controls available to the specific channel Color Control Depending upon the specific device color can be established manually with the encoders using CMY color mixing Hue and saturation color mixing RGB color mixing Selection from a color wheel or scroller You may also specify color by using the hue and saturation HS color picker and gel picker Itis also possible to set non intensity
285. ll acts as an ignore instruction in live not a remove instruction When channel data is nulled the values for that data in the live display turn grey and an N appears next to the data field Make Null differs from park in that you can still manipulate data onstage through manual control or through playback but that data will be unavailable for record actions Some examples of using Make Null in live are 1 Thru 5 Make Null Enter converts all parameters of channels 1 5 into null data 2 Color Make Null Enter changes only color data for channel 2 to null data 9 Thru 5 Pan Make Null Enter changes only the pan data for channels 5 9 to null Null instructions are lifted in two different ways First as Make Null is a toggle state it is possible to reselect the channel and parameter followed by Make Null Enter This lifts the null state Additionally a Go To Cue instruction will remove the null state In Blind When applied in blind Make Null can be used to mask instructions in a cue after it has already been stored A Make Null instruction can also be applied to channels or parameters in palettes presets and submasters thereby removing the data from the target entirely in the same way that At Enter does When applied to channels or parameters in cues Make Null doesn t remove the data from the cue it simply makes it unavailable for playback It has the same effect
286. ll alphanumeric will pop up to E A ion UR provide a data entry method even without a o B B Ce a g g Bj B E keyboard connected to the console 27 Bono If you do have a USB keyboard attached you Tel E i can use either keyboard for the data entry Device Name This specifies the name the lon console will use to identify itself on the network to other devices Examples might be Booth Console and Tech Table Time The time the console is using This can be set manually direct data entry or via SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol time service Please see Network Settings page 299 for more information The time is displayed in a 24 hour format as HH MM SS Date The date the console is using This can be set manually direct data entry or via SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol time service Please see Network Settings page 299 for more information The time is displayed as MM DD YYYY Time Zone The time zone the console is using This is an offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT Each setting in the pull down list displays the offset the name of the time zone and a couple of cities in that time zone Language Allows you to select the display language of lon Choices are English German French Spanish Turkish Italian Russian Japanese and Chinese lon Operations Manual Keyboard Allows you to select the language for the alphanumeric keyboard within lon Options are English German Italian Swiss
287. ll appear as manual data for the specified channels That data will appear as abbreviations of the palette type IP3 Intensity Palette 3 FP8 Focus Palette 8 and so on or as the palette label as defined in the displays settings see Setup page 93 To see the numeric values behind any palette or other referenced value press and hold the Data key When palettes are recalled channels with stored data in the palette will follow that data according to manual time settings Palettes may also be recalled using the sneak feature with default sneak time or a time specified using the Time key For Example Select channels 1 through 8 at intensity level 45 and sneak into color palette 4 over 40 seconds e 1 thru 8 at 4 5 Sneak 4 0 Color Palette 4 Enter You will notice channels 1 through 8 intensity and color parameters sneaking to the required values over a period of 40 seconds You may also use groups to recall palettes For example e Group 1 1 Beam Palette 5 Enter e Group 5 Color Palette 6 Palettes may also be recalled from the direct selects which automatically terminates the command line To recall only specific parameters of a palette select channels and the required parameters or those not required using the key in the command line The following are methods that can be used to recall palettes selected channels direct select recalls the associated IFCB palette data
288. ll show channels any channels that have data stored in a cue or submaster Active channels channels with intensity above zero or a move instruction Selected channels In flexi mode any selected channels including the last channel selection are always included in the view Gaps in channel numbers are indicated by a vertical line between the channels where a gap in numbering occurs To change flexi modes in the live blind display press Flexi to cycle through the views listed above When Flexi is held down the softkeys change to represent all of the available flexi states You can select the desired flexi view from those keys Next Last can be used to select the next or last channel in the current flexi mode Thru can be used to view only channels in the current flexi mode except for selected channels mode as long as either the first or last channel in the Thru range is included in the current flexi mode To include channels not in the current flexi mode Thru Thru can be used Flexichannel with Timing You may also engage a Channels with Timing flexichannel state by pressing Time amp Flexi This will display all channels that have discrete timing in the current cue and will remove channels without discrete timing from view You may still press Time to view the discrete time behind any parameter or category The display will remain in this state until you disengage it by pressing Time amp Flexi again
289. lled intensities will be faded toward zero To toggle a submaster between a Proportional or I Master fader e Sub 8 Fader Enter EX Storing and Using Submasters 257 HTP vs LTP Submasters can be set to be either Highest Takes Precedence HTP or Latest Takes Precedence LTP This setting is applied to intensity only Non intensity parameters are always LTP lon defaults all submasters to HTP For more information on HTP and LTP see HTP vs LTP page 7 To toggle a submaster between HTP and LTP Sub 6 HTP LTP Enter Exclusive Submasters Submasters can be placed in exclusive mode This prohibits storing the contribution of the submaster into any record targets In essence this acts as a fixed Sub Record command To place a submaster in exclusive mode e Sub 5 Exclusive Enter Independent You can also set a submaster to independent allowing submaster values to remain unaffected by other submasters or playback fader instructions They will however still be impacted by manual control grandmaster blackout park instructions or other play faders and submasters on independent Inhibitive subs can not be set as independent To toggle a submaster between independent on or off e Sub 7 Independent Enter Changing Fader Pages On Fader Wings The fader wing is paged using the Fader Controls button on the lon console Fader pages are delineated in 20 fader increments If y
290. lon that cue automatically loads on the master fader Assigning Playback Faders Manually To load a new cue into the pending file of a playback fader when Auto Playback is disabled in setup or when you want to move a cue list to a different fader first place that cue or list number on the command line press Enter then click or press the associated Load button for the destination playback fader Cue 4 Enter Load changes the selected cue and loads it to the associated fader This action assumes cue 4 is from the same cue list as is currently selected Cue 3 V Enter Load changes the selected cue list and loads cue list 3 to the associated fader Changing Fader Pages lon has 30 pages of ten faders each When using virtual faders you can page through the 30 available pages of faders by clicking the desired page in the virtual fader display Click the arrow buttons to advance through the page number buttons until you find the desired page When using fader wings holding down Fader Page and bump buttons 1 30 if available will change to the appropriate page lon Operations Manual Playback Fader Controls In lon many of the buttons mentioned below exist as softkeys In order to have access to some of these keys press Fader Control The softkeys will change to display the fader control keys You may press More SK if the green LED is illuminated to view additional fader control buttons Go and St
291. ls 3 9 and makes their color and intensity values manual Using Make Absolute Referenced data can be transformed into absolute data using the Make Absolute softkey This softkey is available in live or blind Referenced data is channel or parameter data that is derived from a palette or preset Make Absolute can be used to leave a parameter unchanged but break its palette or preset reference The following examples illustrate how to change referenced data into absolute data 4 Make Absolute Enter selects channel 4 and makes any referenced data for that channel absolute data 7 Color Make Absolute Enter selects channel 7 and makes its color data absolute 3 thru 9 Color Intensity Make Absolute Enter selects channels 3 9 and makes their color and intensity data absolute In each of these examples the channel display will change to show the result of the command Wherever the reference was previously indicated IP FP CP BP Pr an absolute value numerical will be seen In live data that is changed to absolute is also made manual thereby requiring a record or update instruction if the results are to be maintained Make Absolute can also be used in conjunction with an update command allowing a cue to be updated while also breaking the reference to palettes or presets that were manually modified For example Update Make Absolute Enter will update the active record target Any m
292. ls 97 102 to outputs 1B 6B for dimmer doubling is used to patch the port and offset 2 Address 3 1 Enter patches channel 2 to port 3 offset 1 or address 1025 FixCtrl is used to display the fixture controls for a channel if available 6 FixCtrl displays fixture controls for channel 2 The thumbwheel will scroll through the available fixture controls Press the thumbwheel to activate the fixture control lon Operations Manual Technical Specifications Handheld Transmitter Output U S A Default HF 1 2 410 MHz with 11 additional HF channels available 2 410 2 465 GHz 99 groups available per channel Antenna Helical fixed Connections Integral USB mini b connector for charging the unit Working range 90m 300 ft indoor 200m 656 ft in free field Power 2x NiMH rechargeable battery Recharge using the USB connection Size 160mm 4 5 x 72mm 2 6 x 20mm 8 excludes antenna Base Station Receiver Data USB type B Ethernet Weight 400g 14 oz includes antenna Connections Integral USB connector to console or RPU Ethernet Power USB or Power over Ethernet PoE Maximum USB cable length 5m 16 5 from power source using USB Size 112mm 4 4 x 71mm 2 7 x 45mm 7 excludes antenna LE Remote Control Weight 380g 13 oz includes antenna 333 334 IRFR The iRFR is a software applica
293. ltipart Cues 204 Record a Multipart Cue in Live 204 Creating a New Multipart Cue in Live 204 Setting Multipart Cue Attributes 205 Using Update in Live 206 Storing a Multipart Cue in Blind 207 Changing a Single Part Cue to a Multipart Cue 207 Changing a Multipart Cue to a Standard Cue 207 Deleting a Part from a Multipart Cue 207 Chapter 17 Cue Playback 209 Introduction to Playback 210 Playback Controls 210 Selected Ce tere scere estan a d Pd a 211 Live Blind i un Ba Sie ERAGNY SUE EP 211 Out of Sequence Cues 212 GO NO CUG ae eae hee cae ae a ay nee EOT RERNA y 213 Slider Module 214 Assigning Faders 214 Changing Fader Pages 214 Playback Fader Controls 215 Go and Stop Back 215 Go To Gue 0 4 no oto rk GN NG REPOS RES eh 215 Using Assert Playback Button 218 Using Timing Disable 218 USING Freeze Ka igen oi ERER ESE R Atte ga cela fs 218 Using Stop Effect c sou dure
294. ltiple cue lists Assert can be useful in a single cue list For Example Cue 10 is a blackout with a zero count It is common practice to block blackout cues Let s say though that some of the lights were fading to zero in cue 9 You hit Go for cue 10 before cue 9 is finished The lights that were fading to zero in cue 9 will continue their downfade in the timing for cue 9 since cue 10 doesn t provide them with a new move instruction If you assert cue 10 the lights will bump to black as expected AllFade Any cue can have an allfade flag applied An allfade sends the intensity for all channels not included in the cue to zero Submasters any captured channels and the contribution from any faders that are set to independent are unaffected unless the cue executing the allfade is also set to independent An allfade flag is identified in the playback status display for the specified cue Cue 5 Allfade Enter sends intensity for all channels not included in the allfade cue to zero The allfade instruction is useful as a quick cleanup to get back to a known state on stage without having to worry about what channels need to be set to zero Mark The Mark flag is used to relay information about either automarks or reference marks When using automarks an M will display in the flags field for the specific cue that will execute an automark A D is displayed when automark has been disabled for a cue or a cue part
295. mand line expects instructions to be entered in a specific structure or syntax Generally speaking the order of syntax can be described as e What are you trying to affect Channel group What do you want it to do Change intensity focus pan and tilt What value do you want Intensity at full Iris at 50 Naturally other commands will be used in the course of programming your show but most other functions are modifiers of these three basic steps modifying the channel s you are are working with determining what parameters of those channels you are impacting and what value you want them to assume When working with record targets the syntax is similar Note Not all actions on lon must be entered from the command line although many will result in a command line instruction Other actions bypass the command line entirely lon Operations Manual Enter Since the command line can receive multiple edits and instructions at once it is necessary to let lon know when you have completed your instruction in the command line This is done with the Enter key There are some commands which are self terminating and therefore do not require Enter to be pressed Some but not all of these commands are Out At At I Full Full e Actions from the direct selects Parameters and Parameter Categories lon divides fixture parameters into four major parameter categories Intensity Focus
296. mat of live blind being used see Using Format page 43 Conventionals Most of the channels in the above image are conventional channels intensity is the only available parameter Channel Number Straight line under channel heading Intensity data 1 Conventionals have a straight line beneath the channel ensiy gara d number They also display only the top field intensity as Effect data no other parameters are available on a conventional No other parameter channel categories Moving Lights or Multi parameter Devices Several channels in the image are moving lights possessing more parameters than just intensity Wavy line under channel heading Intense Moving light channels have a wavy line beneath the channel number as well as parameter category indicators Focus data F at the bottom of the channel Color data C Beam data B This view also has additional data fields beneath intensity F C B This information can be suppressed by pressing and holding Data and any of the encoder paging keys Focus Color Image Shutter or Form Doing so will F E B icons leave only the intensity field and FCB indicators at the when collapsed bottom of the channel EX System Basics 35 Color indicators lon uses color to indicate the selection state and information about channel or parameter levels Channel numbers channel headers Selected Unselected Gray number
297. me examples of using parameter buttons are 1 Iris 5 Enter Places the iris parameter of channel 1at 50 Group 4 Zoom Edge Out Enter Sends any zoom and edge values for all fixtures in group 4 to 0 KI Basic Manual Control 111 Setting Parameters with the Keypad When the CIA is placed in parameter mode all parameters of selected channels may be given numeric values through the keypad Linear devices can be provided instructions from 0 to100 pan and tilt are controlled from 270 to 270 and 135 to 135 respectively Saturation controls are represented from 0 to 360 and Hue controls are represented from 0 to 100 CMY and RGB are represented from 0 255 When no channels are selected the CIA shows all of the parameters that are available in the lighting system When channels are selected the CIA condenses to show only the parameters that are appropriate to the selection set If channels are selected that have different device types such as spot and wash lights the CIA will show all of the available parameters Parameters that are not available to all channels are greyed out The following examples illustrate how to set parameter values with the keypad 5 Iris 5 Zoom 6 5 Edge 5 Enter sets channel 5 to an iris value of 50 a zoom value of 65 and an edge value of 50 Note Pressing down on an encoder will place the associated parameter onto the command line for numeric entry Setti
298. meter data discrete channel or parameter level timing cue timing and cue attributes such as preheat follow or hang instructions and so on In Setup you have determined if lon will operate in a Cue Only or Tracking mode By default the system is set to tracking therefore this section of the manual primarily addresses working in tracking mode It is important to know which mode you are working in as it impacts how cues are edited If your console is set in Track mode default changes move forward through the cue list until a block or a move instruction is encountered If your console is set in Cue Only mode changes to cues have no impact on subsequent cue data Cue Numbering Cues can be numbered from 01 9999 99 lon provides you with multiple ways to number your cues The most common methods are listed below After pressing record enter a cue number which can be a whole number 1 or a decimal number 1 1 After pressing record rather than entering a cue number you may press Next which will automatically number the cue with the next sequential number in the cue list For example the current cue is numbered cue 1 1 pressing Record Next will automatically number the new cue 1 2 When recording decimal cues it is not necessary to specify the leading cue number if a decimal cue has already been recorded For example if the current cue is numbered 5 2 when you enter the next record command you can just e
299. meter display about 111 parameters display 27 display in CIA 111 homirig sau Paie aus 119 setting keypad using 112 park ADOUL A sae ento Lets eee iade 222 addresses inlive 224 display parking from 225 in live 223 scaled 54248 due da htm 224 part See multipart cues partial filters 185 partial show loading 49 partitioned control 289 abOUt Aah aan dene Bales 290 create partitions 291 partition list 290 selecting partitions 290 Set p c eue dass 290 using partitions 292 Dall PR Kaka WAN eu IUS 59 1510 1 Se hm DA a 60 adding keywords 80 applying curves in 275 assigning curvesin 70 attribute display 70 changing views in 61 ER T 60 compound channel 67 creating 63 database display 72 device type setting 63 GIMME 2 2 sede he bain 64 dimmer doubling 65 display 61 Image 68 editing 63 scrollers 74 wheels 74 editora cci dda ee wha RES 75 fixture creator 81 MOVE tO siue ka ka RM 65 moving channels 65 moving light 66
300. meters can be set with a variety of controls including the control keypad buttons on the central information area CIA and the encoders Parameter Display The parameter display in the CIA is populated with only those parameters that are found in the patched devices As channels are selected the parameter display will change to show only parameters relevant to the selected channels The parameters are divided into the following categories Intensity Focus Color and Beam Each parameter category is represented with buttons at the bottom of the CIA These buttons allow you to select the entire collection of all parameters within that category in one button press You can also select a single parameter from a category using that parameter s button in the parameter display Beam has three subcategories which correspond to the way the encoders are mapped They are Shutter Image and Form These subcategories are represented with buttons in the CIA Pressing these buttons allows you to select all parameters within those subcategories obo ee Frame b 1 Wheel Select Strobe Mode AIINPs Scroller Frame a 1 benc Zoom Intens 2 emer Yellow Frame b 3 Nerd Edge Intens 1 Tilt Magenta Frame a 3 Moe Iris Intens Pan Cyan Shutter Image Form Intensity Focus Color Beam Intens 3 Within the CIA in the upper left corner notice the All NPs button When pressed this collects all non intensity parameters for further editing So
301. mples of how to use Go To Cue in playback please see Go To Cue page 213 Using Go To Cue 0 Go To Cue 0 is a command line instruction that resets all intensity values not owned by another fader to default including any manual values that are not an override to another active fader value Go To Cue 0 Enter also resets the selected cue list to the top of the list with the first cue pending To Go To Cue 0 on another cue list press Go To Cue 2 0 Enter Note lon has an added intensity parameter for LED fixtures that by manufacturer default have only RGB parameters but no intensity parameter With this added control the LED fixture will respond to the Go To Cue 0 command Captured channels independent values and values from other faders running a different cue list are not affected by a Go To Cue 0 command When Go To Cue 0 is executed any intensity values owned by the associated cue will fade out while all non intensity parameters remain in the current state A Go To Cue 0 instruction does not impact the input from other programmers using partitioned control unless the channels or parameters are shared Go To Cue 0 amp Load You can use the Go To Cue 0 button located with the playback controls in conjunction with a fader load button to send a specific cue list to cue 0 This action does not use the command line On the desired fader simply press Go To Cue 0
302. multiple devices allowing for shared data between consoles The user ID can be set anywhere from 1 to 10 lon devices sharing User IDs will share certain data while those with different IDs will not Below are the differences in multi console data depending on User ID Data shared between lon devices with the same User ID Command line Null channels in live e Selected channels Filters e Selected cue Live blind mode Setup gt desk settings Data specific to the lon device regardless of User ID e Current slider page e Current encoder page e Focus on displays without command line Display configuration layout format visible parameters flexichannel e Paging without changing selected target or channels Data identical between all lon devices regardless of User ID All stage levels and edits All data stored in the show file e Playback submaster and grandmaster contents and progress The default User ID for any lon device is 1 You may change this based on your preference to allow or restrict the functionality described above Note After you have completed the setting changes described above connect your lon device to the network and reboot the device Multi console backup Within an lon system you have the added bonus of show data backup The backup on the system will receive all show data updates and stage levels so that in the event of a primary failure the backup will be capable of taking control of the
303. n of those partial components in the new show file CAUTION On a partial show open if any record targets are not opened any existing data of that type will be cleared from the console To merge show data merge should be used See Merging Show Files on page 52 50 For example you could specify only cues 5 10 from cue list 2 and load them as cues 20 25 in cue list 7 in the new show You could also specify only specific palettes presets effects and so on To see the complete list of show components press the Advanced key in the partial show loading screen Color Parked OK Presets big Curves Palette Channels Beam Submaster ind Cancel Palette Control Groups Effects Reset Focus System Palette Macro Settings Advanced namis Selected Show Components As you specify components they are added to a table in the CIA In the table fields with a dark background may be edited fields with a light gray background do not apply to that component For each component in the list you can specify the desired range by clicking in the proper area in the table and entering numbers from the keypad The columns in the table are e List The list you are taking data from such as a cue list List Target The list you are adding the data to Start The first in a range of components such as a range of cues End The last in a range of components Target The desired location of the components in the ne
304. n and enter the referenced target e Color Palette 4 Adjust any of the effect details on the right side of the CIA by pressing the appropriate detail button and making changes see Effects Editor page 229 lon Operations Manual Relative Effects A relative effect is an offset from the current state of a channel parameter There are three different types of relative effects focus color and linear Each of the these effect types have a graphic editor designed specifically for the parameters involved Relative effects have many of the same properties and attributes as step based and absolute effects lon is preprogrammed with 16 relative effects which represent some of the most commonly used patterns and parameters These are automatically visible in the effects list and can be manipulated using the encoders to conform to your needs You may also custom build relative effects 1 Note As you learn to use the effects editor with relative effects it is recommended that you experiment with the preprogrammed effects until you understand the fundamentals and how effects can be altered Focus Effects Focus effects are designed to impact a channel s pan and tilt parameters These are represented in the horizontal and vertical axes of the graph in the effects editor They can be created from live or blind and the properties can be set in the effects editor as any other effect see Effects Editor page 229 New focus effects de
305. n be assigned to any playback Mapped to establishes the order in which faders will be loaded Whatever playbacks are mapped to 1 they will auto load with the first recorded cue list Any playback mapped to 5 will auto load with the fifth recorded cue list and so on Master fader pair It is possible to map the master fader pair as well This will allow separate users to have different lists loaded to the master fader pair The default mapping for the pair is 0 Setup 97 98 Show Control This section allows you to adjust settings for MIDI show control time code MIDI or SMPTE analog and serial functions Show Settings Cue Settings Fader SMPTE Time Code Rx MSC Receive MSC Transmit Analog Inputs Serial Enable Zonfiguratior Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Filter Setup MIDI Time Code Rx MSC Receive Channel Transmit Channel Relay Outputs Serial Group Ids Temm Enabled 0 0 Enabled 1 Zonfiguratior Resync Frames ACN MIDI Rx ID s ACN MIDI Tx ID 2 1 gt 2 0 Partitions SMPTE Time Code Rx This touchbutton is used to toggle SMPTE time code between Enabled and Disabled thereby controlling whether lon can receive SMPTE time code Choosing Disabled will disable all timecode lists that have a SMPTE source The default for this setting is Enabled MIDI Time Code Rx As above but for MIDI instead of SMPTE The default for this setting is Enabled Resync Frames This
306. n event list For example Event 2 Type MIDI Source 5 Enter Once the list is created you will then need to create the specific events Those steps will vary depending on what protocol is being used EZ Using Show Control 279 280 Time Code lon has time code functionality based on a timing source and a list of events that execute at specific times of that timing source You can compile event lists and have them play back later while following a timing source Time code lists can receive timing data from either SMPTE or MIDI sources lon accepts up to 32 SMPTE sources and 32 MIDI Time Code MTC sources each are numbered from 1 32 Enabling Time Code lon has global enablers for MIDI Time Code and SMPTE These are found in Setup Show Control page 98 If the MIDI Time Code setting is disabled all MTC event lists are disabled as well If enabled all MTC lists are enabled The same is true for SMPTE Timing Data Timing data is given in the form of hours minutes seconds frames Therefore a timing value of 06 25 15 20 would be 6 hours 25 minutes 15 seconds 20 frames The number of frames per second is determined by the timing source and the event list must be set to this same number of frames when programming Number of frames can be 24 25 or 30 Color coding The color of the time in the Status column of the event list display indicates the source of the timing data The colors and
307. n is generally an additive process if channels 1 5 are selected pressing Channel 6 adds channel 6 to the selection leaving channels 1 5 also selected Pressing Channel 6 again will deselect the channel If you have labeled channels in patch those labels will be displayed above the channel number when viewing channels in the direct selects It is possible to double hit a channel button This selects that channel and deselects any previously selected channels Channel 1 adds channel 1 to currently selected channels if not currently selected Channel 1 Channel 10 adds channels 1 and 10 to currently selected channels Channel 1 Channel 1 selects channel 1 deselects all other channels Page V pages direct selects down by one page Page A pages direct selects up by one page EX System Basics 31 32 Clear Functions You can access the various clear options from the browser by selecting Clear from the main browser menu The clear functions window will open in the CIA Clear Functions Clear MIDI Reset Syst sep Ka Time Code Clear SMPTE Clear Sh anatase Time Code Clear Patch FE Defaults Reset Patch sui Defaults Reset Subs 1 Clear Targets to 1 From this menu you can select one of the available clear options by clicking on the desired button in the CIA lon will ask you for a confirmation before performing the selected clear For Clear Targets lon will allow you to choose which rec
308. n live 89 GUI See Graphical User Interface H hang hh cee AR AS tL eS 159 help system description 8 high See highlight highlight 125 rem dimos utes ec RD 125 home hardkey 119 ATP Ahad fess tia be esas 7 in cue list index 193 image control from encoders 116 import ASCI esa e a a 56 custom fixture 85 Light Wright 56 show file 56 pP CE 90 independent in cue listindex 193 indicators in playback status display 41 indicators in live blind 35 intensity manual override in playback 217 set with level wheel 110 Setting eiu One tree 110 SP isse vex Bods Ea dod viens 122 uc 122 intensity master 194 intensity palettes description 138 URE FR PP NAG 334 K keypad selecting channels with 108 setting parameters with 112 keywords adding in patch 80 L label CET 161 lamp controls 121 last kKey 109 learn key 264 using in show control 281 level wheel lon Operations Manual setting intensity with 110 linear effects 240 link l00p 160 list view group sign Medi esse sat 90 palettes 146
309. navigate within the browser to File Open and press Select Show File Archive SANDISK E MIC F Export Import Exit Ion i Power Off Console Setup iv Clear Print Utilities Ue e lon provides you with multiple locations to retrieve an lon show file esf including Show File Archive This is the default storage location for show files when a show file is created and saved Folders are automatically created to store older versions of a show file This allows you the ability to open the latest version or an earlier version of a show file if desired File server if one is connected When there is no file server connected it will not display in the browser USB E device When a USB device is connected and an lon show file esf is available on the device you will notice the USB is displayed in white text and is expandable When the USB device is connected and no lon show file is loaded on the device you will notice the USB F is displayed in a grey color and is not selectable Open the desired location To open a show file from the Show File Archive navigate within the browser to File Open Show File Archive and press Select To open a show file from the file server navigate within the browser to File gt Open File Server and press Select To open a show file from a USB device navigate within the browser to File Open USB E and press Select
310. nd submasters The following example illustrates the use of the Independent softkey in the cue list index Cue 2 Independent Enter toggles the selected cue list between non independent and independent mode EZ Working with Multiple Cue Lists 193 194 Solo Mode The Solo Mode softkey is useful in multiple programmer situations Solo Mode is used to pull a cue list out after it has been synced with other lists for editing purposes For Example Cue List 1 is being used by one programmer and Cue List 2 was programmed by a second programmer For the run of the show the lists are synced so they run together But if changes need to be made to Cue List 2 and not affect the playback of Cue List 1 Solo Mode can be used Cue 2 1 Solo Mode Enter places Cue List 2 into solo mode Solo Mode is a toggle state So if Cue List 2 is already in solo mode and Cue 2 M Solo Mode Enter is used again that list will no longer be in solo mode Fader type Faders can be set as Proportional or Intensity Master I Master This affects how cues are recalled and modified See Proportional vs Intensity Master on page 257 Proportional faders when the slider is set to zero prior to the execution of a cue will withhold playback of intensity data until the slider is raised Intensity data will then be played back proportionally according to the level of the fader Once the slider reaches full the c
311. nd line will show that highlight is currently in use If no highlight preset is established or for channels that have no value stored in the highlight preset the following values will be applied to channels as they are selected e Intensity full Focus parameters no change from present state e Color parameters home value Shutter parameters no change from present state Image parameters home value Form parameters no change from present state For Example Assume you want to adjust the pan tilt positions of Group 4 which is currently in Focus Palette 7 Step 1 Enter Highlight mode Press Highlight Enter Step 1 Select group 4 Group 4 Enter Step 2 Press Next to select the first channel only Step 3 Adjust pan tilt as desired Step 4 Press Next to advance to the next channel Step 5 Continue these steps until all channels have been modified as necessary Either of these adjusted pan tilt positions to a new focus palette or update the current focus palette Step 6 Press Highlight Enter to remove the highlight state lon can be placed in Lowlight mode by pressing Highlight Highlight Enter The default settings for lowlight are the same as highlight You may assign both a highlight and a lowlight preset in setup see Manual Control page 107 Any preset may be used Channels parameters that are not included in the presets assigned to Highlight and Lowlight will continue to use
312. need to be active played back to change cue attributes You may also change cue attributes for a range of cues if you wish Using At Enter A useful feature when editing cues is At Enter This is a simple feature which allows you to select any channel or parameter or several of them and remove their move instructions allowing the value from the previous cue to be manually recalled At Enter is essentially a recall from the previous cue command it completely removes a move instruction and any manual data and replaces it with the value from the previous cue For Example Cue 5 is active in Live e Group 1 Focus At Enter This command lifts the current move instructions for Group 1 focus and recalls the focus data for those lights from the immediately preceding cue It is now manual and can be stored or updated as required You may also use At Enter to affect only certain channels or parameters by selecting them specifically 2 At Enter this will remove the changes for channel 2 only 2 Color At Enter this will remove only the color data changes for channel 2 2 Thru 5 9 1 1 Thru 1 5 1 2 Zoom At Enter removes the changes for only the selected channels for all parameters except zoom Using Record You may modify a cue by rerecording it entirely After making changes to channels or parameters Record Enter Enter will replace
313. new fixture will be added to the bottom of the fixture list Name New Fixture Once the new fixture appears in the list it is recommended that you name the fixture you are about to create To name a fixture in the creator list Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press Page V to arrow down to the new fixture Click Type The virtual PC keyboard will open in the CIA Enter the desired name for the new fixture on the virtual or attached alphanumeric keyboard Press Enter The name will appear in the Type column for the new fixture Add parameters After naming the fixture you can specify which parameters the new fixture contains lon Operations Manual To add parameters to a new fixture Step 1 Use the Page keys to select the new fixture from the fixture list Step 2 Click Edit That fixture will open in a new display in the CIA Number Parameter Step 3 Determine the total number of parameters that your fixture has Do not count 16 bit channels as two channels this will be done in a later step Step 4 Click New to add parameter slots Repeat this step until you have as many slots as are required by the number determined in step 1 Note When New is clicked the parameter slot will appear in the list with a default name in the Parameter column You may disregard these default parameters as you will redefine the designations in a later step Step 5 Use the Page keys to navigat
314. ng 2 Enter Load This will load the first cue of list 2 into pending The selected cue is changed by go record or update instructions as well as cue modification or selecting a cue on the command line When you execute a cue that has a follow or hang time the next cue will become the selected cue when activated In Blind While in blind changing the selected cue will change the playback status display to show information surrounding that cue AN CAUTION When editing in blind changes to cues are automatic therefore no update or record command is required While working in blind mode cues can be executed in live using Go Back and Go to Cue but this does not change the cue you are working with in blind Cue Playback 211 212 Out of Sequence Cues An out of sequence cue is any cue that is played back in one of the following ways Cue is executed using a Go To Cue command Cue is executed by a link instruction Cue is loaded into a fader s pending file Cue is re executed using Assert amp Load or is asserted from the command line Generally when an out of sequence cue is executed the entire contents of the cue will be played back move instructions and tracked values For Example Cue 1 sets channel 1 to full That value is tracked forward until cue 10 The programmer plays back cue 1 on fader 1 Then the programmer sets channel 1 s intensity to 5096 manually If she executes cue 2 cha
315. ng Non intensity Parameters with the Encoders Encoders provide a quick method to adjust current values for non intensity parameters The four encoders are pageable using the six encoder page buttons to the upper right of the encoder LCD The encoder page buttons consist of Focus Custom Color Form Image and Shutter Form Image and Shutter are subcategories within the broader parameter category of Beam Focus includes pan and tilt control Custom includes intensity and intensity MSpeed Color includes all color mixing controls CMY RGB HS as well as scrollers color wheels and color effects Form includes parameters that affect the quality or size of the light output such as edge zoom iris IMF frost etc Image includes anything that drops into the gate such as gobos effects wheels etc Shutter includes all of the framing devices for the luminaire The LCD beneath the encoders indicates the parameters they control and provides additional information about the current status of those parameters Encoder pages populate with parameters relevant to fixtures in the show patch When you access a parameter page controls that are not available for selected channels are suppressed lon Operations Manual Encoder LCD screen The encoder LCD displays the active parameter category loaded on the encoders as selected by the page buttons Each encoder has an associated control section in the LCD that provide
316. ng this feature programmers can work within their partitions using the master fader pair for their specific cue list without affecting the cue list that is loaded to the master fader of another console Flexichannel in Partitioned Control When partitioning is enabled a new flexi state Partitioned is available as a softkey When this is enabled the flexi state is limited to only those channels defined in the current partition This view may be further modified by use of the remaining flexi states lon Operations Manual Appendix A Eos Configuration Utility Eos Shell Overview This appendix covers the Eos Configuration Utility ECU and its use This is a component of the Eos Lighting Control System and is used for both system configuration and performing basic level test functions of your lon console These instructions illustrate how to use the utility but do not specify what changes to make as these are based on your preferences and can be changed to suit your control needs lon uses the ECU for the same purposes as Eos There is a section of the ECU dedicated solely to the lon console It grants you the ability to configure the DMX MIDI contact closure and relay ports on the back of the console For more information see lon page 305 What the Utility Does Here is a brief list of some of the actions that can be performed from the ECU Configure the IP address of the console Configure the services to provide IP
317. nly with the prior written consent of an officer of ETC The Software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or any person or entity acting on its behalf is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 48 CFR 252 227 7013 for DoD contracts in paragraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights Clause in the FAR 48 CFR 52 227 19 for civilian agencies or in the case of NASA in Clause 18 52 227 86 d of the NASA Supplement to the FAR or in other comparable agency clauses The contractor or manufacturer is Electronic MUN 101879 2 009900 0011 2 Theatre Controls Inc 3031 Pleasant View Road Middleton Wisconsin USA 53562 0979 8 Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL ETC BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY I TO DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABL
318. nnel 1 remains at 50 as it is a channel parameter that is not receiving a move instruction from the incoming cue However if she presses Go to Cue 5 Enter an out of sequence execution even though the value for channel 1 in Cue 5 is a tracked value channel 1 will fade from the manual value of 50 to full in the Go to cue time lon Operations Manual Go To Cue Go to Cue instructions can be executed from any operating mode By default a Go to Cue instruction is an out of sequence cue and will follow the rules of such see Out of Sequence Cues above Following are examples of Go To Cue Go To Cue 5 Enter all parameters with values in cue 5 are faded to those values even if they are tracked Go To Cue Next Enter takes you to the next cue in the active list Go To Cue Last Enter takes you to the previous cue in the active list When a Go To Cue instruction is executed any null states applied with Make Null are removed To maintain the make null setting you should use Capture for the required channels Go To Cue Timing Go To Cue uses go to cue timing established in Setup page 93 You can use a Go To Cue instruction with different timing options as follows Go To Cue 2 Time 1 Enter this command would take you to cue 2 in 1 second Go to Cue Next Time 3 Enter this command would take you to the next cue in the selected list in three seconds Go to
319. nsity may be manually entered from the keypad set with an intensity palette if programmed or set with the level wheel Pressing At after channel selection assumes an intensity value will be added to the selected channels You may also use the Full button to bring the selected channels to their full intensity or you may use the Out button to fade the intensity out Use the Level Full Full At and At keys to affect the intensity value of selected channels Each of these keys are set at a specific value established in the Setup Manual Control page 101 Level is set by default to full 100 intensity and are each set by default value of 10 points The following examples illustrate the various methods of setting intensity 1 3 At 5 s05 Enter selects channels 1 and 3 and sets an intensity level of 50 1 thru 5 4 Full Enter selects a range of channels 1 through 5 except channel 4 and sets the intensity to full 1 thru 8 At 3 Enter adds 30 to all intensities in the channel selection If they were at 50 they will now be at 80 If channels 1 3 and 5 were at 30 and 4 was at 50 they would be 60 and 80 intensity respectively 5 thru 8 At 3 Enter scales the intensities of the selected channels in the list down 30 of their current values 1 thru 4 At 1 3 0 Enter scales the intensities of the sel
320. nsity moves in that cue When applied to a cue part the curve impacts all parameter moves stored in that cue part When applied in patch the intensity transition will follow the ramp defined by the curve during its fade This value is determined by referencing the output value of the curve at that percentage and outputting the curved level rather than the percent level Up to 100 points of delineation can be established in a curve each with its own intensity value if desired When applied to a cue the percent completion of the cue is determined by applying the curve s output level as the percent completion for all fade calculations For single part cues the calculation applies only to intensity For multipart cues however the curve applies to all parameters in the part lon provides nine pre programmed commonly used curves They can be edited or copied to a new curve location When a pre established curve is deleted it will return to its original state The curve editor can be accessed by pressing Displays Curve or from the browser Browser gt Record Target Lists gt Curves When selected the curves list will open as a separate tab and the CIA will show the graphical output of the first curve in the list You can scroll through the list using the Next and Last keys or you can specify a curve in the command line Curve 9 0 4 Enter selects curve 904 from the list and displays its shape in the CIA lon Opera
321. nsole definition 307 basic manual control 107 beam palette description 138 blind channel display 144 display indicators 35 editing cues in 171 editing palettes in 144 editing presets in 135 recording cues in 171 spreadsheet view 45 edit palettes in 145 storing multipart cues in 207 text indicators 37 using encoders in 173 bIOCK 2 er waite edd e e vA ES 162 channels parameters 162 CUCS oe 8e ee ees 162 browser 27 Cleaner ee Se net 32 file SAVE aS ee ganan Late ead 55 Images whe ea ah opens 29 navigating within 29 virtual keyboard 29 bump button CUMING o cec ve PES AX 261 C calibrate scroller 78 Capture AA 200 Central Information Area CIA 27 browser 27 locking omn ntm a 28 parameter display 27 parameter displayin 111 unlocking 28 virtual keyboard 29 341 342 channel compound patching 67 unpatching 65 channel check 127 channels asserting 189 display conventions 35 homing 119 multiple intensity 120 ordered with groups 88 selecting
322. nsole backup system you must disabled Net3 services for the intended backup device If the RPU is the intended primary recommended see Backup Scenarios page 313 some Net3 services must be disabled on the intended backup device console or RPU You must disable the DHCP server and TFTP server You must also change the SNTP server to client to enable time synchronization between lon devices All of this is done using the Eos Configuration Utility See Net3 Settings page 300 and lon IP Settings page 301 lon Operations Manual Appendix D Remote Video Interface RVI Overview The RVI functions as a remote user interface to access and modify the contents of an entire Eos lon show file You may configure the RVI to run Eos lon software in Client or Offline mode This appendix outlines the setup and simple configuration of your Remote Video Interface RVI for use with an Eos lon Control System ss Ed ELd Be End ELd Be EC ES VC TU Electrical Specification Operating voltage 100 240 VAC 50 60Hz 2 amps at 120 VAC Ambient temperature and humidity 0 35 C 95 non condensing humidity maximum Storage temperature and humidity 0 35 C 95 non condensing humidity CE and ETL Compliant Installation Category Il indoor use only May operate up to 2000 meters altitude D Remote Video Interface RVI 319 Hardware Setup Rear Panel Hard Power Switch D
323. nt universe or communication with the device maybe loss The universe is set into the gateways port configuration DMX Label same as the device label but the label can be changed here by clicking on the property or value Type Manufacturer Device ID Footprint Version Lamp State Lamp Hours Head DC Voltage Lamp On Off Gel Distance Traveled Gel2 Distance Traveled Fan RPM Ambient Temperature Gel Temperature Device Errors will only display if there are current errors Clear Errors Device Errors are displayed in four different colors depending on severity Note Color severity is determined by the device manufacturer 252 Gray unknown or not an error White Advisory Yellow Warning Red Error lon Operations Manual About Cue The following information will be displayed if the cue is active and what fader it is playing on timing data for the cue including discrete timing any effects running number of move instructions in the cue what channels move in the cue About IFCB Palettes The following information will be displayed when an intensity focus color or beam palette is selected the number of cues the palette is used in the number of presets the palette is used in the number of move instructions the palette is used in the first cue the palette is used in the last cue the palette is used in the number of cue lists that use the palette About Presets When a pre
324. ntains the following sections Record a Multipart Cue in Live 204 e Storing a Multipart Cue in Blind 207 KO Multipart Cues 203 About Multipart Cues Cues can be divided into up to 20 parts Each part can have its own channels or parameters levels and timing information Multipart cues can be stored in live or blind using the same conventions to record a standard cue There are three basic ways to create a multipart cue You can build a multipart cue part by part in live you can break an existing cue into multipart cues in live or you can break an existing cue apart in blind A channel or parameter can only be provided an instruction once in a multipart cue For example it isn t possible to adjust color for channel 1 in Cue 1 Part 1 and then also provide a different instruction for channel 1 color in Cue 1 Part 8 Default part timing is drawn from the cue level timing defaults established in Setup you may also assign discrete timing to channels in each part as you would for a single part cue Record a Multipart Cue in Live Storing a multipart cue in live is accomplished in similar fashion to storing a single part cue However rather than storing the entire cue you select and store just the channels that you want in each part Please note that there are a variety of different ways and different orders to go about creating a multipart cue The following examples represent some but not al
325. ntally change parameter values To access this function on lon press At or At By default and are assigned a value of 10 This can be changed in Setup This can be used with any parameter Channel Intensity When channels are selected pressing At increments the intensity level by 10 or by the value established in setup see Manual Control page 101 Alternatively you may press At to decrement the intensity level by 10 You may use these keys consecutively to add to or subtract from the intensity level For Example Select channels 1 through 10 and set them to an intensity level of 45 from the keypad e t thru 1 0 at 4 5 Enter Change the intensity level to 65 using which is set to its default value of 10 in the setup menu o AU At HIT Non intensity Parameters and may be used to incrementally adjust non intensity parameters as well For Example 1 rris At At e Zoom At At I lon Operations Manual Remainder Dim Rem Dim temporarily provides a zero intensity to all channels except those that are currently selected those that are parked or those with intensity contributions from submasters If the remainder dim command is reversed the stage returns to its previous state You may use the following commands for remainder dim Next and Last moves through the channel list select ch
326. nter 5 to record cue 5 5 Whole numbered cue Next increments the next whole numbered cue e Tenths numbered cue 1 Next increments in tenths e Hundredths 01 numbered cue Next increments in tenths lon Operations Manual Recording Cues in Live When using Record all parameters of any lights that have non default values either from manual control other cues or submaster playback are stored in the target cue Channels that have all default values meaning they have never been changed are not included in the record action unless you specifically select the channel and press Make Manual Other possible exclusions are parameters withheld by use of filters or if the channel parameters have been filtered see Using Filters page 183 You can also select individual parameters of individual channels such as Cyan and Iris and place them in a null state using the Make Null button if the values are not needed in the cue you are recording lon is a tracking console meaning once something is recorded into the cue list the cue list will always contain information about that channel or parameter unless it is nulled using the Make Null command or filtered using the parameter filters When cues are recorded they are automatically played back and manual values are released unless auto playback on record has been disabled in setup Upon playback displayed parameter levels will be color coded for clarification of t
327. o Cue 9 Enter the contents of cue 2 moves to cue 9 Cue 2 is deleted If cue 9 already existed a confirmation would be required to overwrite it You can also hit Copy To Copy To to access Move To In the above example any tracked values in cue 2 become blocks see Block page 162 or moves in cue 9 as well as any move instructions which now match the previous cue Cues after cue 9 are affected based on the default setting of track cue only Any values in the cue after cue 2 that tracked from moves in cue 2 are changed to move instructions Ranges of cues can be moved as well You can also move cues to other cue lists In either of these situations if any cue is to be overwritten a confirmation is required Using Encoders in Blind When a cue is specified you can select channels and alter parameters using the encoders Cue Only Track can be placed on the command line to determine how these changes will impact subsequent cues ELI Working with a Single Cue List 173 174 Deleting Cues Cues lists of cues or ranges of cues can be deleted When deleting cues the track cue only setting of the console will determine how subsequent cues are affected The Cue Only Track button can be used to modify the default behavior as needed In Track Mode When the console is in track mode deleting a cue also removes any move instructions provided by the cue For example assume you have stored cues 1 10 and cue 5 contains move in
328. o disabled on its own on console reboot Address A required entry field for any device You may use the At key rather than the Address button e Use the keypad to define the starting address for the device from 1 to 32767 or a port and offset value D Note Press and hold the Data key to show the complimentary value For example if you have entered address value 514 the complimentary value would be port and offset 2 2 You may enter a start address without defining an end address lon will draw this information from the library data If you wish to leave a larger output gap than required by the library use Offset See Using Offset in Patch page 72 f you specify a start address that conflicts with other channels already patched the conflicting channels will be unpatched after a confirmation from the user Interface An optional field used to specify what network interfaces should be used for the output When the field is left blank the default data output is used as selected in the Network section of the ECU For more information about setting defaults see Protocols page 299 The interface options available are Default ACN EDMX ArtNet Avab UDP and DMX depending on what has been enabled in the Network section of the ECU for the console If an output option is not enabled it will not appear in the Interface list Flash will bring a channel or address to full and then every other second
329. ocus Palette 1 You may use the encoders to set blind levels as well When editing in blind it is possible to remove an instruction from any palette by selecting the channel and parameter and pressing At Enter or Make Null Enter Recall From Copy To Replace With and Move To may be used to create and edit palette data See Advanced Manual Control page 195 Note While editing palettes in blind hitting Recall From Recall From will put Recall From Palette on the command line lon Operations Manual Editing Palettes in Spreadsheet View Spreadsheet view shows a range of palettes along the Y axis and channels and channel parameters along the X axis Viewing palettes in spreadsheet view is useful when you want to compare data between palettes You may select a palette from the spreadsheet using the Next or Last keys to move through the list or you may select the exact palette from the keypad You may also select a range of palettes to edit at once You can make changes to the palette s by selecting channels and altering parameter values In addition to normal editing functions you may also use the following commands in this view Copy To Make Absolute Make Null Move To and Replace With The following are representative methods used for editing palettes in blind spreadsheet Color Palette 1 Thru 9 Enter selects color palettes 1 through 9 1 Scroller Make Null Enter
330. of the week can either be entered in from their softkeys or you can enter them in from the keypad Monday is 1 282 Creating the action for each event is the same as Time Code Event 3 Cue 1 2 Enter lon Operations Manual Analog Inputs and Relay Outputs Analog Inputs Analog inputs are available on the lon Each analog event in the event list consists of a port address and an action There is a global enable for all analog inputs in Setup see Show Control page 98 You will also need to configure set the group and address for the port See Contact Closure remote trigger connector page 305 Analog Input Events Analog Input events fire when the analog input passes a certain level Action types supported are the same as Time Code run a cue control a submaster and fire a macro Create an Analog Input Event where an input on address 1 will fire Cue 10 Event 4 1 Address 1 Cue 1 0 Enter If you select the submaster option you will have an additional option of fader which will map the 0 10v input to the level of a specified submaster Relay Outputs Relay outputs are available on the lon Relay outputs are also often called remote triggers contact closures or contact outputs To configure see Relay Out remote trigger connector page 305 Relay outputs are controlled by external links in cues See Using the Execute List page 164 MIDI Show Control lon has two MIDI ports on the rea
331. oll or wheel type of the selected channel The default selection is the wheel as shipped from the manufacturer derived from the fixture library Displayed to the left of the standard scroll or wheel selection is a list of each color or gobo as they are installed in the selected device frame by frame When the color or pattern image is available it will display next to the frame name In the above image ETC Scroll is the default scroll for the selected ETC Source Four Revolution The list of gel colors as they are installed in the scroll are displayed to the left with a color chip for easy reference Selecting any other type such as Martin Scroll redraws the frame list to match The softkeys displayed beneath the picker are Clear New Copy Edit and Delete Clear clears the selection type from the selected channel in the picker New creates a new scroll or wheel and provides additional softkeys to enable the Editor See Using the Editor below Copy makes a copy of the currently selected scroll or wheel type which can then be edited using the editor See Using the Editor below Edit used to edit an existing scroll or wheel Delete used to remove the selected frame only from a scroll or wheel that you have created Using the Editor The editor is used to create new or edit copied scrolls and wheels While in the picker display you can create a new scroll or wheel by pressing the New softk
332. ollowing syntax examples illustrate the various methods and features available when recording groups 1 thru 5 Record Group 7 Enter records only channels 1 5 to group 7 Record Group 7 Enter records all channels with non default values to group 7 5 Thru 9 Record Group 7 records channels 5 9 to group 7 using the direct selects 3 Thru 8 Record Group 8 5 2 Enter records channels 3 8 to group 8 52 3 Record Group 7 Enter records all channels except channel 3 to group 7 Record Group 7 Label name Enter records as above and adds a label to the group Record Only Group 7 Enter records channels with manual data to group 7 Record Only Group 7 records channels with manual data to group 7 using the direct select Ordered Channels When recording groups channels are ordered in the group based on their selection order when the group is stored This ordering is useful combined with Next and Last functions and when applying effects to groups For Example If you record a group by selecting channels in the following order 1 3 5 Thru 9 Record Group 1 Enter and later you select Group 1 and press Next the channels will be accessed one ata time in the same order in which they were initially selected If new channels are added to an ordered group using an update command those channels are
333. once to select it The monitor will now be outlined in yellow Step 2 Click on the open left position under Monitor Arrangement The second monitor will drop down into the open left position Step 3 Click on Apply Step 4 Click on Accept on the General screen Once you launch the lon application you will then have displays on both the monitors lon Software Update Software Update E Eos Consol E Eos Consol Software Update No Installers Found This option is used to update the software of the lon console itself It does not affect or update the software in any other networked device such as a Net3 Gateway When you click on Software Update the lon console looks at the root directory of any connected USB drive for an lon console software update file You will be shown the names of any updater files found on the drive Select the file you would like to install and click the Install button or click Cancel You will also receive a message if no software update file can be found lon Operations Manual Network Settings lon Console IP Settings This is where you specify the IP address to be used by this console manually or how it m acquires an IP address Network dynamically via a DHCP server or a link local address BASE Local IP Settings _ Enable DHCP PP Address 10 101 100 101 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Gateway 10 101 100 101 Network Services Network Services Address Service DHC
334. oot of the console before they will take effect If this section is greyed out or you are unable to change any settings you don t have Net3 Services installed on your console Enable Net3 Services Net3 Services are a suite of services that provide infrastructure support for a Net3 ACN network Those services are a dynamic IP address server a network time server and a file server Each of these services are described below Unchecking this box acts to disable all of the Net3 Services Checking the box only enables services selected to be active Enable Address Server Net3 Services uses a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol address server DHCP is a TCP IP protocol that dynamically assigns an IP address to a network device when it requests one This is a small and simple DHCP server that is intended to be used on non routed networks It will not serve IP addresses across a router CAUTION There should only be a single DHCP server active on a network It is possible to start more than one DHCP server on a single network nothing is built in to DHCP servers to prevent this from happening If this occurs it will result in unstable conditions and possibly result in network communications failures 300 Clicking in the enable box will start the DHCP server in the lon console It will use the settings below to determine which IP addresses it gives out IP Address Pool This sets the starting IP address of the range of IP
335. op Back Using Go The Go button is used to execute the cue currently in the pending file of the associated fader When Go is pressed all parameters assume their required positions in the recorded times unless they have been recorded with manual timing Using Stop Back All fader activity can be instantly stopped mid transition by pressing the Stop Back button for the required fader To resume the cue press the Go button To fade to the previous cue on that fader using default back timing press the Stop Back button again from this state When a cue on the playback fader is complete the first press of Stop Back will go back to the previous cue Subsequent presses of Stop Back will step backwards sequentially through the cue list from that point Stop Back uses default back time as established in Setup See Cue Settings on page 95 Or you can back into the previous cue using specific timing by pressing Go to Cue Last Time n Enter Go To Cue 0 You can use the Go To Cue 0 button located with the playback controls in conjunction with a fader load button to send a specific cue list to cue 0 This action does not use the command line To do this Step 1 Press Fader Controls Step 2 If necessary press More SK until Go ToQ 0 is visible in the LCD Step 3 Press and release Go To Cue 0 Step 4 Press or click Load for the desired fader The cue list will go to cue O For mor
336. ord targets you want to clear Cues SLM Presets EE Palette Control Patch i Submasters Fixtures Palette Intensity Palette Groups Effects Snapshots Focus MAUS System a Palette Settings ves From the Clear Targets screen you can select which record targets you wish to clear The buttons at the center of the CIA represent all of the record targets that you can choose to clear By default all components are selected gray and will be cleared To withhold any targets from being cleared simply deselect them in the CIA by clicking the respective button To reselect all targets click the Reset button and all buttons will return to gray selected To stop the process click the Cancel button When you have selected or deselected all of the record targets you require click OK After clearing the CIA will return to the browser If you want to perform additional clear functions you must select Clear from the browser again To exit the clear functions screen without clearing press the Displays key at any time or select a clear button and then select Cancel from the confirmation screen lon Operations Manual Display Control and Navigation Opening and Closing Displays Displays can be opened and closed in different ways depending on the display Many displays are accessible from the browser while other displays are accessible from the LCD softkeys The blind displays of record targets also called lists
337. ou advance to the next fader page your entire fader wing array will advance by a total of 20 faders To change the fader page of a fader wing Step 1 Press and hold the Fader Controls button on the lon console The LCD on the fader wing will display the available pages beneath the fader bump buttons Step 2 Press the bump button corresponding to the page you wish to display on the fader wing The fader wing will display those faders after your selection is made On the Slider Module The slider module is paged on lon using the page buttons that are displayed to the right of the module There are 30 available pages of sliders Pages are delineated in 10 fader increments Click on the appropriate page button to access that row of sliders You can scroll through the available pages by clicking the arrow button s next to the page buttons lon Operations Manual Loading Submasters Submasters can be loaded with cues presets or palettes You can convert an empty fader to a submaster without configuring it in setup Any fader can be configured and loaded with a submaster if the fader is not configured or the fader is configured as a playback but has no cue list loaded to it or the fader is configured as a submaster but that submaster is empty Regardless of the fader configuration in setup if the above conditions are met the fader can be loaded with the submaster specified on the command line If a submaster with data or a
338. ou used in blind This will allow you to edit the preset You can navigate the preset list using Next and Last Opening the Preset List Blind presets can also be viewed in the preset list and can be accessed in a number of ways To view the preset list in blind you may Press Preset Preset Click on Preset List in the Browser gt Record Target Lists Move To You can move presets within the preset list using the Move To softkey You can also hit Copy To Copy To to access Move To lt Preset gt 3 Move To 8 Enter Enter moves preset 3 to preset 8 Preset 3 will be removed from the list The second Enter is not required if you have disabled confirmations in setup You can also move data from a palette to a preset and vice versa It is important to remember that when using the Move To command that data is removed from its current location and moved to its new location Copy To You can copy presets within the list to another location in the list using Copy To lt Preset gt 2 Copy To 9 Enter Enter copies the contents of preset 2 to preset 9 Preset 2 will remain in the list The second Enter is not required if you have disabled confirmations in setup You can also use Copy To from palettes to presets lon Operations Manual Editing Presets in Blind All presets can be viewed and edited in blind To open a preset in blind you can do any of the following Press Blind amp
339. ough the channel list to complete the channel check Any other key press other than Next or Last will terminate channel check mode Channel check follows the current flexichannel state Address at Level The Address softkey in Live is used to send level information directly to an output address Address 5 Full Enter sets output address 5 to full It will return to its previous level once the command line changes With Address on the command line you can use the level wheel to adjust the level After using the Address command Next and Last may be used to increment the address number and set itto the same level Addresses return to their previous level once the command line is cleared or Next or Last is used to increment to the next address This feature is useful when you want to perform an address or dimmer check Address Check Address check allows you to quickly step through all of your patched addresses D Note Address check differs from Address at Level because it skips non intensity parameters of patched addresses Since address check follows the current flexichannel state it can be used with all channels to identify unpatched channels or with flexi patched to only show the intensity addresses of patched channels Address 1 at Full Check Enter brings address 1 to full intensity Use Next or Last to progress through the address list to complete the address check Any key
340. ould patch channel 10 to address 105 205 and 305 When more than one device is patched to a channel lon automatically creates parts for each device This is used if you need to access an address directly in the patch by channel display To select a device interface optional click Interface This displays up to six buttons labeled ACN EDMX ArtNet Avab UDP DMX and Default Select an interface for the selected device Once your selection is made the command line will populate with the selected interfaces and terminate If left blank the Default is used as selected in the Network section of the ECU See Protocols on page 299 To label the channel press the Label key and enter the desired text on the alphnumeric keyboard Press Attributes to assign any of the following see Attribute Display and Settings page 70 a proportional patch a curve a preheat setting Select the Database softkey to specify notes and keyword text related to the selected channel for reference and future queries Clicking the Notes or a Text fields opens the virtual PC keyboard on the CIA Pressing Enter returns the CIA to the database page If you create several addresses with multiple parts you can select the same part for multiple channels by selecting a channel range and using the Part key 5 Thru 9 Part 2 Enter selects only part 2 of channels 5 9 64 lon Operations Manual Dimmer Doubl
341. ovided You may restore channels to their background or default state using the Sneak Enter feature see Sneak page 126 Or you may leave them in a manual state until a new instruction is received It is also possible to latch capture on This will automatically capture all manual changes as they are made Pressing Capture Capture Enter automatically captures subsequent manual changes The command line will read Capture Enable and the Capture LED will illuminate To remove the capture latch press Capture Capture Enter again lon Operations Manual Using Undo Undo is a method to reverse or undo certain operations performed in the software You can use Undo to reverse any command that results in a change to data that would be saved to the show file or any command that changes manual levels in live Commands that can be reversed using Undo are e Record and update operations Delete commands e Manual level changes If there are any commands in the command line pressing Undo once clears the command line Once the command line is empty pressing Undo will start the undo process When Undo is pressed from an empty command line the command history display will open in the CIA and the most recent completed command is highlighted in gold If you press Enter you will undo your last command Command History Commands to be poc Mene You may use the page arrow keys to select multiple command
342. ower supply must also be used Rules of Connection Rule One Your entire system is limited to a total of 300 faders per processor lon RPU RVI Rule Two No more than three fader wings may be physically attached to each other This means A maximum of three fader wings may be directly attached to either side of a console 3 per side A maximum of three fader wings may be connected using a USB cable to form an external array using an external power supply Note Only one wing 2 x 10 or 2 x 20 may be used with Eos lon offline software running on a personal computer Connecting Wings to lon Up to three Universal Fader Wings may be attached together and then connected to lon using a USB cable only or by physically attaching them to the lon console Both sides of lon may have up to three wings attached The best way to attach wings together is to attach them in order from left to right KET Universal Fader Wings 335 Attach Universal Fader Wings Step 1 Using a 1 Phillips head screwdriver on the underside of the wing s remove the two screws securing the bumpers that will be removed from the appropriate side or sides of the wings The bumpers will be removed in a later step a Carefully turn the wing over and place it faders down on a clear flat work surface CAUTION Do not set the wing on the connector side rear panel Instead place it face down on the faders Bumpers on either sid
343. ows the conventions illustrated in the Record and Record Only sections detailed earlier in this chapter The only exception is that a confirmation is required to record over an existing palette For Example Color palette 4 has already been recorded To rerecord color palette 4 adjust the parameter values as needed you may also adjust the parameters of previously excluded channels in order to add them to palette then rerecord the palette e Record Color Palette 4 Enter Enter Update Live changes can be updated to both active and inactive palettes When updating a parameter in an active palette that parameter will no longer be absolute data but will now be in the updated palette on stage The following illustrates how to update color palette 2 when no cues are active and you have recalled channels within that palette channel list Update Color Palette 2 Enter any manual changes for channels originally in the palette are updated in color palette 2 1 Update Color Palette 2 Enter adds channel 1 s manual data to color palette 2 3 Update Color Palette 2 Enter withholds manual changes for channel 3 from the update to Color Palette 2 using the direct selects If a channel or parameter does not have data in the palette being updated it will not be added to that palette unless the user specifically requests it by specifying the channel ET Storing and Using Palettes 143 iN
344. playback fader already occupies the fader that fader must be released before another submaster can be loaded To release a fader that contains a submaster Step 1 Press and hold Fader Controls Step 2 If necessary select the fader page that contains the desired fader Pressing the appropriate page bump button on the fader wing or use the page controls with the slider module Step 3 Press Release Step 4 Press both buttons Load of the desired fader The fader will be released but will remain configured as a submaster On Fader Wings Faders on fader wings can be configured as submasters by pressing both buttons of the desired fader In this instance this acts as a Load button To load a fader with a submaster Step 1 Specify the submaster on the command line e Sub 5 Enter Step 2 Press both buttons Load for the desired fader The submaster will load to the fader On the Slider Module Sub 5 Enter Load loads submaster 5 to the fader associated with the load button Cue 5 Sub 4 Enter loads the contents of cue 5 to submaster 4 a CopyTo command will appear within the syntax on the command line Cue 5 Load loads cue 5 to the submaster associated with the chosen load button 5 Cue 5 Sub 6 Enter loads the contents of cue 5 minus channel 5 to submaster 6 Cue 1 thru 5 Sub 1 thru 4 7 sequentially loads cues 1 thru 5 to subs
345. played back lon adheres to this philosophy In a Move Fade system parameters do not change from their current setting until they are provided a move instruction in a cue or are given a new instruction manually For example in cue 1 channel 1 has been given an intensity value of 50 This value does not change until cue 20 where channel 1 is moved to 100 Therefore channel 1 has a tracked intensity value of 50 in cues 2 19 If the user applies a manual intensity value of 25 while sitting in cue 5 for example that channel will stay at 25 until Cue 20 is recalled because 20 is the next cue in which channel 1 has a move instruction The original intensity of 50 will not be reapplied in subsequent cues unless specifically called out by the cue or manually performed Cue List Ownership lon is capable of running multiple cue lists In a multiple cue list console cue list ownership is an important concept Cue list ownership is determined by the cue from which a channel is currently receiving its value In Live a parameter is considered to be owned by a cue list when it is receiving its current value from that cue list When alternating between cue lists in sequential playback an active cue list does not necessarily own a channel unless that list has provided the last move instruction for that channel For example assume a channel is owned by cue list 1 and is at a tracked value If a cue from another cue list is executed and pro
346. ppear in the effect list and the CIA will repaint with the effect details visible Manipulate the effect using the encoders effect graph or property fields so that the effect meets your needs see Effects Editor page 229 for details on effect properties and encoders EL Creating and Using Effects 241 Apply an Existing Effect Once an effect has been created it will appear in the effects list To apply an existing effect press Select Channels Effect x Enter or using the direct selects Select Channels Effect x The selected channels will begin their changes as programmed in the effect Since step based effects have an embedded channel list those effects can be recalled by Group Effect n Enter or Recall From Effect n Enter without selecting channels Editing Effects Live To edit an effect while it is running press Displays Effect Status The effect status display will open in the CIA and any currently running effects will be visible in the display Selecting the effect number in the status display will select the effect for editing Select the effect you want to edit live by pressing Effect x Enter Use the encoders to adjust the attributes as described in Effect Status Display page 233 Adjustments are cue overrides and don t impact the core effect To edit other properties of the effect in live press Edit and the effects editor will open See Effects Editor page 229 Changes made
347. pplication is ideal for permanent installations requiring synchronized backup EJ Multi console and Synchronized Backup 313 314 lon Operations Manual Appendix C Remote Processor Unit RPU Overview This appendix outlines the setup and configuration of your lon Remote Processor Unit RPU The lon RPU can be used as a primary backup or client processor in an lon system see Large System Riser page 19 It can also be used for independent playback applications lon RPU ships with the following Remote Processor Unit USB Keyboard USB Mouse Rack Mount Hardware Kit EC Power cords with varying connectors Dual DVI video Y adapter screen resolution of 1280x1024 required DVI male to VGA female adapter Hardware Setup Rear Panel Hard Power Dual DVI Ethernet Switch 00000000000000000000000000 emo ot eeh CEE te ON IEC Power PS2 Mouse and Keyboard USB Connector ports Step 1 Attach the appropriate IEC power cord to the power connector Step 2 Attach the dual DVI connector Y adapter to the DVI port If you have VGA monitors attach the VGA adapters to the DVI adapter Do not use the VGA connectors on the back of the RPU
348. pplied to cue it impacts only the intensity transitions in that cue When applied to a cue part it impacts any parameters moving in that part For more information on creating and using curves see Storing and Using Curves page 271 Label Label is used to attach an alphanumeric label to a cue or cue part Following is an example of how to apply a label to a cue Record Cue 7 Label name Enter records cue 7 and applies the label as entered on the alphanumeric keyboard Pressing Label when a label has already been applied to a cue will display the label on the command line for editing Pressing Label a second time will clear the label or you can press Clear to remove the label one character at a time Clearing Cue Attributes To clear attributes from a cue Cue n Follow Hang Enter removes the follow or hang time from the specified cue n Cue n Label Label Enter removes the label from the specified cue n Cue n Link Loop Enter removes the link instruction from the specified cue n Cue n thru y Rate Enter removes the rate instruction in cues n through y You may combine these to remove multiple attributes at once Cue n Follow Hang Link Loop Enter removes the follow time and link instruction ELI Working with a Single Cue List 161 162 Flags Flags can be applied to cues to change specific behaviors Flags can be set for Block
349. press other than Next or Last will terminate address check mode 8 Basic Manual Control 127 Flash Using the Flash softkey in Live will bring a channel or address to full and then every other second the level will move to 15 That will hold for 1 second and then the level will return to full The channel or address will keep flashing until either the command line is cleared or Next Last is used to increment to the next channel or address 1 Flash Enter will bring channel 1 to full then to 15 Address 1 0 Flash Enter will bring address 10 to full then to 15 Using Move To While technically not a manual control instruction Move To will be very useful when managing record target data stored from manual control Move To allows you to take recorded data from one location and move it to another location For example Color Palette 1 Move To Color Palette 5 Enter Preset 3 Move To lt Preset gt 8 Enter e Cue 9 Move To Cue 2 Enter e Preset 1 Move To Color Palette 3 Enter Int Palette 5 Move To Preset 1 0 Enter When a Move To command is given data is removed from its current location and moved to its new location If the new location already contains data a confirmation is required by lon unless disabled in Setup Existing data in the new location will be completely overwritten if a Move To command is confirmed The Mov
350. provided between fixture types giving a clear delineation between them The name of the fixture type is displayed at the top of the section for that fixture Channels with only intensity parameters will display the same as in summary view Live Table Cricket amp Cache 9 42 30 PM N Ww SIN ISIN e 33333993 SNS Patched Channel Ea ta ca ca tn ca soso a ca cea ca c ma Expanded category Parameter data Summarized category Beam Saturatn CP1 e CP 1 CP 1 CP 1 1 CP 1 Pi CP 1 CP 1 CP 1 CP 1 CPi em CP 1 e Noe els parameters alspiayea _Timing ____ Flags g Color Beam Du MBA Link Label 2 5 3 5 1 jets Fixture types Live Table View lon Operations Manual Spreadsheet Blind Only Spreadsheet format is available only in blind mode It is useful for viewing channel data and trends for multiple cues submasters palettes or presets at one time Cues and other record targets are displayed on the vertical axis and channel data is visible on the horizontal axis Since this is a blind only view changes made in this view are immediate and do not require a record or update As with table view spreadsheet format allows you to choose exactly which parameters you want to view Parameters can be expanded suppressed by holding Data and pressing the desired parameter buttons in the CIA Category data is not available in spreadsheet but you may hide all parameters of a specific categor
351. quired before replacing cue 8 unless confirmations have been disabled in setup Any contents of cue 8 will be replaced entirely lon Operations Manual Update Update is a powerful feature and also very versatile Using a combination of Cue Only Track Trace and Make Absolute the number of ways you can update specific information and manual data is virtually endless Below you will find some examples of how data can be updated to various record targets either at once or individually This list is by no means exhaustive so you are encouraged to try methods of updating on your own Update Dialogue Box When you press Update a dialogue box will open in the CIA and the following options are displayed Update All updates the background cue and all references nested and otherwise lon defaults to this option Make Absolute updates the background cue and convert all levels to absolute values thereby removing any references Break Nested updates the background cue s first level of reference only thereby breaking any reference beyond the first For example if cue 1 channel 1 references preset 3 which then references color palette 5 when updated with this option preset 3 would be updated color palette 5 would not and the reference to CP5 would be broken in preset 3 The dialogue box also provides you with a listing by record target of what channels or parameters will be impacted by the update instruc
352. r of the console For configuring the ports see MIDI page 305 Data Sources MIDI Show Control MSC receives data from a MIDI input source There are 32 available MIDI sources numbered 1 32 MIDI consists of many types of data but MSC looks only at MSC data Other MIDI transmitted data is ignored by MSC MIDI Show Control Devices MIDI Show Control data carries a device ID within the data packet MSC setup allows for the specification of two device IDs one for reception and one for transmission Only MSC data with the correct receive device ID or an ALL CALL ID will be interpreted by lon All outgoing MSC data contains the specified transmit device ID within EZ Using Show Control 283 lon Command Interpretation When lon receives a command from a MIDI source it will look for and support the following MIDI commands in the following ways Go Runs a cue Stop Pauses a cue e Resume Resumes a paused cue Set Controls a submaster playback or grandmaster Fire Runs a macro The cue related commands go stop resume affect lon based on the cue and list fields also contained within the MSC data Cue and list fields will correspond directly to the lon cues and cue lists In the command effect tables below if a field is present in the MSC data the name is indicated such as Cue or List If it is not present in the data a is indicated For example Cue implies that a cue is specified in the dat
353. ra had eye koa cea es 219 Release a Fader 2 eee aa 219 Turning a Fader Off 219 Using Rate Override 220 Chapter 18 USING Par Ke add it Re dene Rr bat 221 Using Park edo m EE DE VEG b ere exu 222 Park Display 2 sk prb Rasta Ab tebe ba odd 222 Parked Values in Live 223 Scaled Parked Values in Live 224 Parked Addresses in Live 224 Park Values from the Park Display 225 Chapter 19 Creating and Using Effects 227 About Effects ana ee AW as ao ge eh Bd 228 The Effect List clone han eat NG 228 Eff ctS AA 229 Effect Status Display 233 Step Effects rosis emque NG AWAN sata ews 234 Program a Step Effect 235 Absolute Effects cecs llle lee 237 Program an Absolute Effect 238 Relative Effects 2 2 02 Aa m hn 239 viii lon Operations Manual Focus Effects mL Rr ba weg x 239 Color Effects su cei eee KNANG NR Bu eue wwe 240 Linear Effects 240 Define a Pattern Shape 241 Program a New Relative Effect 241 Apply an Existing Effect 242 Editing Effects Live 242 Stop an Effect Xa 242 s UNG EAR TG BR
354. rail J Spread Even 237 Program an Absolute Effect Below is the process used to program the effect illustrated in the image above For Example To open the effects list press Effect Effect Establish the number of the effect by pressing e Effect 8 Enter The CIA will repaint with unpopulated fields for the new effect Assign the effect as absolute by pressing e Type Absolute The effect will appear in the list and the CIA will repaint with the default entries for the effect and an action chart for the effect Define the first action by pressing Action 1 Enter The step will populate the chart and will remain selected You can also create a range of actions at once using the Thru button if desired Use the page keys to navigate to the different columns After arrowing to the Time column or using the softkeys specify the fade in time for the actions 5 Enter Page arrow to the Dwell column and enter a dwell time 5 Enter Page arrow to the Level column and enter the desired referenced target e Color Palette 5 Page arrow down and a new action will be created All fields default to the values in the previous action Page to the next action in the Level column and enter the referenced target e Color Palette 8 Page arrow down to the next action in the Level column and enter the referenced target e Color Palette 2 Page arrow down to the next action in the Level colum
355. rchive 2008 04 08 11 31 13 esf H i Cricket amp Cache 2008 04 08 11 29 47 esf Joe lon test 1 2008 01 17 21 49 24 esf Tech Training Show 2008 04 08 11 31 58 esf HE i new Folder gt USB EX lon provides you with three locations to save an lon show file esf including the Show File Archive the File Server if connected or a USB device if connected Navigate to the desired storage location and press Select When using Save As to save the show file to a specific location the alphanumeric keypad will display on the CIA Name the show file and press Enter The show file will be saved in the specified location with the show file name you entered with a time stamp suffix By default the current show file name will be used Press Clear until this is removed When saving from an untitled show file the default name will be showfile ES Managing Show Files 55 A Importing Show Files lon supports the import of standard USITT ASCII Light Wright and esf show files Note lon supports ASCII show file import from a number of other control consoles including the Obsession Expression and Emphasis product lines as well as the Strand 300 Series Please note that all show files must be saved in an ASCII format prior to importing them into lon CAUTION The way data is stored and used is often different between different consoles Imported data may not playback exactly the same between console
356. re indicated with an I next to the intensity value in the channel display in live Inhibitive submasters do not provide levels to the stage picture they limit them similar to a grandmaster It is possible to put non intensity parameters onto an inhibitive submaster but it must be done from blind For more information about effectsub See Effects on Submasters on page 243 Proportional vs Intensity Master A submaster can be set to be either a proportional fader or an intensity master This is done using the Fader softkey lon defaults to submasters as proportional Proportional submasters When a submaster is proportional the slider will control all contents of the submaster intensity and non intensity parameters when moved from zero When a proportional sub is return toward zero channel will be returned to their previous level The bump button can be used to bump all values to their recorded levels in the submaster or by assigning timing values fade the contents of the submaster up or out Intensity master When set to this fader type the slider will control intensity only The bump button can be used to preset mark non intensity parameters stored to the submaster If the bump is not pressed before the slider is moved the slider will also fade the non intensity parameters to their recorded values Once the non intensity parameters are at their end state the slider only controls intensity When dropped toward zero contro
357. recording with a delay Record Cue 2 Delay 5 Enter stores cue 2 with a 5 second delay on intensity Record Cue 2 Time 9 Delay 3 Enter records cue 2 with a 9 second upfade delayed from Go by 3 seconds Record Cue 2 Time 7 Delay Enter records cue 2 with a 7 second upfade and removes a delay time on the upfade Delay can be useful when you do not want a parameter to change i e intensity down until other changes have begun or completed their transition Delay can be used to affect only the parameters in the specified category Record Cue 2 Color Delay 8 Enter records cue 2 with a delay time of 8 seconds for the color category ELI Working with a Single Cue List 157 158 Discrete Channel or Parameter Timing Discrete timing can be applied to a specific channel or parameter You must select the channels that you want to apply the time to otherwise the system assumes you are addressing the selected cue Following are some examples of use channel list Color Time 3 Enter adds a time of 3 seconds to all of the color parameters of the channel list that have a move instruction Frost Time 7 Enter assigns a time of 7 seconds for the frost attribute of all selected channels Select last Frost Time 7 Enter selects the last channel selection and applies a time of 7 to any manual frost values Discrete delay times can al
358. regate le nee NAGA wp bande nd aha BAG Da UR d y es 163 Using the Execute List 164 Modifying Cues Live 165 Using At Enter aa pana er utut ert Regum 165 Using Record siege ae eode eee 165 Using Record Only 166 Move TO scs Che RR be gu VOLEVA daa xd 166 Update 2 heute net fares de Rant ates 167 Recording and Editing Cues from Blind 171 From Summary or Table Views 172 From the Cue Spreadsheet 172 Using Encoders in Blind 173 Deleting CUES c3 noA a ee es Red 174 In Track Mode vecsie cee a aa n 174 In Cue Only Mode iraa popra aat Es AEE E SE 174 Chapter 12 Using Mark v a sau mns Rennes 175 AUtOMark i io o ds et ue Us be te 176 Conditions Triggering an AutoMark 176 Allowing a Live Move 176 AutoMark and Timing 176 Referenced Marks 177 vi lon Operations Manual Setting Referenced Mark Flags 177 Applying Flags as Channels are Marked 178 Reference Marks and Timing 181 Chapter 13 Using Filters 183 Record Filters cia yada dea Ier PADA eae pa ee 184 Partial Filters 185 R
359. rk ID is a separate digital channel on a single high frequency HF setting Changing an ID setting from the default 1 is useful when multiple systems are utilizing the same frequency Note If you change the frequency and ID settings in the handheld remote you must also change the frequency and ID settings to match in the base station To change the radio settings on your remote Step 1 With the remote power off press and hold the C button Continue pressing it and power up the unit The display window will show the HF Channel selection screen Step 2 Choose an HF Channel 1 12 by spinning either thumb wheel While setting the HF Channel the RFR scans each available channel for traffic which may interfere with the RFR This feature is used to determine what frequency to use in your venue In the Available field the RFR will display or used The asterisks indicate the quality of the signal at that channel is best Used indicates that other traffic is detected on that channel but the RFR may still function properly Step 3 Press Next s2 Step 4 Choose a network ID by moving either thumbwheel Allowed range is from 1 to 99 Step 5 Press Next s2 Step 6 Set the HF power level This allows you to alter the strength of the transmission signal from the remote Allowed range is from 10 dBm to 18 dBm Ahigher value indicates a stronger signal but sho
360. rom ETC Technical Services page 3 can help us isolate the issue As these files can be rather large unless otherwise instructed the file that is useful will be a SDMP file lon Operations Manual Backup Show Archive Backup Show Archive allows you to either backup the most current version of each show file or every version of each file to a USB drive Restore Show Archive Restore Show Archive allows you to restore show files from a USB drive File Manager File Manager provides a way to manage show files You can create and delete new folders move and copy files between the console and USB drives Upgrade Console Upgrade Console is used for upgrading the console s outputs Network Drives Network Drives allows you to select an alternative show file storage location on another console or computer After setting this location it will appear as an option within the save and open dialogs in lon In the Network Drives dialog box there is a Add button for creating a network drive In the Add Network Drive dialog box you are able to select the drive letter that is appropriate the network path examples would be IPAddress ShowArchive or NDeviceNamelShowArchive and network path type which is either Eos lon or Other If Other is selected you will have additional fields to fill out for Provider Username and Password Add Network Drive Add Network Drive Add Network Drive Local Drive E
361. rom opening show files When you do a partial open of show components untouched record targets are cleared When you do a merge those record targets remain 52 You have the option of merging esf show files from the Show File Archive a File Server if connected or a USB device To merge a show file navigate within the Browser to File gt Merge gt Navigate to the desired storage location and press Select When using merge lon displays only the available files Navigate to the specific file and press Select This will open the merge screen in the CIA From this screen you can choose which aspects of the show file you want to merge By default all aspects are unselected black Selected show aspects will appear in gray If you select the Advanced button in the merge show loading screen you will have the opportunity to load partial components from the show file and be able to specify the desired location of those partial components in the current show file For example you could specify only cues 5 10 from cue list 8 and load them as cues 20 25 in cue list 7 in the new show You could also specify only specific palettes presets effects and so on To see the complete list of show components press the Advanced key in the merge show loading screen Ss DO EE Show IE C a usi Palette P2215 control Cancel Patch B7 Submasters Fixtures Intensity eH Palette Groups Effects Snapshots _
362. rtened battery life A lower value indicates a weaker signal and an extended battery life Step 7 Press Save s3 Step 8 You must cycle the power to apply the new settings Note Default S4 will reset remote settings to their default values No confirmation is required 326 To change the frequency and network id in your base station receiver with an lon console Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 In the browser menu select File lt Exit lon A dialog box opens asking you to confirm Confirm this command by pressing Yes The lon application will close and the Eos Configuration Utility ECU will display Press Settings button A new settings dialog box will display Press the RFR button A RFR dialog box will display Choose the appropriate High Frequency Channel setting from the drop down box must be from 1 12 matched with the remote Choose the appropriate Network ID setting from the drop down box must be from 1 99 Accept the changes by pressing the Accept button To cancel changes press Cancel The next time you start the lon application lon will automatically send the new settings to any base station that is connected to the console If you have any difficulty reset the base station by disconnecting the USB cable from the console and then reconnect it This cycles power to the unit lon Operations Manual Basic Use Guidelines Keypad Function The k
363. s 56 You have the option of importing standard USITT ASCII asc or Light Wright txt or asc from the Show File Archive a File Server if connected or a USB device To import a show file navigate within the Browser to File Import Type of file to import and press Select If you are importing an USITT ASCII file you will have two options Import as Library Fixtures or Import As Custom Fixtures Import as Library Fixtures will allow lon to try to match the fixtures in the file with fixtures in the lon library Import as Custom Fixtures will bring the fixtures in as they are in the file It is recommended to use Import as Custom Fixtures Navigate to the desired storage location and press Select When using import lon displays only the available files Navigate to the specific file and press Select Exporting a Show File Export your lon show file to a a standard USITT ASCII csv Focus Track or Fast Focus Pro show file using the export feature To export your lon show file in ASCII format navigate within the browser to File Export and press Select You have the option of exporting your show file in ASCII format to the Show File Archive to a File Server if connected or to a USB device Navigate to the desired storage location and press Select The alphanumeric keypad will display on the CIA Name the show file and press Enter The file will be saved in the specified location with the file name you en
364. s When Enter is pressed an advisory is posted When Undo is pressed again all highlighted commands will be undone and subsequently removed from the command history When removing more than one command a confirmation is required After an Undo has been performed a Redo button will appear in the command history You may press this button followed by Enter and the last undo will be redone to reinstate the removed commands In a multiple user environment each user is only able to undo the changes that they made In the undo command history the user will only see the commands that they used Note Not all commands can be undone including playback actions and manual attributes placed on channels or encoder actions Command History Command histories are kept for each editing session which begins when the console logs on to the network or when you load a new show file Each user builds an individual command history specific to the commands they have entered You can open the command history at any time by pressing More Sk Cmd History Commands that do not affect manual input or record targets loading a cue running a cue or moving a submaster are not included in the command history 15 Advanced Manual Control 201 202 lon Operations Manual Chapter 16 Multipart Cues Cues can be divided into up to 20 parts This chapter describes the methods used to create and edit multipart cues This chapter co
365. s 3 through 9 2 Delete Group 7 Enter deletes channel 2 from group 7 6 Using Groups 89 Group List The group list allows viewing and editing of groups Open the Group List To open the group list you can Press Group Group Press Blind amp Group n the browser select Group List from the Record Target Lists You can navigate within the group list using Next and Last or by selecting the group you want to work with Ordered View and Numeric View By default grouped channels will be displayed in ordered view Therefore grouped channels will appear in the order they were added to the group see Ordered Channels above If you wish to View the channels in numeric view press the Format key and the view will be switched channels will appear in numeric order from lowest to highest This setting is important in defining next and last functionality within groups in live blind If left in numeric format when using Next or Last group selection channels will be selected in numeric order If left in ordered view they will be selected based on their order of being stored to the group Editing Groups from the Group List An existing group can be modified without the need for recording or updating as follows Select the required group by pressing Group n Enter or using Next and Last to navigate through the list The selected group is highlighted in gold and above the CIA command l
366. s HTP or LTP for intensity parameters only Non intensity parameters NPs are always LTP Submasters can operate as HTP orLTP for intensity The default is HTP lon s default cue list setting for intensity is LTP see HTP LTP page 193 lon s default submaster setting for intensity is HTP HTP HTP is only applicable to the intensity of a channel HTP channels will output the level that is the highest of all inputs HTP channels are also referred to as pile on because as control inputs are added for example you may bring up cues and multiple submasters that all have the same channel recorded at various levels the system calculates which input has the highest level for that channel and outputs that level for the channel As control inputs are removed you pull some of the submasters down to zero the console will adjust the channel level if required to the highest remaining level LTP LTP is applicable to any parameter of any channel LTP output is based on the most recent move instruction issued to the channel parameter Any new values sent to the channel will supersede any previous values regardless of the level supplied lon determines the LTP value for a channel which is overridden by any HTP input values that are higher than the LTP instruction This is then finally modified by manual control Introduction 7 Other Reference Materials Help System A keyhelp system is also contained within your lon console To a
367. s Maga 126 Channel Check 127 Address at Level 127 Address Check 127 Using Move To 128 8 Basic Manual Control 107 Selecting Channels lon provides interactive ways to select channels including the control keypad and direct selects Channels are deselected when any action is taken on the keypad that is unrelated to manual control such as recording groups and cues or updating a record target etc You can also press Clear after a terminated command line to clear the channel selection Select Channels From the Keypad The keypad defaults to selecting channels therefore no channel key is provided Channels may be selected on the control keypad using the and Thru keys for consecutive or non consecutive channel selection The following examples illustrate various methods of selecting channels from the control keypad 5 Enter selects channel 5 5 7 Enter selects non consecutive channels 5 and 7 5 thru 9 Enter selects channels 5 through 9 2 thru 8 5 Enter selects a range of channels 2 through 8 except channel 5 6 Enter removes channel 6 from the current selection list 1 Enter adds channel 1 to the current list of channels Note You may use and or multiple times to add or remove multiple channel
368. s also by default have the same static IP address Default lon Console IP Address 10 101 100 101 Default lon RPU IP Address 10 101 95 101 Each lon device on the network should be given a unique IP address If running multiple devices of the same type for example two consoles or two RPUs you must alter the default static IP addresses to ensure proper functionality Changing the static IP address is done through the ECU see Network Settings page 299 on the Network page Manually change the IP address of any non primary lon device by clicking in the IP Address field and entering the new number from the keyboard When done press Enter Network Network Adapter Local IP Settings Enable DHCP IP Address 10 101 100 101 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Gateway 10 101 100 101 Network Services Network Services Address Service DHCP First Address 10 101 50 101 Number of addresses Note It is recommended that you alter the very last digit of the static IP address by an increment of one for each additional lon device on the network Therefore if the master ends in 101 change the backup to end in 102 a client to end in 103 and so on EJ Multi console and Synchronized Backup 309 User ID and multi console features Set in Setup see Displays page 103 User ID is an lon Eos specific identifier that can be set uniquely for each lon device or can be shared between
369. s by multiple programmers at once For more information on partitioned control see Using Partitioned Control page 289 lon Operations Manual Chapter 26 Using Partitioned Control Partitioned control allows discrete control and programming of channels between multiple programmers Partitions can restrict access to specific channels by a particular user This chapter contains the following sections About Partitioned Control 290 Setting Up Partitioned Control 290 s Palo IS a vend seta v RE RR er edit 290 e Creating New Partitions 291 Using Partitions 292 26 Using Partitioned Control 289 About Partitioned Control When multiple programmers are working on an lon system partitioned control can be used to restrict a specific user s access to certain channels This can help avoid overlapping control of channels by multiple programmers at once Channels can be included in more than one partition Partitions only affect which channels a user has access to They do not affect playback As cue attributes are shared in most instances programmers using different partitions will choose to store into different cue lists How to Use Partitions The primary use of partitioned control is to allow more than one programmer to work on a show file at the same time without the risk of one user storing data for ano
370. s from the selection Thru lists may be entered in ascending or descending order Note The Thru command uses the current flexichannel state Channels not included in the flexichannel mode except selected channels mode are not collected in a thru range Thru Thru can be used to collect all channels in the range even if they are not in the current flexi mode See Using Flexichannel on page 40 108 lon Operations Manual Next and Last The Next and Last buttons increment and decrement channel selection If only one channel is selected Next increments the channel selection to the next sequential channel while Last decrements the channel selection by one Select channel 10 then change the selection to channel 11 using the Next key 1 0 Enter Channel 10 is selected with a gold outline around the entire channel and the channel number is indicated in white Next Channel 11 is now selected with a gold outline and white channel number while channel 10 is no longer selected If there is no specific channel selected when Next or Last is pressed channel 1 is selected When a group of channels is selected pressing Next or Last selects the first or last channel in the channel list For Example Channels 11 through 20 are selected Next Channels 11 through 20 are still the specified channel list but only channel 11 is selected for control You can now sequentially press Ne
371. s to unfreeze the activity Press Assert amp Load or Go or Stop Back for the specific faders to resume the activity You may freeze and unfreeze cues and effects from the command line Effect 2 Fader Controls Freeze Enter to freeze effect 2 Freezing a specific effect is different from stopping an effect Freeze will stop the effect exactly where it is Effect 6 thru 9 Fader Controls Freeze Enter to freeze a specified range of effects When an effect is in freeze mode you can use the same command to unfreeze Effect 2 Fader Controls Freeze Enter Effect 6 thru 9 Fader Controls Freeze Enter lon Operations Manual Using Stop Effect The Stop Effect softkey can be used to stop all effects from operating on any or all faders or it may be used with the control keypad to stop a specific effect To stop all effects on a fader press Fader Controls Stop Effect amp Load of the associated fader To stop a specific effect regardless of the fader it is operating on press Effect 2 Fader Controls Stop Effect Enter When an effect is stopped all impact of the effect is removed and the stage output is as though the effect has never been activated Release a Fader To release a fader thereby clearing all cues from that fader press Fader Controls Release amp Load for the associated fader When a fader is unloaded control is returned to the mast
372. s visual indication of The parameter it controls The current setting value of the parameter For Example Encoder Encoder Encoder Encoder wheel 1 wheel 2 wheel 3 wheel 4 Position MSpeec Suma Trckbllo The above graphic shows the encoder LCD displaying the focus parameters for a moving light Encoder 1 is controlling pan e Encoder 2 is controlling tilt Encoder 3 is controlling position MSpeed e Encoder 4 is not assigned Pressing a different encoder page key loads the encoders with other parameters of that type if available 8 Basic Manual Control 113 114 Encoder paging The number of pages for each category is displayed at the right of the LCD You can go directly to the page required by pressing the encoder page button and a page number For example Form amp 3 this will take you to the third page of the form category Information in the encoder LCD is only as accurate as the patch information for that channel For example when you are working with color scrollers the standard manufacturer color frames will be displayed for scroller controls unless you have created a custom scroll for the selected channel in patch using the Scroll Editor When you have created a new scroll or wheel in patch for any channel and that channel is selected the custom information is displayed in the associated encoder LCD See Creating a new scroll or wheel on page 76 The encoder pages change depen
373. se er AGA 33 color indicators 36 controlling 33 conventions 35 database in patch 72 effect status 233 expanding 35 macro editor 266 navigating 33 OPCN etae gran ere pans 33 from the browser 33 from the hardkeys 33 from the softkeys 33 parameter 27 park parking from 225 patch opening 61 settings 68 playback status color indicators 41 indicators in 41 text indicators 41 scrolling within 34 spreadsheet view 45 summary data view 43 SWap re dane ane a AES 34 table view 44 zooming 34 DMX outputting 15 from lon 305 E edit softkey in cue list index 194 editing cues in blind 171 CUIVES 274 effect Vise ster hangan ee 242 from submaster list 262 groups from group list index 90 groups in live 89 MacOS R dd aou eid ees ud 269 palettes in blind 144 palettes in live 143 palettes in spreadsheet view 145 parameters in new fixture 82 presets 4 133 in spreadsheet view 136 in table view 135 pr
374. set is selected the following information will be displayed EJ Using About the number of move instructions the preset is used in the first cue the preset is used in the last cue the preset is used in the number of cue lists that use the preset 253 254 lon Operations Manual Chapter 271 Storing and Using Submasters Faders both virtual and physical can be assigned as submasters This chapter explains how to assign and use submasters on your lon console You may also use submasters with Universal Fader Wings For more information on these see Universal Fader Wings page 335 This chapter contains the following sections About Submasters 256 e Loading Submasters 259 Using Bump Button Timing With Submasters 261 E Storing and Using Submasters 255 About Submasters Submasters can store any parameter data for channels When storing from Live Record Only and Record can both be used to determine what contents are stored You can copy cues presets or palettes to a submaster as well Channels running effects can be loaded onto a submaster See Effects on Submasters on page 243 Submasters can be accessed using the slider module see Slider Module page 214 or the Universal Fader Wings see Universal Fader Wings page 335 Faders can be configured as submasters in setup see Fader Configuration page 96 or they can be defined while programming
375. so be placed on a channel parameter 1 Color Time 4 Delay 3 Enter places a time of 4 seconds and a delay of 3 seconds on all color parameters of channel 1 When timing has been applied to a channel parameter in live a small red t will be displayed with the channel This indicates the timing must be stored or updated to the required cue When this is done the t is displayed in blue In the Playback Status Display a is displayed in the associated parameter category time field indicating that not all of the parameters in the cue will use the cue timing The Time key can be held down to see the discrete delay or time information for channels in Live Blind Delay is displayed first followed by the timing value lon Operations Manual Assigning Cue Attributes You can record cues with specific attributes to affect how cues behave when executed Cue attributes include follow time hang time link loop curve rate and label Cue attributes can be entered when the cue is initially recorded or they can be added or modified at a later date Follow Hang A follow time creates an auto follow which automatically activates the next cue in the sequence when the follow time of the associated cue has elapsed The follow time begins counting from the moment the cue is executed The hang time is also an auto follow but rather than counting from the moment the cue is executed it is calculated from the completion of the
376. ssed again The downfade will bump to zero Sub 4 Time Enter resets all time for submaster 4 to default Up 0 Dwell Manual Down 0 Controlling Subfades Manually It is possible to take control of submasters even if they have recorded time To capture the fade you must push the potentiometer past the current fade level Once this is done control is transferred to the potentiometer for full manual control You may then use the potentiometer to increase or decrease the submaster level as needed E Storing and Using Submasters 261 262 Submaster List You can access the submaster list by pressing Sub Sub or through the browser Record Target Lists gt Submaster List gt Select The list view includes a list of all stored submasters including their label and all recordable properties You can navigate within the list by using the Next and Last buttons or by selecting the desired submaster from the command line When this tab is active the softkeys will repaint to supply you with options to affect the submaster type or if the submaster is set to independent You can also move a submaster using Move To For example Sub 1 Mode Enter toggles the submaster 1 between additive effectsub and inhibitive This can be done in live as well Sub 2 Independent Enter toggles submaster 2 s independent setting on and off Independent can only be activated on an additive submas
377. st have channels assigned to the submasters For Example Write submasters 1 through 5 and 15 through 17 each with its own channel selections at 10096 Then press e Learn 1 Enter Bump1 Bump2 Bump3 Bump4 Bump5 Fader Page Bump15 Bump16 Bump17 Learn Once you have created the macro from Live in Learn mode you can easily edit the sequence from the macro editor display See Macro Editor Display on page 266 EZ Storing and Using Macros 265 266 Macro Editor Display Macro editing is accomplished from the macro editor display As an alternative to recording your macro in live you may create it from this display instead Open the macro editor display from the browser by navigating to Record Target Lists gt Macro Editor then press Select The editor will display on an external monitor The display is divided horizontally the top portion displays the macro contents in detail while the bottom portion lists all macros including the label and contents While in the macro editor display any numeric entry on the command line is assumed to be a macro number If the macro number entered already exists and Enter is pressed the macro list will page to the selected macro and the macro content detail section will display all of the contents of the selected macro If the macro number entered does not exist in the list and Enter is pressed an empty macro will be created with the specified macro number
378. ster one Using Rem Din you can modify the record so only channels 1 through 5 are recorded to the submaster e 1 Thru 1 0 At Full Enter e Record Sub 1 Enter e 1 Thru 5 Record Sub 1 Rem Dim Enter The same works for Update Using the same example the submaster can be updated to contain only channels 1 through 5 at full e 1 Thru 1 0 At Full Enter e Record Sub 1 Enter 1 Thru 5 Update Sub 1 Rem Dim Enter Without the Rem Dim command the submaster would still contain channels 1 through 10 at full A Rem Dim command can also be used on a selective cue record It will force any channels not included in the record but are tracking forward from a previous cue to zero lon Operations Manual Highlight and Lowlight lon can be placed in Highlight or Lowlight mode Channels selected while in these modes will either go to a default setting or to a value provided by a highlight lowlight preset established in setup Modifications can then be made to those channels Any changes will be maintained when the highlight lowlight mode is removed Highlight is very useful to isolate and adjust individual fixtures Lowlight is simply an alternative state that might be useful at different points in programming for example perhaps you want shutters to be open for Highlight but not so in Lowlight To place lon in highlight mode press Highlight Enter The comma
379. ster Proportional LTP Proportional LTP List boundary to move up or down GUB dief SElGdiSd is pos oie here The top half of the cue list index displays all stored cues including cue attributes for the selected cue list The bottom half of the cue list index displays all stored cue lists The selected cue list is highlighted Using the mouse you can move the barrier between the stored cue display top and the stored list display bottom to increase or decrease the viewing area of either section Hover the mouse arrow over the list boundary until it changes to the familiar move boundary icon Then click and drag the boundary up or down to the desired height lon Operations Manual Cue List Attributes Cue list attributes determine how the cue list will interact with other playbacks Cue list attributes include The cue list number Playback The cue list label Fader proportional or intensity master I Master Independent On or Off default is off Intensity HTP or LTP setting default is LTP Assert External links When a cue list is loaded to a fader all attributes of that cue list are in effect When a new cue list is loaded the attributes of that cue list are in effect and any manually set behavior of the fader such as filter states timing disable etc are maintained When the cue list index is in focus the sofkeys change to HTP LTP Independent Assert Solo Mode Fader and Edit HT
380. structions for channels 1 5 If cue 5 is deleted the move instructions are deleted as well and the values from cue 4 will track directly into cue 6 and beyond In this instance if you used the Cue Only button in the delete instruction cue 5 would be deleted but the tracked values in cue 6 that originated in cue 5 would remain and be converted to move instructions In Cue Only Mode When the console is in cue only mode any subsequent tracked values are not eliminated but are converted to move instructions instead In the example above deleting cue 5 in cue only mode would result in any tracked values in cue 6 that originated in cue 5 being converted to move instructions If you apply the Track button to the delete instruction the move instructions from cue 5 are deleted and the values from cue 4 would then track into cue 6 and beyond Some examples of cue deletion are Delete lt Cue gt 5 Enter Enter deletes cue 5 Subsequent cues in the list are affected depending on the console default setting as described above Delete lt Cue gt 6 Cue Only Track Enter Enter deletes cue 6 making exception to the default setting as described above Delete Cue 7 Part 1 Enter Enter deletes part 1 of cue 7 Delete Cue 8 Part 1 Thru 3 Cue Only Track Enter Enter deletes parts 1 3 of cue 8 making exception to the default setting as described above Group 1 D
381. t loop and so on From the macro editor display select an existing macro number and press Enter The selected macro contents will display the detail section Press Edit to make changes to the content When in edit mode the browser changes to display all softkeys available for the system that would otherwise be difficult to find when recording a macro Make Man Make Abs Make Null Address Offset Mark Replace Lamp Chan With m Assert Highlight Check Flash Odd Even Reverse Random Softkeys ingleParar MultiPararr MovesOnly MinusLinks Use Marks Lamp Is In Isn tIn CanBe Can t Be Or Movesonly Controls AutoMark Rate AF MF Manual Link Loop Execute n mer Next to the softkeys display are paging buttons to page through the available softkeys When used these paging buttons will not be stored as content in your macro In addition a new set of macro editor softkeys are displayed while in edit mode including Loop Begin inserts a loop start command Loop End inserts an end command for a loop with a limited number of iterations An infinite loop is assigned when you use O for the iterations Wait inserts a pause Delete removes commands from the macro Wait for Input Inserts a pause in the macro to allow you to enter data The pause lasts until you press the Macro key again Then the remainder of the macro will be completed Done exits macro edit mode You may also use t
382. t is included in cue x You may also store this assert using Update or you can apply it in blind To place an assert on specific parameters Step 1 select channels Intensity Color Focus Beam or parameter buttons Assert Enter places an assert on the specific parameters of the selected channels Step 2 Record Cue x Enter the assert is recorded to cue x In the cue x row of the playback status display or cue list index a lower case a appears in the A column indicating that a partial assert is included in cue x Assert is a very useful tool allowing channels that have been seized by other cue lists to be repossessed by the associated cue list while still allowing the asserted channel data to be treated as tracked instructions Assert can also be used from the command line to manually replay portions of a cue without having to replay the entire cue Assert in this mode can only be used with cues that are currently active To place an assert on a portion of a cue Group 6 Assert Cue 4 Enter asserts the instructions for the channels in group 6 in cue 4 EZ Working with Multiple Cue Lists 189 Using AllFade Allfade is a cue attribute that commands any intensity values on stage that are not provided by the associated cue to fade to zero intensity when the cue is played The allfade will adhere to the downfade time of the associated cue This is useful in conjunction with assert so you can reg
383. t itself The three timing values are Upfade time this is the time for the submaster to fade from its home position to its target position 0 to Full if additive Full to 0 if inhibitive The default time is 0 Dwell time this is the time the submaster look will hold before starting the downfade This can be set to a specified time or to Hold or Manual H old time maintains the submaster values until the bump is pressed a second time Manual time applies the submaster values only as long as the bump is held The default is Manual Downfade time this is the time for the submaster to fade from its target position to its home position The default time is 0 At any time the potentiometer can be used to manually override fade progression or a submaster triggered with time To add bump button timing live Sub 8 Time 3 Time 4 Time 3 Enter adds a 3 second upfade 4 second dwell and 3 second downfade to submaster 8 Sub 4 Time Time Manual Time 3 Enter adds a manual dwell time and a 3 second downfade time to submaster 4 When the bump is pressed and held it will flash on and stay on until the button is released at which time it will begin the downfade Sub 4 Time 3 Time Hold Enter adds a 3 second upfade time and a hold dwell time When the bump is pressed the upfade starts Once at the target value it will remain there until the button is pre
384. t the mark is broken lon Operations Manual Data Key Pressing and holding Data allows you to view the values behind any referenced or marked data Data exposes the next lower reference level So if you view a palette reference and press Data the absolute data will be displayed instead If you are viewing a preset absolute or palette data will be displayed depending on what is contained in the preset The Data key is also used in combination with the encoder paging keys to change the level of detail in summary and views and to select parameters to view in spreadsheet modes Time Key Pressing and holding Time allows you to view discrete timing data behind any channel parameter Time exposes channel or parameter specific timing for any channels in the current cue The first value is the delay time If is displayed there is no delay The value to the right of the is the transition time Label Key Pressing and holding Label toggles the view to show reference labels or numbers depending on what display setting is being used See Show Reference Labels on page 103 EX System Basics 39 40 Using Flexichannel Flexichannel use of the Flexi key allows you to view only channels meeting a certain criteria in the live blind display therefore removing unwanted data from view Flexichannel has several available states which include allowing you to view All channels All patched channels A
385. t to the specified direct select Note When using selective record you must specify the channel list to be included or excluded as the case may be as part of the Record command Otherwise all parameters of channels with non default values will be stored in the preset You may also use the filters and Make Null as additional tools to decide what data will be stored For more information on these features see Using Filters 130 When you rerecord an existing Preset a confirmation will be required unless confirmations have been disabled in Setup lon Operations Manual Storing Presets using Record Only Record Only is a selective record process that stores only manual parameter data Therefore when used to record presets only manual data for channels will be stored in the preset As with Record filters and Make Null can be used to further modify what information is stored See Storing Data with Record Filters on page 186 The following methods can be used to store presets using Record Only Record Only Preset 5 Label name Enter records manua parameter data for all channels and adds a label to preset 5 Record Only Preset Next Enter records manual data to the next sequential preset number 3 Record Only Preset n Enter stores the preset withholding the group or channels specified Channel list Record Only Preset 6 Enter stores the preset
386. tax will move the patch information for channel 1 to the patch for channel 3 All data in the show file that was stored at channel 1 is also move to channel 3 To copy a channel to another location within patch 1 Copy To 2 Enter To copy a channel to another location within patch and all record targets in the show 1 Copy To 2 Entire Show Enter Unpatch a Channel To unpatch a channel while in patch you can press n At 0 Enter Unpatched channels can still be manipulated and can have data stored for them but they do not output any information as they are unpatched Replace By default if you patch an address to a channel that is already patched Eos will create a new part for the new address If you want to replace the current address with the new use Replace e n Replace n Enter replaces the address in part 1 of the selected channel Patching Moving Lights The process of patching moving lights requires more detail than patching a dimmer Specific information is required for more advanced control of the features offered by moving lights Tutorial Step 1 Step 2 To patch a moving light you must first open the patch display You may open the patch display from the browser or by pressing Displays gt Patch Enter a channel number or multiple numbers from the control keypad When typing any number from the control keypad and patch is in default channel mode channel is assume
387. te of the copied selection To make a change to a frame you must first select the frame then press Edit to display the media selection Or you can insert a new frame above a selected frame using the Insert softkey For example to insert a new frame in between existing frames 2 and 3 select frame 3 and press the Insert key The media selection will display Manufacturer Manufacturer cataloged media List catalog sorted numerically The media selection includes the following softkeys Gel Color Gobo and Effect each will display available media selections as they are cataloged by the associated scroll or wheel manufacturers Open places the frame in Open White Cancel cancels the media selection and returns to the frame editor When a manufacturer is selected from the list the catalog selection changes to display only the selected manufacturer s offerings When a specific catalog is selected the media will display in the last three columns of the editor When you make a media selection the display returns to the new wheel frame list where additional frames can be edited in the scroll or wheel Calibrating a Scroller You can calibrate the center point of any frame in a scroller using the calibrate feature This will ensure that color scroll frames will be centered over the aperture of the fixture when you advance a color scroll frame by frame You can do this using the virtual encoders or the en
388. tegory Paged encoders 2 encoder page buttons Power button Softkeys USB port LCD screen Blackout and Grandmaster E uM CE ELE Navigation keys Playback tae Control Level keypad wheel IEC receptacle MIDI Out and In Remote trigger port Phone Remote Port DMX ports Hard power switch VGA port p iis 4USB Ethernet 1 pig ports port D Note The lon hardware was recently revised For previous hardware versions please see the lon v 1 4 Operations Manual Rev B Terminology Power Button The power button on the front of the console is used to power up the lon console A separate power switch located in the rear panel of the console can be used to disconnect power from the console s internal components WARNING Before servicing the lon control console you must switch off the power from the rear of the console and disconnect the power cord completely lon Operations Manual USB Ports One USB port is provided on the front of the console to connect any USB storage device An additional four USB ports on the rear panel of the console can be used to connect peripherals such as an alphanumeric keyboard pointing device or touchscreen control for external monitors Encoders Encoders and the LCD see below for control of non intensity parameters are provided at the top center of the console The four encoders are pageable
389. tep effects 234 stop effect 219 stop back key 215 storing palettes using Record Only 140 using Record 139 presets using Record Only 131 using Record 130 using record filters 186 submasters about isse ER uA SAN 256 bump button timing with 261 clearing sacs nt ka malas 260 deleting 260 effects 243 liSt acne teo drain tee en 262 editing from 262 loading 259 manual control 261 recording 256 updating 260 summary view 43 modifying cues from 172 swap displays 34 synchronized backup 311 SOUP 2s 25 a Gries tose deeds gg 311 syntax structure 4 using enter 5 system using about 247 System Components 10 system riser DaSIC sete Li Pie She S 18 lon Operations Manual T table view 44 editing presets in 135 modifying cues from 172 technical services 3 text indicators in live blind 37 in playback status display 41 time bump buttons 261 cue setting 155 CUES piace see Rae eae 155 delays ie pe Ba 159 disable in playbac
390. ter Sub 2 Move To Sub 9 Enter Enter moves the contents label and timing data from submaster 2 and places it in submaster 9 Submaster 2 is removed You may copy the contents of a submaster by using the Copy To button Editing Submasters If you want to actually edit the contents of the submaster you can select the submaster and press Edit This changes focus to the live blind display and places you into the blind edit mode for the specified submaster You may also press Blind and select the required submaster from the command line Any changes made in this screen are automatically stored A Record or Update command is not required lon Operations Manual Chapter 22 Storing and Using Macros lon provides you with the ability to record macros which allow you to compose a series of programming actions and be able to execute them later by recalling the macro This chapter contains the following sections e Store a Macro from Live 264 Macro Editor Display 266 e Play Maer np a BREN LP NEAR bie eta 270 e Delete a Macro 270 EZ Storing and Using Macros About Macros Macros are comprised of any series of button presses both hard and softkeys screen commands and events lon provides you with the macro feature to simplify complex or repetitive console programming and operating tasks that you perform oft
391. ter moves in 8 seconds as specified in Cue 10 the source cue which is the source of their move instruction If no discrete timing is used for non intensity parameters When channels execute a mark the moves will use the time recorded in the marked cue For Example Cue 5 is recorded with a time of 10 seconds e Record Cue 5 Time 1 0 Enter A mark is applied to Cue 5 as above e Cue 5 Mark Enter Later channels 1 10 are assigned a mark instruction and then recorded into Cue 10 with no discrete timing 1 thru 1 0 Mark Enter e Record Cue 1 0 Enter When Cue 5 is executed channels 1 10 will perform their non intensity parameter changes in 10 seconds as specified in Cue 5 the marked cue EE Using Mark 181 182 lon Operations Manual Chapter 13 Using Filters Filters are used to determine which parameters can be stored to cues palettes and presets The filter selection tool in the CIA affects record operations as long as the filters are set This chapter contains the following sections e Record Fillers 252 524 3004 br ERR AD RES 184 Storing Data with Record Filters 186 KEJ Using Filters 183 Record Filters Record filters are used to select specific parameter data to store to record targets When no filters are selected all parameters can be stored as appropriate to the Record Record Only and selective record action used param
392. tered with a asc file extension You can export lon show files as a csv format by navigating within the browser to File Export CSV and select the location for the export the Show File Archive a File Server if connected or to a USB device Files can also be exported as in a Focus Track or Fast Focus Pro format by going to File Export Fast Focus Pro or Focus Track and select the location for the export the Show File Archive a File Server if connected or to a USB device lon Operations Manual Deleting a File lon provides you with the ability to delete show files from the Show File Archive and the File Server from within the browser To Delete a Show File Navigate within the browser to File gt Open and press Select Navigate to the desired show file and press Delete Press Enter to confirm or any other key to abort the deletion process File Manager lon has a file manager which provides a way to manage show files See File Manager on page 303 ES Managing Show Files 57 58 lon Operations Manual Chapter 5 Patch The Patch is where patching data is stored and can be viewed using the patch display Once a channel is patched to an output and the output is connected to a device for example a dimmer moving light or accessory the channel will then control that device KI This chapter contains the following sections Displays i i Dee HEAD ile eie 61 Create and Edit Patch
393. that were not included in the palettes or presets used in cue 5 those values would also be updated to the cue as absolute data Updating Without References Make Absolute If you want to record your changes to the cue without updating the references you may use Make Absolute break the associated to the reference The Make Absolute command can be applied to the required channels or parameters before the update instruction or they can be applied during the update Update Make Absolute Enter breaks the references for any parameters which have been changed and update the cue with the changes The referenced target will no longer be displayed in the channels which were made absolute All of the data updated in cue 5 will now be shown as absolute data 5 Thru 9 Update Make Absolute Enter breaks only the references for channels 5 9 and record their manual values to the cue Other manual values will not be included in this update You may also use Record Only to break references For Example Cue 5 is active and onstage Channels 5 20 are currently referencing preset 1 You make changes to channels 5 9 The data for these changes is now manual Press e Record Only Enter Enter If there were other changes on stage you could have commanded 5 thru 9 Record Only Enter Enter Only the manual data will be recorded as an update to cue 5 The reference to preset 1 for channels 5 9 is broken and now t
394. the left lt Effect gt 1 Type Step based Enter Scale Applies only to relative effects This modifies the amount the pattern is offset from the current parameter values The scale is expressed as a percentage increase or decrease 25 25 of the programmed value e Scale 3 0 Enter or you may adjust this using the Scale encoder Cycle Time Provides a cumulative time to complete one full iteration of an effect In relative effects the cycle time determines the length of time required for one channel to complete the cycle In absolute and step based effects the cycle time determines the time required to complete one full iteration of the effect In these effect types modifying the cycle time changes the timing values proportionally within the effect itself To change the cycle time press Cycle Time and then enter the desired time in minutes and seconds from the keypad followed by Enter This can also be adjusted from the encoder EL Creating and Using Effects 229 Duration Cycle This determines the length of time an effect will run To specify press Duration Cycle and then choose the desired method from the buttons that appear to the left The options are Infinite for step and absolute effects the effect will run until the channel is provided a new instruction or the effect is stopped Relative effects with an infinite duration will run until a stop flag is applied Duration the
395. ther user s partitioned channels The most common example of this situation is when one user is programming moving lights while another user programs conventional fixtures Partitioned control allows these users to divide the channels between them so they may work simultaneously If one user stores data using Record or Record Only partitioned control will guarantee that only data for their partitioned channels will be stored Data for channels not in the partition will be ignored when any store commands are performed Setting Up Partitioned Control Partitioned control is enabled or disabled in show settings see Show Settings page 95 Partition defaults to Disabled Enabling or disabling partitioned control is a systemwide setting so all consoles on the network will adhere to the setting Partition List To view the partition list click the Partitions button in Show Settings This display lists all existing partitions There are four pre programmed partitions in lon they are Partition 0 No channels and no fader control This is the default for all users when partitioned control is enabled for the first time on a show To gain control you must select a different partition Partition 1 All channels Allows the user access to all channels Partition 2 Single Parameter Channels Allows the user access to only channels with a single parameter Partition 3 Multiple Parameter Channels Allows the user access
396. time for all categories at once press Intensity Up Thru Pressing At selects manual times The categories for which you may set default times are e Intensity Up Intensity Down Focus Color Beam Setup 95 Fader Configuration This screen allows you to specify what your faders are assigned as playbacks submasters or grandmasters These faders can be used by opening the virtual faders see Slider Module page 30 or by using the Universal Fader Wings see Universal Fader Wings page 335 Note Unless you need a grandmaster or a cue list loaded to more than one fader it is generally not necessary to use the fader configuration screen Assigning cue lists and submasters can all be done from live 96 CE FZ meee A YF Mapped To Map d To Mapped To Mapped To Mapped fo Mapped To 0 1 1 2 3 4 Defined as Submaster Defined as Playback Defined as Grandmaster To change the configuration of any fader use the Page buttons to access the fader page you wish to alter For the desired fader click the appropriate button playback submaster or grandmaster for the configuration you desire Then click the Mapped to button and enter the number you want to map the fader to see Mapped to below When you are done making changes click Close To leave this screen at any time without saving changes you must click Close Mapped to This button is used to specify the action target o
397. tion If the channel contains a reference in the cue it is indicated If not a is displayed Any channels not owned by the background cue are displayed as Unowned and will therefore be excluded from the update Absolute 3reakNestec Update Dialogue Box Once you have made a selection from the available options press Enter and the target will be updated ELI Working with a Single Cue List 167 168 Updating to References When a cue is active it is possible that various record targets palettes or presets will be played back within that cue As changes are made to the data in that cue as well as to the individual palettes or presets updating both the cue and references within that cue is simple When you have overridden a reference in a cue the data is displayed in red with a red R in superscript next to the channels intensity By default lon updates any referenced data that was included in the cue For Example Cue 5 is recalled Live It contains references to color palette 1 and preset 2 You make changes to channels included in these record targets To update both the cue and the palettes or presets press e Update Enter This will automatically take the manual changes and update them to color palette 1 and preset 2 Therefore cue 5 now references these new values and the modifications to CP1 and PR2 have propagated through all of the show data If you had made changes to other channels
398. tion that runs on an Apple iPhone or iPod Touch The application can be downloaded from the Apple Application Store search for iRFR The iRFR offers the same functionality of the RFR A closed wireless network is needed For additional information on the iRFR including setup please visit the iRFR Documentation Wiki lon Operations Manual Appendix F Universal Fader Wings Overview Universal fader wings can be used in conjunction with your lon console to facilitate the use of submasters and playbacks The wings are available in 2x10 or 2x20 or 1x20 configurations The fader wings are designed to physically attach to your lon console thereby receiving power from the console and eliminating the need for the external power supply Or you may connect wings to lon using a USB cable and provide power using an external power supply 1 x 20 Setup The 1 x 20 fader wing is specifically designed to be physically attached to your console A USB cable connection is required To install the 1 x 20 on your lon console follow the instructions that were included with the 1 x 20 wing Be sure to connect the wing to lon using the USB cable that was included with the wing 2 x 10 and 2 x 20 Setup 2x10 and 2x20 Universal Fader Wings may be attached together and then physically attached to lon consoles Wings may also be connected to lon or Eos consoles RPUs or RVIs using a USB cable When connecting fader wings with a USB cable one external p
399. tioned 292 flip soar ve wen EE PE ES 126 focus effects 239 focus palette description 138 follow hang 159 form control 116 group list index USING i ihe see den Le pates E ES 90 format changing 43 345 patch view 61 summary data view 43 freeze a a a 218 G gateways 15 go key oe eee 215 inplayback 215 Go To Cue timing 213 go to cue 213 with multiple cue lists 191 go to cue 0 amp Load 215 command line 191 playback button 215 go to cue out 191 grandmaster configuring 96 Graphical User Interface GUI display conventions 35 group listindex 90 editing from 90 opening 90 groups ADOUt 2 245 os Vu Andy aed 87 277 deleting 89 editing from the group list index 90 editing in live 89 group list index opening 90 numeric view 90 ordered channels 88 ordered view 90 recalling erret haa 89 recording in live 88 recording with offset 89 selecting 89 updating i
400. tions Manual Creating and Editing Curves Creating a Curve When you have opened the curves display see About Curves page 272 you can select a curve or create a new curve by pressing Curve x Enter If the curve is already stored the contents are displayed in the CIA If this is a new curve a linear curve is displayed 0 7 15 22 28 33 38 42 45 48 51 55 59 63 67 72 77 82 BB 94 FF 50 60 Control Input Move To Pre established Curve O 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 FF Control Input Curve New Default linear Curve EE Storing and Using Curves 273 274 Editing Curves Using the Keypad Once selected and displayed in the CIA you can edit a curve from the keypad Points are established in increments of five You can add more points from the keypad 3 At 1 Enter adds control input point 3 and sets its curve level at 10 7 7 At Full Enter adds control input point 77 and sets its curve level at full You can specify points and adjust their levels in the command line or you may use the keys below to alter the curve Page B selects the next fade completion point Page d4 selects the previous fade completion point e Level Wheel adjusts the output level of the selected point Page A raises the selected point s output by 1 Page V lowers the s
401. to only channels with multiple parameters To select a partition in the list enter it in the command line e Partition 2 Enter If partitioned control is enabled this will now be your assigned partition lon Operations Manual Creating New Partitions To create a new partition press Partition x Enter where x is a number that does not yet exist in the partition list This will create a new partition highlight it in the list and if partition is enabled assign it as your partition To assign channels to that partition enter them in the command line 1 Thru 9 6 Enter You can also use and Group to further modify the channels in the partition When adding subtracting channels to a partition if you do not use or before channel numbers the numbers will replace the channels in the partition rather than adding to or subtracting from them This overwriting does require a confirmation if enabled in setup When you are finished you can press Done to return to the setup screen Deleting Partitions To delete any partition simply type the syntax in the command line Delete Partition 5 Enter Enter deletes partition 5 from the list Preprogrammed partitions cannot be deleted 26 Using Partitioned Control 291 292 Using Partitions When partitions are enabled and a partition is selected you may only record data for the channels included in the partition wit
402. ttached the RVI can be used as a remote programming station The RVI provides supports for a maximum of two DVI or SVGA monitors 1280x1024 minimum resolution For more information see the appendix Remote Video Interface RVI page 319 Radio Focus Remote RFR The RFR provides wireless control of key front panel functions The base station for the RFR can be networked into the system or can connect to a console or remote device using the USB interface For more information see the appendix Remote Control page 323 lon Operations Manual Gateways 1 B e lon is part of a fully networked system capable of direct output of both ETCNet2 and Net3 Gateways can be configured to listen to either ETCNet2 or Net3 and provide interface to devices in the lighting system that do not accept network communication directly Gateways are provided for DMX RDM output show control input and output and analog input and output Net3 to DMX RDM gateways are provided with a maximum of four outputs which can be male female or terminal strip Show Control Gateway supports MIDI In Thru and Out and SMPTE In O Gateway supports 24 analog inputs 16 SPDT contact closure outputs and RS 232 serial protocol En System Overview 11 Console Geography Below is a diagram of the lon console with references made to specific areas of use The terms and names for each area and interface are used throughout this manual Parameter ca
403. ttom section displays the current function of the soft keys it also displays the various modes when Mode More SK is pressed and held Thumbwheels The two thumbwheels on the RFR one left one right have varying functionality depending on the selected mode see RFR Operation Modes page 329 Generally speaking the left thumbwheel acts as a level wheel It increases or decreases intensity for selected channels The right thumbwheel behaves as next and last for scrolling through data lists LE Remote Control 327 Recharge the Handheld Battery A battery level indicator is found in the upper right corner of the handheld LCD When the battery is near to a complete drain the indicator will flash When charging the indicator will depict increasing power to verify that it is charging When the remote is not in use set the switch to the Off position to guard against accidental key presses and to conserve battery power Charge the battery using the USB mini b cable that shipped with your RFR Connect the USB mini b connector to the handheld remote and the other end to the USB charger adapter supplied with your RFR You may also attach the USB cable to a powered USB hub personal computer or your console A full recharge may take up to 12 hours Provided there is enough battery charge you may use the remote while charging CAUTION If you choose to charge the remote from the lon console you should unplug the base
404. ual DVI Display Ethernet Not Used CO00000Ng0C0000000p0000000000000 6 AC Power IEC connector Keyboard Not Used Attach the appropriate IEC power cord to the power connector then to an AC receptacle Attach the dual DVI connector Y adapter to the DVI port Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 If you have VGA monitors attach the VGA adapters provided to the DVI Y adapter Do not use the VGA connectors on the back of the RVI The minimum screen resolution must be at least 1280x1024 with 32 bit color Connect the USB mouse and keyboard to the USB connectors If you wish to use a PS2 mouse or keyboard not provided use the appropriate connectors on the RVI Attach a network ethernet cable to the Ethernet port All communications to the associated control console are made over this Ethernet connection Connection to the console may be made either directly using a Cat5 or better null modem cable or through an Ethernet hub or Ethernet switch using standard Cat5 or better patch cables When all connections are made activate the hard power switch on the rear panel Press the soft power switch on the front of the unit to power up the RVI
405. ual encoders opening 115 USO am sit NAY KN des Loan 115 with scroller calibration 78 virtual faders assigning 214 virtual faders See slider module 30 virtual keyboard 29 W web site aaan 3 wheel picker 74 working with a single cue list 149 working with multiple cue lists 187 353 354 lon Operations Manual Corporate Headquarters 3031 Pleasant View Road P O Box 620979 Middleton Wisconsin 53562 0979 USA m Tel 608 831 4116 m Fax 608 836 1736 London UK m Unit 26 28 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU UK m Tel 44 0 20 8896 1000 m Fax 44 0 20 8896 2000 Rome IT a Via Ennio Quirino Visconti 11 00193 Rome Italy Tel 39 06 32 111 683 m Fax 44 0 20 8752 8486 Holzkirchen DE Ohmstrasse 3 83607 Holzkirchen Germany Tel 49 80 24 47 00 0 Fax 49 80 24 47 00 3 00 Hong Kong Rm 1801 18 F Tower 1 Phase 1 Enterprise Square 9 Sheung Yuet Road Kowloon Bay Kowloon Hong Kong m Tel 852 2799 1220 Fax 852 2799 9325 Service Americas service etcconnect com m UK service etceurope com m DE techserv hoki etcconnect com m Asia service etcasia com Web www etcconnect com w Copyright 2009 ETC All Rights Reserved m Product information and specifications subject to change ce 4310M1210 1 7 0 m Rev A m Released 2009 07 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA PLEASE READ THE F
406. uch as rotate index or special effects When more than two modes are available the Mode key can be pressed repeatedly advancing through the various modes Each mode will display beneath the current parameter setting When only two modes are available the alternate mode is indicated instead of a Mode key Toggling that button switches the encoder wheel to the alternate mode Flip The Flip button available in the Pan Tilt section of the encoder LCD is used to flip the unit into its exact same position but from the other direction Depending on the current values of pan and tilt there may be multiple flips Trackball On Off The TrckbllOn Off as displayed in the Pan Tilt section of the encoder LCD when either the pan or tilt encoder is held down is used to give pan and tilt functionality to a mouse or trackball device When this function is turned on above the CIA will be a message saying Cursor as Pan Tilt Multiple Encoder Control When parameters require more than one encoder for full control the encoder LCD provides indication that the encoders are related to each other by name Typically additional modes will load on other pages but will reference the master parameter unique name If there are multiple instances of a device in a single channel such as two fixed gobo wheels or two color wheels etc each device will load onto separate encoders Virtual Encoders You can use the virtual encoder module to vi
407. ue is considered complete and the cue is released from the manual fader If the slider is at any value other than zero when the cue is executed intensity values will play back normally If the slider is returned toward zero intensity in the cue will face to the previous level Faders set as Intensity Masters will master the intensity level for cues during playback Therefore intensity masters set below 100 will proportionally limit playback of intensity data relative to the level that the slider is set All non intensity parameters are unaffected by the slider Once the slider has reached full control of intensity is retained If the slider is moved toward zero intensity will proportionally fade toward zero not the previous state as per proportional faders For Example The playback fader for cue list 1 is an intensity master and the slider is set at 50 When a cue is played back on this fader intensity values will raise to 50 of their final values and then stop As the intensity master is raised lowered intensities will increase decrease accordingly Once the slider has reached full control of intensity is retained Move To The Move To softkey is used to move cues from one location in a cue list to another location in the same or even a different cue list When cues are moved values that had tracked will be matched to the previous cue and will be auto blocked by the system The impact on subsequent cues is based on track cue only
408. untered The Cue Only Track key is an exception to this behavior When you record a cue in the middle of an existing cue list using the Cue Only button will prohibit new information from tracking into the subsequent cue When you rerecord or update a cue the modifications will not track forward Note In the following examples the command Cue Only indicates the same key hit of Cue Only Track which is a single button on the keypad The system setting determines the actual context of the button depending on the mode in which the system is operating For clarity only the contextual function of the button is used in the examples With system set to Track Record Cue 5 Cue Only Enter records cue 5 New values or changes will not track into the subsequent cue Color Record Cue 5 Cue Only Enter as above the recorded data will not track forward and all color data is excluded from the record operation Record Only Cue 5 Cue Only Enter records all manual data but doesn t allow it to track into subsequent cues 5 Record Cue 6 Cue Only Enter records the specified cue except the contributions from channel 5 The stored data will not track forward in the list In Cue Only Mode When you create a new cue any channel parameter data from the previous cue is tracked into the new cue The Cue Only Track key can be used as an applied exception to the
409. up 3 to preset 6 3 Copy to 6 Cue 8 Enter copies the data from channel 3 to channel 6 in cue 8 3 Copy to 4 thru 9 Enter copies the data from channel 3 to channels 4 thru 9 3 Copy to 8 Cue 2 1 Cue Only Track Enter copies the data from channel 3 to channel 8 in cue 2 1 and takes exception to the track cue only settings in regard to subsequent cues in cue list 2 Cue 2 Copy to Cue 7 Enter copies all of the contents of cue list 2 to cue list 7 Cue 1 1 thru 1 0 Copy To Cue 5 5 lt thru gt Enter copies cues 1 thru 10 from cue list 1 to cue list 5 starting with cue 5 1 Copy To 2 0 Only Levels Enter copies only the parameter information from channel 1 to channel 20 lon Operations Manual Using Recall From Recall From is similar to Copy To except that it retrieves data from other locations and can be used only for a channel list recalling from the same channel list but in a different location for example a cue Recall From is essentially a copy from command All parameter data for selected channels will be recalled or by using the IFCB category buttons or parameter buttons you may recall subsets of channel data To only recall only intensity levels use the Only Levels softkey Below are some examples of recall commands from record targets 2 Recall From Cue 5 Enter recalls all recorde
410. ure an effect submaster press Sub x Mode Enter Note The Mode softkey toggles between inhibitive effectsub and additive Press Mode until effectsub is on the command line Recording an Effect to a Submaster To apply an existing effect press Select Channels Effect x Enter Recording to a submaster press Record Sub x Enter Running an Effect from a Submaster The way effects are played back from a submaster depends on its mode and whether the submaster is set to be a proportional fader or an intensity master Below is an example of four different submasters in different modes with the same effect stored to them Effect on an Additive Proportional Submaster The submaster contains the intensity pan tilt data along with the effect Pressing the bump button starts the effect The fader controls values not affected by the effect Pressing the bump button again stops the effect Effect on an Additive Intensity Master Submaster Pressing the bump button marks the lights and starts the effect The fader brings up any intensities stored in the submaster Pressing the bump button again stops the effect Effect on an Effect Proportional Submaster Pressing the bump button starts the effect The fader controls the rate and or size based on the effect s entry behavior Pressing the bump button again stops the effect Effect on an Effect Intensity Master Submaster Pressing the bump button
411. urer for patching e Selecting a specific manufacturer repaints the display with all devices that are available from that manufacturer After you select a device the device type ap pears in the command line in the Type box in the CIA and in the Type field for that channel in the patch display Label An optional user defined label You can use the Label key to display the virtual PC keyboard on the CIA Pressing Label or Label after a label has already been assigned will display the label on the command line for editing purposes Pressing Label Label will delete the text 1 At 5 Label lt S4 house right Enter patches channel 1 to output 5 and labels channel it S4 house right 68 lon Operations Manual RDM Discovery If enabled lon will obtain RDM device information when available The default setting is Disabled RDM must be enabled in the ECU before discovery is allowed See Enable RDM on page 301 When enabled the console will automatically make discovered RDM devices available for patching The console will set everything required to patch the device except the channel number RDM discovery can be disabled at any time to stop automatic RDM device additions and modifications Ci Note lon only supports RDM devices that are connected through an external ACN gateway Supported gateways are the ETC Net3 4 or 2 port Gateways Note RDM Discovery will default back t
412. ut primary console definition print show file proportional fader 350 136 147 protocols 299 ACN rames 2 ae disk ee 299 ArtNet 299 Avab UDP 299 ETCNet2 299 Local DMX 299 R Radio Focus Remote RFR 323 basicuse 327 keypad 327 LCD 1 2 noua et uus 327 recharging 328 thumbwheels 327 changing frequency 326 in System Overview 10 in System Riser EL aaa 19 operation modes 329 liVG Losses evi use 330 Dark een iE 329 patchi fesses ane sa 332 playback 331 overview base station receiver 325 handheld remote 324 recharging 328 technical specifications 333 range editing new fixtures 85 rate cue attribute 161 rate override 220 RDM device details 252 discovery 69 enable 301 real time clock 282 recall from 197 record CUGHISK z ier hmi ans 188 using Record Only 188 using Record 188 cues IN live reu lose 151 using Record Only 152 using Record 151 cues in blind 171 filters with 184 groups live
413. utes can be defined as the parts are recorded or they can be added after the part has been created For example Record Cue 2 Part 1 Delay 8 Enter Cue 4 Part 3 Color Time 6 Enter Cue 8 Part 9 AutoMark Off Enter Record Only Cue 5 Part 2 Assert Enter For more on cue attributes see Assigning Cue Attributes page 159 KO Multipart Cues 205 206 Using Update in Live Updating a multipart cue is generally the same process as updating a single part cue except you will provide a specific part cue number in the update command Various referenced data such as palettes or presets can be assigned to build a multipart cue If you have made changes to referenced data within a multipart cue thereby creating manual data pressing Update Enter updates both the multipart cue and any referenced data with the new levels as it does with single part cues You can update a part of a multipart cue with only selected parameters as well For Example Assume you have written cue 1 which is a multipart cue and is active Part 2 includes channels 1 through 5 referencing intensity palette 2 which is set at 25 Select channels 1 through 5 and change the intensity value to 21 The data in live will indicate the new levels in red and an R is displayed to indicate the reference has been broken To update cue 1 part 2 including the new intensity levels breaking the reference to the intens
414. value specifies the number of times the loop instruction will be performed Since the sequence has run once prior to the loop command the total number of passes will be the specified number of loops 1 lon Operations Manual Rate The Rate softkey can be used to apply a rate adjustment to all timing in the cue The default rate is 100 which is real time To slow a cue down set the rate below 100 to speed the cue up set the rate above 100 The range rate for a cue is 0 2000 A timing value of 5 with a rate of 50 will replay in 10 seconds A timing value of 5 with a rate of 200 will replay in 2 5 seconds Following is an example of using rate Record lt Cue gt 4 Rate 1 2 5 Enter records the specified cue and places a rate override instruction on all timing values The cue would now be played back at 125 of recorded time values Note You can use the playback rate override function to determine the rate at which you want to play the cue back and then apply that rate to the cue This eliminates the need to adjust all of the timing in the cue if you only need to speed it up or slow it down Curve Curve is used to affect the percent completion of a cue or part by applying the curve s output level as the percent completion for all fade calculations Following is an example of how to assign a curve to a cue Cue 6 More SK Curve 5 Enter applies curve 5 to cue 6 When a curve is a
415. ve changed to the following Network Mode Backup Master _ Jion ETC DEMLKIDINIDLHS 1 untdiod __ Network Oplions Reese Control Go Offline Your backup is now acting as the master and is controlling the lighting system The primary will wait until it is redesignated as the master and the backup is reassigned to it If at any point you change masters you must individually reassign any clients to the new master through the network configure screen Note If the primary comes back online it will not retake control of the lighting system 312 lon Operations Manual Backup Scenarios Console and console Two consoles can be used to provide backup Either can be configured as the primary or the backup If the primary console fails the second console will take control with full show data intact This is a useful scenario for touring multi user applications RPU and console One RPU and one console can be used as a backup option In this configuration it is recommended that you set the RPU as the primary and the console as the backup In this scenario should the RPU go offline you will still have the full functionality of the console user interface at your disposal RPU and RPU Two RPUs may serve as primary and backup also A backup system of this type can support many client consoles at once which you may turn on and off as needed without the need to reset toa different master each time This a
416. verwritten Only manual changes will be stored to the palette It is also possible to Update to add specific changes to the record target See Editing Palettes Live on page 143 140 The following methods can be used to selectively store manual parameter data to palettes using Record Only Record Only Color Palette 2 Enter records only the manual color parameter data to color palette 2 Record Only Beam Palette 5 Label lt name gt Enter records manual beam parameter data for all channels and adds a label to beam palette 5 9 Record Only Color Palette Next Label lt name gt Enter stores to the next sequential color palette withholding the group or channels specified and adds a label select channels Record Only Focus Palette 2 Enter stores focus palette 2 but only includes the manual data for the specified channels and parameters 1 Thru 9 Iris Zoom Record Only Beam Palette 5 Enter stores only manual zoom and iris data for channels 1 9 to beam palette 5 lon Operations Manual Using Filters with Palettes Filters can be used to modify what data is stored to a palette by a record action The parameters that are active or filtered allow those parameters to be stored to record targets To filter a parameter Step1 Click the Filter button in the top right corner of the parameter grid in the CIA Step 2 In the CIA click the button
417. vides a move instruction for the channel in the new cue the channel is now owned by the second cue list It will not return to cue list 1 until that cue list provides a move instruction for the channel Assert may be used to override this default behavior allowing a cue list s control over a channel to resume even when the channel s data is tracked This rule is not followed when executing an out of sequence cue An out of sequence cue is any cue that is recalled via Go To Cue a Link instruction or manually changing the pending cue In general applications the entire contents of the cue both moves and tracks will be asserted on an out of sequence cue Block vs Assert In previous ETC consoles placing a block instruction on a channel was a way to treat a tracked value as a move instruction both in editing and playback In lon this behavior is now split up Blocked channel data is an editing convention only and it prohibits tracked instructions from modifying the associated data Blocked data has no impact on playback the channels will continue to play back as though they were tracks Assert is used to force playback of a tracked blocked value lon Operations Manual Live and Blind Live and Blind are methods to view and edit data in your show files When you press the Live key the screen will show you the live display When you press Blind you will see the blind display In either case you may use the Format key to
418. w level will not track back You can force it by pressing Trace twice Updating a Non Active Cue Itis possible to use the same update commands illustrated above to update inactive cues cues not live onstage In these situations if the updated cue is not the source of a channel s live value manual data will remain manual If the updated cue is the source of the current value the values will change to magenta indicating tracked when the update is completed lon Operations Manual Recording and Editing Cues from Blind Press Blind and the selected cue will be displayed You can make changes to cues in the blind display using either the summary table or spreadsheet views Note Edits in blind take effect immediately Record or Update commands are not required in blind If changes are made in the blind display to an active cue these changes will not impact the current stage state To make blind changes active you can press Assert amp Load button for the fader associated with the cue Move instructions can be removed from a cue by selecting the channel and pressing At Enter This allows all values from the previous cue to track into the current cue You can also use this command for specific parameters as well For Example Suppose you are in blind cue 5 and you make changes to channels 1 5 e 1 Thru 5 At 5 0 Iris 3 5 Enter Intensity goes to 50 and Iris to 35 You decide to remove the
419. w show file for ranges this will be the location in the new show of the first component in the range the others will follow in order lon Operations Manual To open only partial components from a show file Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 From the browser navigate to the desired show file see Open the desired location page 48 When the partial show load screen appears click the Advanced button The partial components selection screen will appear in the CIA Select the show components that you wish to load by clicking on their respective buttons on the left side of the CIA The components will appear in the list to the right as you select them Click any fields for which you want to enter specific numbers The field if editable will highlight in gold Enter the numbers using the keypad to specify the desired cues groups effects and so on Click OK to load the components to the new show You may exit the partial show load screen at any time by clicking the Cancel button This will return you to the browser You may clear all selected components from the table at any time by clicking the Reset button You may exit the advanced loading screen at any time by clicking the Advanced button This will return you to the general partial show load screen ES Managing Show Files 51 Merging Show Files lon supports the merging of esf show files Note Merging show files is different f
420. when another cue list has taken control of that channel or parameter Assert can be applied to cues cue parts channels channel parameters or to entire cue lists Asserted channels will play back their tracked and blocked values regardless of cue list ownership when the associated cue is replayed At a Cue Level When applied at a cue level Assert ensures that a data in the cue both moves and tracks will be played back at their stored values To place an assert on a cue press Cue x y Assert Enter the cue will assert all of its channels upon playback An A will be displayed in the A column of the cue attributes cue index playback status and so on indicating the cue has been asserted At a Channel Level When applied at a channel or parameter level assert ensures that the entire channel or the specified parameter will be played back at its stored value To place an assert on a channel or group of channels Step 1 select channels Assert Enter a red A will appear next to all of the channels parameters in the live blind display This indicates the assert is placed but not yet recorded to a cue Step 2 Record Cue x Enter the red A turns to blue in the live blind display indicating the assert has been recorded In the cue x row of the playback status display or the cue list index a lower case a appears in the A column indicating that a partial asser
421. where in the macro list numerically e For instance if you have macros 1 through 5 in the list and you want to move or change macro 1 to macro 6 so that your most commonly used macros are first in the list you would press 1 Move To 6 Enter This leaves only macros 2 through 6 in the list EZ Storing and Using Macros 267 Create a New Macro from the Display From the macro editor display enter any unrecorded macro number from 1 to 1000 and press Enter Your new macro number will display in the macro list in numerical order but will not have a label or any contents To store the macro contents select the macro and press Edit A cursor appears flashing in the macro content detail portion of the display ready for you to add the macro content For Example Create macro 3 Write the instruction to set all active channels to 50 then sneak them to their original levels over 10 seconds and last link to macro 5 e Macro 3 Enter Edit Group 5 At 5 Enter Sneak Time 1 0 Enter e Macro 5 Enter Select While in macro edit mode all keys are entered as content except the macro editor softkeys arrow keys Escape Select and Learn keys lon Operations Manual Edit an Existing Macro When you have created a macro using macro learn mode from live or otherwise you can edit the content of your macro by removing or adding commands and special macro softkey functions such as wai
422. will display the following information EJ Using About Device Type Name Component Status Connected IP Address 247 Clicking on a CEM in the About System list will display the following information about that device e Rack Name e Rack Type e Ambient Temperature Phase A B C voltages e Frequency Filter Hours Remaining e Rack Errors Group Number e Group Name Network Settings Software Version Buttons available in the CEM About System screen are Activ Preset Deactiv Preset and Clear Errors Note Clearing CEM errors from lon will be temporary unless the errors have been fixed at the CEM Errors displayed on Eos will clear on their own once they have been cleared from the CEM 248 lon Operations Manual About Channel Press About to put the CIA into About mode When a channel is selected the information below is displayed You can select the information you wish to view from the four buttons located on the right side of the CIA The buttons are Current Value displays information that indicates e Channel number e Device Type e Most recent intensity move cue number e Next intensity move e What the channel is inhibited by if anything A list of all parameters on the channel showing the current value and its source the absolute value delay and timing information and any parked values Background Value displays similar information Channel number
423. wish to designate your RPU as something other than a primary you must exit the lon environment and choose a different designation from the Eos Configuration Utility welcome screen For more information on multi console terms such as primary or backup please see Multi console and Synchronized Backup page 307 316 lon Operations Manual Software Configuration Settings for the RPU can be altered in the Eos Configuration Utility ECU The 20 buttons on the front panel of the RPU are configurable from the RPU section of the ECU To configure the RPU buttons Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 In the lon browser select File gt Exit lon and confirm the selection Eos will close and you will enter the lon welcome screen Click on the Settings button This will open the ECU On the right side of the screen click on the RPU button to enter the RPU button setup A virtual display of the RPU buttons is displayed with the current button settings labeled on each button Click on a button you wish to alter A button window will open Click on the type of button you want it to be Macro or Hard Key If Macro Click on the Macro box and enter the desired macro number from the keyboard and press enter Then click Accept If Hardkey Click on the Hardkey drop down menu and select the hard key you wish to use Then click Accept Repeat this process for any other buttons you wish to reconf
424. with a Single Cue List 155 Manual Timing at a Cue Level It is possible to assign a time of manual for manual parameter transition through the associated fader Manual times are assigned by using the Manual softkey that is displayed when recording a cue Record Cue 4 Time Manual Enter applies a manual time If the cue had previously been given split times would apply a manual to the upfade focus color and beam times If the cue had a single time all of the timing would be manual and controlled by the fader Record Cue 4 Time Time Manual Enter applies a manual intensity time to the downfade Record Cue 4 Color Time Manual Enter applies a manual time to any color data changes in cue 4 Non intensity Parameter Category Timing Timing can also be applied for focus color and beam parameter categories at a cue level By default FCB timing is the same as intensity upfade time Once FCB timing is different than intensity upfade time those times are no longer affected by intensity upfade changes When you apply a time to an individual parameter category and that category has no movement the time is displayed in grey The specified timing will remain in grey until that category is provided with a move instruction at which point it the timing will display in white Record Cue 2 Color Time 7 Enter records cue 2 with a cue level color time of 7
425. wo monitors are used one monitor will show the playback status display as well as the CIA and the other monitor becomes the primary area for displayed information In this dual configuration lon will first open with the live table display open on the primary monitor and the playback status and CIA visible on the other monitor D ua F Vonitor Dual Monitor Primary Display Live Playback Status Display You can press the Expand key to expand the primary display onto the secondary display Primary Display expanded To return to the original view press Expand again For additional information on displays see Please see for more information on configuring lon for a dual monitor configuration lon Operations Manual The Central Information Area CIA The Central Information Area CIA is displayed on the lower portion of the screen By default the CIA consists of two primary areas the parameter display and the browser Double arrows CIA lock Parameter display Browser CIA show hide shown Cricket amp Cache Y unlocked Parameter category button labels Parameter Display This display shows the parameters available for patched channels It is also where you can select which parameters to view in live or blind The parameter display will dynamically change depending on the channel fixture selected and its applicable parameters Browser The browser is the interface for numerous functions including saving a show
426. ws you to set a channel or parameter to a specific value and have it remain at that level on stage live mode prohibiting manual control override cue or submaster playback modification Park may also be used to place a scaling instruction on the intensity output of a channel Note A parked channel intensity is not impacted by grandmaster or blackout operations 222 Parked values are withheld from all record targets but you can manually set levels for parked channels and parameters and store those values into record targets Keep in mind that the values set and stored in live do not actually output to the system if the parameter is parked When channels or parameters are parked the LED on the Park button illuminates and the live display will indicate Parked Channels or Parked Dimmers in the top right corner In addition any parked channel or parameter will be indicated with a white channel number and a P will be visible in the channel When the parked channel or parameter is unparked it reverts to the level the console is currently providing or its default value if there is no current instruction Park instructions are not subject to partitioned control Any programmer or operator may park and unpark channels or parameters as needed Parked parameters set by radio focus remotes RFR will automatically unpark when the associated device goes offline Channels parameters and outputs can be parked and unparked from l
427. xample MSC Transmit Channel 5 0 Enter lon Operations Manual ACN MIDI Tx ID This setting allows you to specify the ID number of MIDI Show Control data that lon transmits over an Advanced Control Network ACN When set lon will transmit MSC data to any gateway that has its MIDI Out Stream ID set to the same number ACN_MIDI Transmit ID can be from 1 32 ID ranges may be used e ACN MIDI Transmit ID 2 5 Enter Analog Inputs This touchbutton toggles the setting for receiving analog inputs between Enabled and Disabled Default is Enabled Relay Outputs This touchbutton toggles the setting for allowing lon to trigger external relays Options are Enabled or Disabled The default is Enabled Serial Enablej This touchbutton toggles the ability to receive serial commands Options are Enabled or Disabled The default is Enabled Serial Group Ids This touchbutton is for setting up which serial group IDs the lon will listen to Serial Group IDs are from 1 32 lon can be set to listen to multiple group IDs Serial Group Ids 1 5 Enter Partitions Pressing the Partitions button in Show setup opens the partition display in the CIA This display shows any recorded partitions including the four pre existing partitions For more information see Using Partitioned Control page 289 Note Filter setup and encoder configuration settings are not avail
428. xt or Last to cycle through the list Press Select Last to reselect the entire range Note Next and Last work with the current flexichannel state See Using Flexichannel on page 40 Offset Offset is a feature used to select a range of channels from a broader channel selection For the offset feature to function you must first select a group of channels then press Offset When Offset is pressed the softkeys change to the following Even Odd Reverse and Random These keys along with the numeric keys from the keypad are used to create channel offsets These channel commands can be combined with group record functions The following examples illustrate how offset works 1 thru 10 Offset Even Enter selects channels 2 4 6 8 10 1 thru 2 0 Offset 3 Enter from the selected group this syntax would select channels 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 which is an offset of every third channel from the selection Group 5 Offset Random Enter selects all channels in Group 5 and places them in random order This selection may be used only temporarily or it may be recorded to a new Group 1 thru 2 0 Offset Even Random Enter selects all even channels within the range and puts them in random order Offset 4 Enter selects every fourth channel in the current channel selection KI Basic Manual Control 109 110 Setting Intensity Channel inte
429. y Stop a Macro If you need to stop a macro while running for example during an infinite loop you may press Escape and the macro will stop Delete a Macro You can delete a macro from the macro editor display by selecting the macro and pressing Delete Enter You will be prompted to confirm the deletion Confirm by pressing Enter again or abort by pressing Clear For Example Delete macro 5 from the macro list 5 Enter e Delete Enter Enter Or from any display e Delete Macro 5 Enter lon Operations Manual Chapter 23 storing and Using Curves A curve is a relationship between the timing of a fade and the output level of a cue cue part or dimmer at each point of time during that fade By using a non linear curve you can create a variety of effects accommodate variations and deficiencies in your lighting equipment alter the transition ramp and protect equipment from stress This chapter contains the following sections About Curves 272 e Creating a Curve 273 Editing Curves 260 65 AA eee Red dada 274 Applying a Curve 275 Delete a Curve 275 EE Storing and Using Curves 271 272 About Curves You may apply curves to dimmers in patch Curves may also be applied to cues and to cue parts When applied to a cue the curve impacts only the inte
430. y by holding Data and pressing the desired parameter category button also called encoder paging keys By default the spreadsheet view displays just intensity Cue numbers Channel number Parameters Ci 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BLIND Cue 11 1 Cue11 List 11 Timing Flags Pi Cue Int Up Int Down Focus Color MBAHP Fw Hg Link Loop Curve Rate Label External L 1 1 m Snapshot System Basics 45 Encoders The encoders are one of two ways to control the non intensity parameters NPs of multiple parameter devices The four encoders are identified by the encoder LCD just beneath the encoders Encoder Navigation Use the encoder page buttons located to the upper right of the encoder LCD to choose which parameters are currently available on the encoders There are six readily usable buttons Focus Color Custom Form Image and Shutter Pressing any of these will change the parameters controlled by the encoders Some fixtures have more parameters than can be displayed on one encoder page The number of pages for each category is displayed at the right side of the encoder screen To view the other pages simply press the Color Custom Shutter Image or Form button to advance the pages The number of pages is indicated in the LCD Locking the Encoders It is possible to lock out the encoders To lock out the encoders press Clear amp Encoder Page Keys To unlock press Clear amp En
431. y the relevant parameters that have manual data Filters and selective storing provide additional methods to control what is stored into a palette Storing Palettes with Record The most common method to create palettes is to store them from Live Palettes can be numbered from 0 01 through 1000 and each can be given a label Record will store the relevant current parameter data for all channels with non default data for the appropriate palette type as modified by the filter settings on the front panel For Example Assume you want to create a custom color using the color picker for hue and saturation data or the encoders for CMY data and store that data to a custom color palette First you must select channels e 1 thru 1 1 Enter Using the color picker adjust the hue and saturation levels to the desired look Or you can use the encoders to set the desired color using CMY color mixing or the gel picker When the color is selected store the palette e Record Color Palette 4 Label lt FOH Blue Enter Notice that when you recorded the color palette all of the color data for channels 1 through 11 is displayed in live with the reference CP 4 Because Record was used it stored all of the color parameters for those channels Note Record will store the entire parameter category into a palette Record Only stores just the values you have adjusted manually to the target palette See Storing Pa

Lighting Control Console Operations Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents